SE - 2010 Question Paper Set

Total No. of Q uestions12] [Total No.
of Printed Pages8+1
[3862]-101
S.E. (CIVIL) (I Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
ENGINEERING MATHMATICS-III
(2008 COURSE)
Time : Three Hours Maximum Marks : 100
N.B. : (i) Answer 3 questions from Section I and 3 questions from
Section II.
(ii) Answers to the two Sections should be written in separate
answer-books.
(iii) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.
(iv) Figures to the right indicate full marks.
(v) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic
pocket calculator and steam tables is allowed.
(vi) Assume suitable data, if necessary.
SECTION I
1. (a) Solve any three : [12]
(i)
2
(D + 3D 2) cos
x
e x
y e e + = +
(ii)
2 2
(D 4D 4) cos
x
y e x + =
P.T.O.
[3862]-101 2
(iii)
2
2
4
d y
y
dx
+
= tan 2x [By variation of parameters]
(iv)
3 2
3 2
3 2
1
2 2 10
d y d y
x x y x
x dx dx
| |
+ + = +
|
\
(b) Solve : [5]
t
dx
y e
dt
+ =
t
dy
x e
dt

=
,
given that x = 1, y = 0 at t = 0.
Or
(i)
2
3 3
1
(D + 6D 9)
x
y
x e
+ =
(ii) (D
5
D)y = 2x + 2
x
(iii) (D
2
4D + 4)y = e
2x
sec
2
x
[By variation of parameters]
(iv)
2
2
2
( ) 4 ( ) 6
d y dy
x a x a y x
dx dx
+ + + =
(b) Solve : [5]
2 2 2 2 2 2
( ) ( ) ( )
dx dy dz
x y z y z x z x y
= =
+ +
[3862]-101 3 P.T.O.
3. (a) The differential equation satisfied by a beam, uniformly loaded
with one end fixed and second subjected to a tensile force
P is given by :
2 2
2
W
EI P
2
d y x
y
dx

=
Show that the elastic curve for the beam under conditions
y = 0 and
0
dy
dx
=
.
when x = 0, is given by :
2
2 2 2
W 2
2P
nx nx
e e
y x
n n n
(
= +
(

where,
2
P
EI
n =
. [8]
(b) A homogeneous rod of conducting material of length 100 cm
with ends kept at zero temperature satisfies the equation :
2
2
2
u u
c
t x

=

.
If the initial temperature is :
; 0 50
( , 0)
100 ; 50 100.
x x
u x
x x

[8]
[3862]-101 4
Or
4. (a) It is found experimentally that a weight of 3 kg stretches
a spring to 15 cm. If the weight is pulled down 10 cm
below equilibrium position and then released
(i) find the amplitude, period and frequency of motion.
(ii) determine the position, velocity and acceleration as a
function of time. [8]
(b) Solve the equation :
2 2
2 2
0
u u
x y

+ =

subject to the following conditions :
(i) u(x, ) = 0
(ii) u(0, y) = 0
(iii) u(1, y) = 0
(iv) u(x, 0) = x(1 x) for 0 < x < 1. [8]
5. (a) Solve the following system of equations by Gauss-Seidel iteration
method : [9]
9x
1
+ 2x
2
+ 4x
3
= 20
x
1
+ 10x
2
+ 4x
3
= 6
2x
1
4x
2
+ 10x
3
= 15
[3862]-101 5 P.T.O.
(b) Use Runge-Kutta method of fourth order to solve :
dy
x y
dx
= +
; y(0) = 1
to find y at x = 0.2 taking h = 0.1. [8]
Or
6. (a) Solve the equation :
2
dy
x y
dx
= +
; y (0) = 1
to find y at x = 0.1 using Eulers modified method taking
h = 0.05. [9]
(b) Solve the following system of equations by Choleskys
method :
4x
1
2x
2
= 0
2x
1
+ 4x
2
x
3
= 1
x
2
+ 4x
3
= 0. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Compute the first four moments, coefficient of skewness and
kurtosis for the following frequencies : [6]
No. of Jobs completed No. of Workers
010 6
1020 26
2030 47
3040 15
4050 6
[3862]-101 6
(b) Compute the coefficient of correlation between the supply and
price : [6]
x y f
5 7 6
9 9 9
15 14 13
19 21 20
24 23 16
28 29 11
32 30 7
(c) There are 6 married couples in a room. It two persons are
chosen at random, find the probability that :
(i) they are of different sex
(ii) they are married to each other. [5]
Or
8. (a) Obtain the correlation between population density (per square
mile) and death rate (per thousand persons) from the data
related to 5 cities. [6]
Population Density Death Rate
200 12
500 18
400 16
700 21
300 10
[3862]-101 7 P.T.O.
(b) If two lines of regressions are 9x + y = 0 and 4x +
y = and the means of x and y and 2 and 3 respectively,
find the values of and and coefficient of correlation between
x and y. [6]
(c) Number of road accidents follows a Poissons distribution with
mean 5, find the probability that in a certain month number
of accidents on the highway will be : [5]
(i) less than 3
(ii) between 3 and 5
(iii) more than 3.
9. (a) A particle describes the straight line r = a sec with constant
angular velocity . Find the radial and transverse components
of velocity and acceleration. [5]
(b) If the directional derivatives of = a (x + y) + b(y + z)
+ c(x + z) has maximum value 12 in the directional parallel
to the line
1 2 1
1 2 3
x y z
= =
find the values of a, b, c. [5]
[3862]-101 8
(c) Establish any two : [6]
(i) If
E =
, prove that E. curl E = 0.
(ii) Show that curl curl curl curl
4
E E = , where
E
is
solenoidal.
(iii)
3 3
( ) 6 r r r = .
Or
10. (a) A particle moves along the curve x = a cos t, y = a sin t;
z = bt with constant angular velocity . Find the radial
and transverse components of its linear velocity and acceleration
at any time t. [5]
(b) Find the directional derivatives of f at (1, 2, 1) where
f(x, y, z) = x
2
y + xyz + z
3
along normal to the surface
x
2
y
3
= 4xy + y
2
z at the point (1, 2, 0). [5]
(c) Establish any two :
(i)
4
4
r r r
e e e
r
= +
(ii)
F
n
a r
r
=
is solenoidal field
(iii) [ ( )] a b r a b =
where
a
and
b
are constant vectors. [6]
[3862]-101 9 P.T.O.
11. (a) Verify Greens theorem for
F
= xi + y
2
j over first quadrant
of the circle x
2
+ y
2 = 1. [6]
(b) Evaluate
2
S

( ) S xi yj z k d + +
where S is the curved surface of the cylinder x

2
+ y
2
= 4
bounded by planes z = 0 and z = 2. [6]
(c) Evaluate using Stokes theorem
C
( ) ydx zdy xdz + +
, where C
is intersection of x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
= a
2
, x + z = a. [5]
Or
12. (a) Evaluate
2
S
(2 ) S xyi yz j xzk d + +
over the surface of the

region bounded by x = 0, y = 0, y = 3, and x + 2z = 6. [6]
(b) Obtain the equation of streamlines in case of steady motion
of fluid defined by
2 2
( ) ( ) ( ) q y xz i yz x j x y k = + + + + . [6]
(c) Evaluate
C
F for dr
F (2 3) (4 ) y i xz j z x k = + + + along
the path x
2
= 2t
2
; y = t; z = t
3
from t = 0 to t = 1. [5]
Total No. of Questions12] [Total No. of Printed Pages4
[3862]-102
S.E. (CIVIL) (I Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
BUILDING MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
(2008 PATTERN)
Section II.
answer-books.
(iii) Figures to the right indicate full marks.
(iv) You are advised to attempt not more than 6 questions.
SECTION I
1. (a) Enlist the various classification of buildings as per National
Building Code (NBC) of India, 2005. Explain the educational
building. [6]
(b) Differentiate between dry rubble masonry and ashlar chamfered
masonry. [6]
(c) What are the points to be considered while supervising brick
masonry ? [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-102 2
Or
2. (a) Explain : [6]
(i) Uncoursed random rubble masonry
(ii) Ashlar fine masonry.
(b) Explain the residential building as per National Building Code
(NBC) of India, 2005. [6]
(c) Differentiate between stone masonry and brick masonry. [4]
3. (a) What are the types of composite masonry ? Explain in detail
stone composite masonry. [6]
(b) What do you understand by joints in concrete work ? Explain
the expansion and contraction joint in concrete work. [6]
(c) Explain the casting procedure for the reinforced concrete
column. [4]
Or
4. (a) What are the important features of the cavity walls ? [6]
(b) Explain the curing of concrete. [6]
(c) What are the merits and demerits of precast concrete ? [4]
5. (a) Enlist the materials used for the flooring. Explain marble
flooring. [6]
(b) What are the types of roofs ? Explain queen post roof
truss. [6]
(c) Write a short note on asphalt flooring. [6]
[3862]-102 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Enlist the types of steel sloping roof truss. Explain north light
roof truss. [6]
(b) Write a short note on mosaic flooring. [6]
(c) Explain in detail laying of A.C. sheets. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Show clearly the following parts with a sketch of window :
(i) Horn
(ii) Holdfast
(iii) Head
(iv) Sill
(v) Meeting style
(vi) Panel [6]
(b) Enlist the types of windows. Explain louvered window. [6]
(c) Explain R.C.C. lintel. What are the merits of lintel over the
arch ? [6]
Or
8. (a) Enlist the types of doors. Explain rolling door. [6]
(b) Explain the installation of the door frame. [6]
(c) Show clearly the following parts with a sketch of arch :
(i) Span
(ii) Rise
(iii) Crown
(iv) Key
(v) Voussiors
(vi) Extrados [6]
[3862]-102 4
9. (a) Design a R.C.C. dog-legged staircase and draw a detailed plan
for an office building, a staircase room available is 5m 3m
with the outer wall thickness of 230 mm. Floor to floor height
of room is 3000 mm. The thickness of R.C.C. slab is
150 mm. [6]
(b) Write a short note on Escalators. [4]
(c) What are the general measures of fire safety in
buildings ? [6]
Or
10. (a) Write a short note on Elevators. [6]
(b) What are the requirements of a good stair ? [4]
(c) What are the classification of stairs ? Explain R.C.C.
staircase. [6]
11. (a) Explain in detail water closets. [6]
(b) Write a short note on plastic. [6]
(c) Explain cork flooring. [4]
Or
12. (a) Write a short note on glass. [4]
(b) What do you understand by the Linoleum flooring ? [6]
(c) What is seasoning of timber ? What are the methods of
seasoning ? [6]
Total No. of Questions12] [Total No. of Printed Pages8+2
[3862]-103
S.E. (Civil) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer three questions from Section I and three questions
from Section II.
Answer Q. 1 or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4 and Q. 5 or Q. 6 from
Section I and Q. 7 or Q. 8, Q. 9 or Q. 10 and Q. 11 or
Q. 12 from Section II.
answer-books.
(v) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule Mollier charts, electronic
SECTION I
1. (a) Write short notes on : [4]
(i) Factor of safety
(ii) Single and double shear.
P.T.O.
[3862]-103 2
(b) Draw and explain stress-strain diagram for mild steel. [5]
(c) A reinforced concrete column of 300 mm diameter is reinforced
with 6 bars of 16 mm diameter. Allowable stress in concrete
is 7 MPa and allowable stress in steel is 140 MPa. Modular
ratio is 13. Find out the load carrying capacity of the
column. [8]
Or
(i) Poissons ratio
(ii) Bulk modulus
(iii) Modulus of rigidity
(iv) Youngs modulus
State relation between any three of these.
(b) A steel rod 2 m long is at 30C. The temperature of this rod
is increased to 150C. Find : [8]
(i) free expansion of the rod
(ii) temperature stress produced if expansion is prevented and
nature of stress.
[3862]-103 3 P.T.O.
(iii) stress produced if 2 mm expansion is permitted and nature
of stress
if a = 12 10
6
/C and E = 200 GPa, Bar diameter = 16
mm.
3. (a) A continuous beam ABCD is simply supported at A and C and
is loaded as shown in Fig. 1. Draw SFD, BMD and AFD. Show
all important points. [9]
Fig. 1
(b) Draw loading diagram and BMD from SFD given in Fig. 2. The
beam is a simply supported beam supported at A and B. There
is no moment applied as loading. [8]
Fig. 2
[3862]-103 4
Or
4. (a) A simply supported beam ABCD is supported and loaded as shown
in Fig. 3. Draw SFD and BMD and show all important points.
Find out the value and location of maximum bending
moment. [9]
Fig. 3
(b) Derive expression for shear force and bending moment at a
distance x from free end of a cantilever subjected to uniformly
varying load with loading intensity w, at the fixed end. Span
of the cantilever is L. Also draw SFD and BMD for the
cantilever. (Loading intensity at the free end is zero) [8]
5. (a) A simply supported beam of span 4 m uses a T section with
flange 100 10 deep and web 150 10 wide. The section is
symmetric @ vertical axis. The beam carries two point loads
5 kN each placed symmetrically at third point. Find out maximum
shear stress in the beam. [8]
[3862]-103 5 P.T.O.
(b) A symmetric I section is 150 wide and 200 deep. The flange
thickness and web thickness is 10 mm. This section is used for
cantilever beam having a span of 3 m and subjected to uniformly
distributed load. Find the maximum u.d.l. that can be supported
if E = 200 GPa and maximum allowable stress is 180 MPa. [8]
Or
6. (a) Draw shear stress distribution on a T section with flange.
150 15 deep and flange 200 20 wide. The section is symmetric
@ vertical axis. The shear force applied is 110 kN. [8]
(b) A wooden rectangular section 200 300 deep is strengthened
by fixing two steel plates at the top and bottom of the section
200 wide and 10 thick. E
s
/E
w
= 20 and allowable stresses in
steel and timber are 200 MPa and 20 MPa respectively. Find
the moment of resistance of the section. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) A 75 kW motor is driving a line shaft through gear A at 26.5
r.p.m. Bevel gear at B and C drives cement mixtures. If the
power requirement of mixer driven by gear B is 25 kW and
that of C is 50 kW, what are the required shaft diameters d
1
and d
2
. If the allowable shearing stress in the shaft is 40 MPa,
(Refer Fig. 4). [9]
Fig. 4
[3862]-103 6
(b) Determine the strain energy of the prismatic beam AB, subjected
u.d.l. of 25 kN/m over total span AB of 10 m. Assume :
I = 195.3 10
3
mm
4
E = 2 10
5
MPa
The beam AB is simply supported. [8]
Or
8. (a) A steel shaft of 950 mm diameter is required to transmit
220 kW power at 225 r.p.m. and maximum torque is 40% greater
than the mean torque. Find the maximum allowable shear stress
in the shaft material. [8]
(b) Three round bars having same length but different shapes are
shown in Fig. 5. All three bars are subjected to same load, P.
Find the amount of strain energy stored in each bar, assuming
linear elastic behaviour. [9]
Fig. 5
[3862]-103 7 P.T.O.
9. (a) A generator shaft of hallow circular cross-section with outside
diameter = 200 mm and inside diameter = 160 mm, is subjected
to a torque of 11.1 kNm and axial compressive load of 362 kN.
Determine the maximum tensile stress, maximum compressive
stress and maximum shear stress in the shaft. [8]
(b) For the element shown in Fig. 6, locate the planes on which
magnitude of the shear stress and normal stress are equal. Show
the results on properly oriented elements. Also find the principal
stresses. [9]
Fig. 6
Or
10. (a) An element in plane stress is subjected to stresses s
x
= 50 MPa,
s
y
= 10 MPa and t
xy
= 40 MPa as shown in Fig. 7, using
Mohrs circle, determine : [8]
(i) Stresses acting on the element rotated through an angle
q = 45.
[3862]-103 8
(ii) Principal stresses.
Fig. 7
(b) A shaft of 100 mm diameter transmits 200 kW power at 200
r.p.m. At a section, bending moment is 5 kNm. Find the principal
stresses, maximum shear stress and principal plane. [9]
11. (a) A hollow cast iron column, 5 m long is fixed at both end and
has an external diameter of 300 mm. The column supports an
axial load of 1200 kN. Find the internal diameter of the column.
Assume a = 1/1600 and f
c
= 550 MPa. [8]
(b) Determine the stress resultant at four corners of column subjected
to eccentric load of P = 600 kN, shown in Fig. 8. [8]
Fig. 8
[3862]-103 9 P.T.O.
Or
12. (a) Two identical rolled steel I sections are used to form a built
up section for axially loaded column. The sections are placed
side by side and connected together suitably to act as a one
unit as shown in Fig. 9. [10]
Fig. 9
Calculate the distance, d between these sections for same load
carrying capacity about both the axes. Also find safe load using
factor of safely of 4. The column has one end hinged and other
end fixed, with a height of 4 mm.
Use Rankines formula with f
c
= 320 MPa, a = 1/7500.
Properties of single I section are as follows :
Area = 6133 mm
2
[3862]-103 10
I
XX
= 98.21 10
6
mm
4
, K
XX
= 126.6 mm
I
YY
= 9.9 10
6
mm
4
, K
YY
= 40.2 mm
(b) Explain with neat sketches the stable, unstable and neutral
equilibrium related to column subjected to axial load and critical
load. [6]
Total No. of Questions6 + 1 fig. Attac.] [Total No. of Printed Pages 4
[3862]-104
S.E. (Civil) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY
(2008 PATTERN)
N.B. : (i) Answers to the two Sections should be written in separate
books.
(ii) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.
(iv) Assume suitable data, if necessary.
(v) All questions are compulsory.
SECTION I
1. (a) Distinguish between plutonic and volcanic rocks and describe
any two rocks from each category. [8]
(b) Describe Hardness as a physical property of mineral. [3]
(c) Explain the process of decomposition of rocks in detail. [5]
Or
(a) How parallel structures in metamorphic rocks are developed ?
Explain the process in detail. [8]
(b) How variation in length of transportation leads to development
of different sedimentary rocks ? Explain it. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-104 2
2. Write notes on :
(a) Climatic changes during Gondwana period. [5]
(b) Youthful stage of a river. [5]
(c) Field characters of Deccan Trap Basalt. [6]
Or
(a) Give a comparative account of Peninsula and extra Peninsula
divisions of India. [6]
(b) Gondwana coal. [4]
(c) Two features developed due to river erosion. [6]
3. (a) Explain the different features resulted due to action of
compressional type of tectonic forces. [8]
(b) Write a note on angular and non-conformity. [6]
(c) Explain Sill and Phaccolith as igneous intrusions. [4]
Or
(a) How are rocks faulted ? Describe various types and parts of
a fault. [12]
(b) Explain the terms conformable series and Inlier and
Outlier. [6]
[3862]-104 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
4. Write notes on :
(I) (a) Fracture surfaces of drill cores. [6]
(b) Quality and Quantity of returning drill water. [5]
(II) With the help of figure-1 (attached) answer :
(a) Identify the feature as shown by an arrow. [1]
(b) Number of series of beds and their sequence. [4]
Or
(a) Remote sensing Techniques. [4]
(b) Explain the methods of surface and subsurface survey as a
part of geological investigations at a project site. [12]
5. Write notes on :
(a) Focus, Epicentre and Isoseismal lines. [6]
(b) Types of volcanic eruptions. [5]
(c) Vertical distribution of Groundwater. [5]
Or
(a) Will you align a road along the slope of a hill where dip
and slope are in the same direction ? Explain it. Also add
a note on preventive measures against landslides. [12]
(b) Contact springs in Deccan trap area. [4]
[3862]-104 4
6. (a) Feasibility of tunnelling in tectonic areas. [9]
(b) Relationship between type of dam and local geology. [5]
(c) Treatment to be given to a fracture crossing dam
alignment. [4]
Or
(a) Dams on Limestones and Marbles. [6]
(b) Will you align a tunnel in E W direction of dipping sedimentary
beds exhibiting true dip towards North ? Give reasons. [5]
(c) Geological features leading to leakage below a dam. [7]
P.T.O.
[3862]-105
S.E. (Civil)(First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Clearly explain the use of knowledge of geotechnical engineering
in the construction of :
(i) embankment for road or railway
(ii) earth retaining wall. [6]
(b) Define the terms : water content, void ratio, degree of
saturation, specific gravity and state different methods to find
water content of a given soil with their suitability to different
types of soil. [6]
[3862]-105 2
(c) Draw a neat sketch of particle size distribution curve for a
well graded soil and explain how C
c
and C
u
are obtained.
Give the IS criteria for classification of soil based on the values
of C
c
and C
u
. [5]
Or
(a) Draw a neat sketch to show change in the volume of soil
due to change in the water content for a cohesive soil and
define Atterberg limits. [6]
(b) Draw a neat sketch of plasticity chart as given by IS
and classify the soil with liquid limit = 75% and plastic
limit = 42% according to the chart. [6]
(c) A specimen of soil having a volume of 300 CC weighs
550 gm in wet condition. Determine voids ratio, degree of
saturation, porosity and water content of the soil specimen
if after oven drying at 105C for 24 hours, its weight reduced
to 472 gm. Take G = 2.67. [5]
2. (a) State Darcys law, define coefficient of permeability and derive
equation for coefficient of permeability used in constant head
method. [6]
(b) With a neat sketch explain quick sand condition and derive
expression for critical hydraulic gradient. [6]
[3862]-105 3 P.T.O.
(c) The void ratio of a soil is 0.76 while its coefficient of permeability
is 1.2 10
4
cm/sec. If, keeping all other factors constant,
the soil is compacted so as to reduce the void ratio to 0.60,
what will be the coefficient of permeability of the soil if
3
.
1
e
k
e

+

[5]
Or
(a) Draw an illustrative flownet for a sheet pile and state any
four properties of flownet. State equation used to calculate
seepage through a dam using flownet and give the meaning
of all the terms in the equation. [6]
(b) With a neat sketch, describe pumping out method for
determination of coefficient of permeability of soil in the field,
for unconfined aquifer and derive the equation for coefficient
of permeability. [6]
(c) In order to compute the seepage loss through the foundation
of a dam, flownet was drawn. The flownet study gave number
of flow channels N
f
= 8 and number of equipotential
drops N
d
= 18. The head of water lost during seepage was
6 m. If the coefficient of permeability of foundation soil is
4 10
5
m/min, compute the seepage loss per meter length
of dam per day. [5]
[3862]-105 4
3. (a) State and explain any four factors which influence compaction
of soil. [4]
(b) Explain how compaction control is achieved in the field using
a Proctor needle. [4]
(c) In a standard compaction test, on a soil sample having specific
gravity 2.7, the following test results were obtained :
Water Content Bulk Density
(%) (gm/cc)
5 1.89
8 2.13
10 2.2
12 2.21
15 2.16
20 2.08
Determine OMC, MDD, Void ratio, Porosity and Degree of
saturation at OMC. [8]
Or
(a) State the formula for stress in a soil mass, due to a point
load, at a point below ground level as given by Boussinesq
and give the meaning of all the terms in it. [4]
[3862]-105 5 P.T.O.
(b) With a neat sketch, explain the use of Newmarks influence
chart to find stress at a given point under a loaded
area. [6]
(c) A 2 m 2 m square footing carries a gross load of 550 kN.
The footing rests at a depth of 1.5 m below ground level.
The subsoil consists of a 2 m thick layer of sand having a
unit weight of 18 kN/m
3
. The sand layer is underlain by
a 4 m thick layer of soft clay having unit weight of
17.2 kN/m
3
. Compute the maximum vertical stress at the
middle of the clay layer before and after the construction of
the footing. Use Boussinesqs equation. [6]
SECTION II
4. (a) Explain Mohr-Coulomb failure theory and state Coulombs
law of shearing strength in total and effective stress
condition. [6]
(b) What are the advantages and disadvantages of triaxial
compression test in comparison with the direct shear
test ? [6]
[3862]-105 6
(c) A direct shear test was carried out on a cohesive soil sample
and the following results were obtained :
Normal Stress Shear Stress at Failure
(kN/m
2
) (kN/m
2
)
150 110
250 120
What would be the deviator stress at failure if a triaxial
test is carried out on the same soil with cell pressure of
150 kN/m
2
? [6]
Or
(a) State the factors affecting shear strength of soil and explain
the terms sensitivity and thixotropy. [6]
(b) Write a note on Vane Shear Test. [6]
(c) The shear strength parameters of a given soil are, C = 0.26
kg/cm
2
and f = 21. Undrained triaxial tests are to be
carried out on specimens of this soil. Determine deviator
stress at which failure will occur if the cell pressure be
2.5 kg/cm
2
. [6]
[3862]-105 7 P.T.O.
5. (a) Explain Rankines earth pressure theory for cohesionless
soils. [5]
(b) Explain Rehbanns graphical method for evaluation of earth
pressure. [5]
(c) A retaining wall 9 m high retains a cohesionless soil, with
an angle of internal friction 33. The surface is level with
the top of the wall. The unit weight of the top 3 m of the
fill is 2.1 t/m
3
and that of the rest is 2.7 t/m
3
. Find the
magnitude and point of application of the resultant active
thrust. [6]
Or
(a) Explain active and passive states of plastic equilibrium. [5]
(b) State assumption in Rankines earth pressure theory. [4]
(c) A retaining wall, 7.5 m high, retains a cohesionless
backfill. The top 3 m of the fill has a unit weight of
18 kN/m
3
and f = 30 and the rest has a unit weight of
24 kN/m
3
and f = 20. Determine the pressure distribution
on the wall. [7]
[3862]-105 8
6. (a) Describe with figures, the modes of failure for finite and infinite
slopes. [8]
(b) Rock classification by RMR method. [4]
(c) Explain durability of rocks. [4]
Or
(a) Explain tests for determination of shear strength of
rocks. [8]
(b) Write short notes on causes and remedial measures of
Landslides. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-106
S.E. (Civil) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
FLUID MECHANICSI
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
Attempt Q. 1 or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4, Q. 5 or Q. 6
from Section I. Q. 7 or Q. 8, Q. 9 or Q. 10, Q. 11
or Q. 12 from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Define absolute viscosity and give classification of fluids
based on Newton s law of viscosity and represent it
graphically. [6]
[3862]-106 2
(b) A glass tube of 0.2 mm diameter is immersed in mercury.
The surface tension of mercury in contact with air is
0.5 N/m. The angle of contact for mercury is 130. Calculate
the capillary effect. [6]
(c) What parameter is used to determine whether the flow
is :
(i) Subcritical or critical
(ii) Laminar or turbulent
(iii) Subsonic or supersonic. [6]
Or
2. (a) Calculate the gauge pressure and the absolute pressure
within :
(i) a droplet of water 0.3 cm in diameter
(ii) a jet of water 0.3 cm in diameter.
Assume the surface tension of water as 0.07 N/m and
atmospheric pressure as 101.3 N/m
2
. [4]
(b) The force F on the propeller of an aircraft is known to depend
upon speed of the aircraft V, air density r, air viscosity m,
propeller diameter D, speed of rotation of propeller N. Derive
an expression for force F. [8]
[3862]-106 3 P.T.O.
(c) An oil of specific gravity 0.9 and viscosity 0.9 poise is to be
transported at the rate of 1000 l/s through a 1.2 m diameter
pipe. Tests were conducted on a 10 cm diameter pipe using
water at 20C. Viscosity of water at 20C is 0.01 poise. Find
the rate of flow in the model. [6]
3. (a) Derive an expression for total pressure and the depth of centre
of pressure from free surface of liquid, at inclined plane surface
submerged in the liquid. [8]
(b) What is metacentre ? Define metacentric height.
A wooden block of specific gravity 0.8 floats in water. If the
size of the block is 1 m 0.6 m 0.5 m. Find its metacentric
height. [8]
Or
4. (a) Explain the procedure of computing the resultant hydrostatic
force on a curved surface. [8]
(b) A closed cylindrical tank 2 m diameter, 4 m high contains
water upto 3 m when it is rest. The cylinder is rotated with
its longitudinal axis vertical. Find :
(i) the angular speed when water just touches the top
(ii) the depth of water at the centre of the tank when it
is rotated at 120 r.p.m. [8]
[3862]-106 4
5. (a) Derive the continuity equation for one-dimensional flow. State
the assumptions made. [8]
(b) The velocity components in two-dimensional irrotational flow
of an incompressible fluid are :
3
2
2
3
y
u x y x = - +
3
2
2 .
3
x
v xy y = - -
Obtain the expression for velocity potential and stream
function. [8]
Or
6. (a) Explain any one method of drawing flownet. Show that the
streamlines and equipotential lines intersect each other
orthogonally. What are the used of the flownet ? [8]
(b) (i) Determine the missing component of velocity distribution
such that they satisfy continuity equation :
v = 2yz
2
+ 3z
2
, w = 4xz 2yz
2
3
z
3
, u = ?
(ii) Define stream function y. [8]
[3862]-106 5 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) State Bernoullis equation. Derive an expression for measuring
discharge of fluid through a pipe with venturimeter. [8]
(b) A vertical sharp edged orifice 100 mm in diameter, is discharging
water at the rate of 100 l/s under a constant head of
10 m. The co-ordinate of a point on the jet is 4.5 m horizontal
and 0.5 m vertical, from the vena contracta. Find :
(i) Coefficient of velocity
(ii) Coefficient of discharge
(iii) Coefficient of contraction. [8]
Or
8. (a) Derive Eulers equation of motion and then derive Bernoullis
equation along the stream tube. [8]
(b) A pipeline carrying oil (sp. gr. 0.8) changes its diameter from
200 mm to 400 mm, which is 5 m at a higher level. If the
pressures at these two points are 100 kN/m
2
and 50 kN/m
2
respectively and the discharge is 250 l/s, determine direction
of flow and loss of head. [8]
[3862]-106 6
9. (a) For a steady laminar flow through a circular pipe, prove that
the velocity distribution is parabolic and average velocity is
half of the maximum velocity. [10]
(b) The velocity distribution in the boundary layer is :
2
2 ,
u y y
v

= -

d d
dthickness of boundary layer.
Calculate :
(i) Displacement thickness
(ii) Momentum thickness. [8]
Or
10. (a) Show that for laminar flow between two parallel plates at
rest, the mean velocity is two-third of maximum velocity. [10]
(b) Explain the development of boundary layer over a flat plate
held parallel to the direction of flow. Also, state various factors
affecting growth of boundary layer. [8]
11. (a) Write short notes on :
(i) Prandtls mixing length theory
(ii) Hydrodynamically smooth and rough pipes. [8]
[3862]-106 7 P.T.O.
(b) What are the different losses in pipe flow and write expression
for computing them ? [8]
Or
12. (a) Using Prandtls mixing length theory, show that velocity variation
for turbulent flow is logarithmic. [8]
(b) Derive an expression for the loss of head due to sudden
enlargement in pipe flow. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-107
BUILDING PLANNING
(2008 COURSE)
Time : Four Hours Maximum Marks : 100
N.B. : (i) Solve Q. 1 or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4, Q. 5 or Q. 6 from
Section I and Q. 7 or Q. 8, Q. 9 or Q. 10, Q. 11
or Q. 12 from Section II.
(ii) Use separately answer-sheet for Section I and Drawing
Sheet for Section II.
SECTION I
1. (a) Write a short note on services and amenities in the
town. [6]
(b) Explain the role of plan sanctioning authority for
townships. [6]
(c) Write short notes on eco-friendly and cost effective
buildings. [6]
Or
2. (a) Write a short note on 7/12 abstract, giving meaning of
each term. [6]
[3862]-107 2
(b) Write a short note on benefits of Green Buildings. [6]
(c) Explain how architectural planning principles help architectural
composition. [6]
3. (a) What is F.A.R. ? What are the areas exempted while calculating
F.A.R. ? [6]
(b) Give the definitions of the following :
(i) Building height
(ii) Development. [4]
(c) Write short notes on :
(i) Natural Ventilation
(ii) Artificial Lighting. [6]
Or
4. (a) State the byelaws regarding road width and height of the
building. [6]
(b) The internal dimensions of a factory building are 40 m
25 m 12 m. The number of air changes required per
hour are three. The difference between indoor and outdoor
temperature is 8C. Find the area of openings required if the
distance between inlet and outlet openings is 8 m. [6]
(c) Explain the importance of daylighting and the factors influencing
the daylighting. [4]
[3862]-107 3 P.T.O.
5. (a) Explain in detail any two constructional measures for noise
control. [6]
(b) What is fire hazard ? Explain the means of fire control. [6]
(c) Explain two-pipe plumbing system. [4]
Or
6. (a) What are different acoustical defects ? Explain any one in
detail. [6]
(b) Explain the following terms :
(i) Fire load
(ii) Evacuation time
(iii) Travel distance. [6]
(c) What factors affect designing and planning of electrical
services ? [4]
SECTION II
7. Draw plan and elevation of a twin bungalow. The plot size is
300 m
2
and maximum F.S.I. is 0.8. Road of 8 m width is on the
East side of the plot. Structure is R.C.C. and G + 1. Ext. wall
thickness is 230 mm and internal 150 mm. [20]
[3862]-107 4
Or
8. Draw plan and elevation of a twin bungalow. The plot size is
300 m
2
and maximum F.S.I. is 1.0. Road of 8 m width is on the
North side of the plot. Structure is load bearing and G + 1. Ext.
wall thickness is 300 mm and internal 230 mm. [20]
9. Draw the sketches for the following symbols :
(i) Timber
(ii) VCR Masonry
(iii) Wash basin
(iv) Rolled shape-I section
(v) Revolving door. [10]
Or
10. Draw to a scale 1 : 100 or suitable, a two point perspective
view of an object shown in Fig. 1. Assume eye level 1.8 m
above GL. [10]
Fig. 1
All dimensions are in mm.
[3862]-107 5 P.T.O.
11. It is proposed to construct a PWD Executive Engineers office with
the following data :
(1) Entrance + Waiting 12 m
2
(2) Administrative office 15 m
2
(3) E.E. office (attached toilet) 18 m
2
(4) Technical Session 15 m
2
(5) Record room 9 m
2
(6) PA to Executive 9 m
2
(7) Sanitary block (Ladies & Gents) Suitable
(8) Passage 1.5 m wide
Draw to a scale of 1 : 50 or suitable :
(i) Line plan showing locations of doors, windows. [10]
(ii) Schedule of openings. [5]
(iii) Suggest suitable flooring for different areas. [5]
Or
12. Design a single storeyed Restaurant building on a highway. The following
units are to be provided :
(i) Entrance + General Shop 45 m
2
(ii) Dining Hall 300 m
2
(iii) Service 35 m
2
(iv) Kitchen 45 m
2
(v) Store room 20 m
2
[3862]-107 6
(vi) Cloak room 15 m
2
(vii) Sanitary block for Ladies
and Gents (separate) Suitable
(viii) Passage 1.5 m wide
Draw to a scale of 1 : 50 or suitable :
(a) Line plan showing locations of doors and windows. [10]
(b) Schedule of openings. [4]
(c) Furniture arrangement in the dining area. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-108
SURVEYING
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is meant by orientation in plane table survey ? Explain
method of backsighting for orientation. [5]
(b) A closed traverse was run along a square PQRS in counter-
clockwise direction. The bearing of the line PQ was observed
as 118 30. Find the Forebearings and Backbearings of the
remaining lines and record them in a tabular form. [7]
[3862]-108 2
(c) Differentiate between Dip and Declination. The magnetic
bearing of the sun at noon is 356 30. Find out the
declination. [6]
Or
2. (a) While carrying out compass traverse, the following Forebearings
and Backbearings of various lines were observed. Correct the
bearings affected by local attraction and enter your result in
tabular form : [7]
Line Observed FB Observed BB
PQ 110 00 292 00
QR 40 00 220 00
RS 320 30 140 00
ST 270 00 91 00
(b) Explain in brief intersection method of plane table survey. When
is it used ? [5]
(c) Write in tabular form, how you will convert the bearings from
Reduced Bearing system to WCB system. [6]
3. (a) What is meant by interpolation of contours ? State various
methods of it and explain any one in detail. [6]
[3862]-108 3 P.T.O.
(b) Reciprocal levels were taken with dumpy level as under : [6]
Instrument Reading on Remarks
at P Q
P 1.500 2.250 Distance between
Q 0.600 1.320 P and Q = 880 m
Assuming collimation error to be 0.005 in 100 m. Calculate
the true difference between P and Q and the correction for
curvature, refraction and collimation.
(c) Write a short note on profile levelling. [4]
Or
4. (a) Differentiate between collimation plane method and Rise and
Fall method. [4]
(b) State and define various fundamental axes of dumpy level.
Also write the relationships between them. [6]
(c) Derive an expression for the combined correction for curvature
and refraction effect in levelling. [6]
5. (a) How would you determine omitted measurement when length
of one side and bearing of other side is omitted ? [6]
[3862]-108 4
(b) Define the following terms : [4]
(1) Vertical Asix
(2) Trunion Axis
(3) Optical Axis
(4) Line of Collimation.
(c) The following are the latitudes and departure for a closed
traverse ABCD. Compute the missing length and whole circle
bearing of side DA of the traverse : [6]
Line Latitude Departure
AB 116.10 44.40
BC +6.80 +58.20
CD +80.50 +17.20
DA ? ?
Or
6. (a) What do you mean by prolongation of a straight line ? How
is it done using 20 Theodolite ? [6]
(b) Define deflection angle. Explain in brief the procedure of
measurement of the deflection angle using 20 vernier transit
theodolite. [6]
[3862]-108 5 P.T.O.
(c) Define the following terms with neat sketch : [4]
(1) Closing error of traverse
(2) Independent co-ordinates
(3) Open traverse
(4) Closed traverse.
SECTION II
7. (a) State the functions of the following parts of a Theodolite : [6]
(1) Clip screw
(2) Optical plumet
(3) Eyepiece
(4) Shifting head
(5) Bubble tube
(6) Lower tangent screw.
(b) A staff was held vertically at a distance of 125 m and
50 m from the centre of a Tacheometer. The staff intercepts
with the telescope horizontal were 1.248 and 0.498 respectively.
Calculate the constants of a tacheometer. [6]
(c) Explain the necessary test and adjustment for making the
vertical circle to read zero when the line of collimation is
horizontal. [6]
[3862]-108 6
Or
8. (a) Describe in detail the field procedure of determining the constants
of a Tacheometer. [6]
(b) Write a short note on Tacheometric Contour Survey. [4]
(c) A tacheometer was set up at an intermediate point between
two stations A and B and the following observations were made
on a vertically held staff : [8]
Staff Station Vertical Angle Staff Readings
A +4 30 1.605, 2.400, 3.195
B 2 45 0.805, 1.345, 1.885
The instrument is fitted with an anallatic lens having a constant
of 100. Compute the length AB and R.L. of point B, if that
of A was 395.400 m. The instrument and staff stations are
in one straight line.
9. (a) Draw the neat sketches of the following : [4]
(1) Simple circular curve
(2) Compound curve
(3) Reverse curve
(4) Valley curve.
(b) Work out the relationships between the elements of a simple
circular curve. [4]
[3862]-108 7 P.T.O.
(c) Two straights of road intersects at a chainage of 2550.50 m.
The angle of intersection being 110. Taking chord length of
30 m, calculate the following : [8]
(1) Radius of curve
(2) Length of curve
(3) Tangent length
(4) Length of long chord
(5) Chainages at the starting point and end point.
Or
10. (a) Write a short note on necessity of vertical curves in
highways. [4]
(b) Describe in detail the method of setting out a simple circular
curve by offset from chord produced. [6]
(c) A transition curve is to be designed for the following
data : [6]
(1) Radius of circular curve = 300 m
(2) Gauge = 1.5 m
(3) Maximum superelevation = 15 cm
(4) No lateral pressure on rails
(5) Rate of gain of radial acceleration = 0.3 m/sec
3
.
Find the length of the curve and design speed.
[3862]-108 8
11. (a) State the classification of EDM instruments. [5]
(b) Explain in brief the process of setting out a building on
ground. [5]
(c) What is total station ? State any five special functions available
in total station. [6]
Or
12. (a) Define gradient. What is the importance of gradient while laying
sewer pipe ? How is it decided ? [6]
(b) Write a short note on basic principle of EDM Instruments. [5]
(c) Write a short note on different types of construction
survey. [5]
P.T.O.
[3862]-109
CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY (Theory)
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer Q. No. 1 or Q. No. 2; Q. No. 3 or
Q. No. 4; Q. No. 5 or Q. No. 6; from Section I and
Q. No. 7 or Q. No. 8; Q. No. 9 or Q. No. 10;
Q. No. 11 or Q. No. 12; from Section II.
answer-books.
(v) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) Write in short on chemical composition of cement. [6]
(b) Explain the procedure for aggregate impact value test. [6]
(i) Gas forming admixtures
(ii) Fly ash. [6]
[3862]-109 2
Or
2. (a) What are the methods of manufacture of cement ? Explain
one of them in detail. [6]
(b) Write short note on Grading of Aggregates. [6]
(c) What are the different types of admixtures ? [6]
3. (a) Define workability and explain the tests for workability. [5]
(b) What care should be taken to while transporting and placing
of concrete ? [5]
(c) Write short note on shrinkage and its different types. [6]
Or
4. (a) Write short note on Gel/Space ratio. [5]
(b) Explain the relationship between compressive strength and tensile
strength of concrete. [5]
(c) Write short note on Segregation and Bleeding. [6]
5. (a) What is the significance and objective of mix design ? [5]
(b) Define :
(i) Characteristic strength of concrete
[3862]-109 3 P.T.O.
(ii) Mean strength
(iii) Variance
(iv) Standard Deviation
(v) Coefficient of Variation. [5]
(c) Explain DOE method of mix design in brief. [6]
Or
6. Using Indian standard recommended guidelines, design a concrete
mix for a structure to be subjected to the moderate exposure conditions
for the following requirements : [16]
(a) Design situations :
(i) Characteristic strength at 28 days 25 MPa
(ii) Maximum nominal size of aggregates 20 mm
(iii) Types of aggregate Angular (crushed)
(iv) Degree of quality control Good
(v) Source of aggregates Natural
(vi) Degree of workability Compaction Factor : 0.8
(vii) Grading zone :
(1) Coarse aggregates II
(2) Fine aggregates II.
[3862]-109 4
(b) Characteristics of material :
Cement :
(i) Type of cement OPC 43 grade
(ii) Specific gravity 3.15
(iii) Bulk density 1450 kg/m
3
.
Aggregates :
Fine Coarse
aggregates aggregates
(i) Specific gravity 2.6 2.65
(ii) Bulk density (kg/m
3
) 1750 1800
(iii) Free surface moisture (%) 1.5 Nil
(iv) Water absorption (%) 0.6 1.0
(c) Mix design considerations (Use Fig. 1) :
(i) t = 1.65
(ii) For moderate exposure conditions with normal weight
aggregates of 20 mm nominal maximum size and for RC
work.
(iii) Minimum cement content 300 kg/m
3
.
(iv) Maximum free water cement ratio 0.5.
[3862]-109 5 P.T.O.
(d) Table 1 : Approximate sand and water contents per cubic meter
of concrete :
Nominal size of Water content per Sand as percentage
aggregate cubic meter of of total aggregates
(mm) concrete (kg) (by Volume)
10 208 40
20 186 35
40 165 30
Fig. 1
[3862]-109 6
SECTION II
7. (a) Write short note on Non-destructive testing of concrete. [8]
(b) Write short notes on :
(i) Type of formwork
(ii) Pull out test. [8]
Or
8. (a) Write short note on Analysis of fresh concrete. [6]
(i) Principles of design of formwork
(ii) Ready mixed concrete. [10]
9. (a) Explain Under water concreting. [6]
(b) Write short note on Batching plants. [5]
(c) State the advantages of light weight concrete. [5]
Or
10. (a) Write short notes on :
(i) Polymer concrete
(ii) Fibre reinforced concrete. [8]
(i) Pumps and
(ii) Vibrators. [8]
[3862]-109 7 P.T.O.
11. (a) What is durability of concrete ? State its significance and effect
water/cement ratio on it. [8]
(i) Repair by stitching
(ii) Shotcrete. [10]
Or
12. (a) Explain in detail Carbonation of concrete. [6]
(i) Sulphate attack on concrete
(ii) Acid attack on concrete
(iii) Resin based repairs. [12]
P.T.O.
[3862]-110
STRUCTURAL ANALYSISI
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer Q. No. 1 or Q. No. 2, Q. No. 3 or
Q. No. 4, Q. No. 5 or Q. No. 6 from Section I and
Q. No. 7 or Q. No. 8, Q. No. 9 or Q. No. 10,
Q. No. 11 or Q. No. 12 from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Differentiate Static and Kinematic Indeterminacy. [2]
(b) Determine the slope at C and A and the deflection at
mid-point D of the overhang beam as shown, E = 200 MPa,
I = 1.2 10
8
mm
4
. Use Conjugate Beam Method. [8]
20 kN
6 m
2 m
A D
B
C
I 2I
[3862]-110 2
(c) Using Castiglianos first theorem, determine deflection of overhang
end A of the beam loaded as shown below. [8]
2. (a) Find degree of static and kinematic indeterminacy. [2]
(b) Find slope at C and maximum deflection. Take flexural
rigidity = 4 10
4
kNm
2
. [8]
A
M
B
L
C
L/3
A
C
B
3 m
24 kN/m
72 kN
1 m
2 m
D
[3862]-110 3 P.T.O.
(c) Calculate the central deflection and the slope at ends of simply
supported beam carrying udl over whole span using Castiglianos
first thm. [8]
3. (a) Analyse the continuous beam shown below. [8]
(b) A horizontal prismatic beam AB of span l m is fixed at its
ends A & B. If the right end B of the beam settles down
by d, find the reacting force and reacting moments of each
end of beam. Use Castiglianos second thm. [8]
4. (a) A continuous beam ABC is simply supported at A, B, C.
AB = BC = l. If while loading the beam the support B sinks
by d
1
and support C sinks by d
2
. Find the moment produced
at B and the reactions at the supports due to sinking of supports.
If d
1
> d
2
. [8]
20 kN
20 kN
D
C B
A
1 m 3 m
1 m
2 m
1 m
5 kN
[3862]-110 4
(b) Find the reaction at the prop for the loaded propped cantilever
shown below :
Use Castiglianos second thm. [8]
5. (a) Find the vertical and horizontal deflections of joint C of
the truss shown below. The area of inclined tie is 2000 mm
2
,
while the area of horizontal member is 1600 mm
2
. Take
E = 200 kN/mm
2
. [8]
200 kN
A
20 kN/m
C
B
R
4 m
2 m
A
3 m
B
4 m
C
120 kN
[3862]-110 5 P.T.O.
(b) Find forces in members of the frame. C/S area and material
of all members is same. [8]
6. (a) Find horizontal deflections of joint C of the pin jointed
truss. The area of horizontal members is 150 mm
2
and
the areas of members AC and BC are 200 mm
2
each. Take
E = 200 kN/mm
2
. [8]
A
B
D
C
l
W
l
A B
C
6 m
9 kN
6 m
4.5 m
[3862]-110 6
(b) Find the force in wire rope BC if member AB is made of
Aluminium and that of member CD and CE are of mild steel.
C/S areas of member CD and CE are 1600 mm
2
and
2400 mm
2
respectively. Joint C is loaded by a 50 kN load.
The second moment of area of member AB is 2.5 10
8
mm
4
.
C/S area of wire BC is 800 mm
2
. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Write notes on : [6]
(i) Elastic-Plastic stress-strain diagram
(ii) Plastic Hinge.
4 m
3 m
4 m
4 m
A B
D C
E
50 kN
[3862]-110 7 P.T.O.
(b) Write assumptions in Plastic theory. [6]
(c) A fixed beam of uniform section and length l and fully
plastic moment M
P
is subjected to a total udl w together
with a concentrated load P at a dist. l/3 from left end of
beam. Find the value of W which would cause collapse for
P = 0.25 W. [6]
8. (a) Write notes on : [9]
(i) The upper bound theorem
(ii) The lower bound theorem
(iii) Uniqueness theorem
(iv) Mechanism conditions.
(b) The figure below shows a rectangular portal frame whose legs
are fixed at base. The frame carries a point load W at
mid-span and a horizontal sway load
W
2
. Find the value of
W at which the frame will collapse. All the members are of
the same section. [9]
A
D
C
B
W
W/2
l/2 l/2
l/2
[3862]-110 8
9. (a) For the balanced cantilever beam, draw ILD for reactions at
supports A and B, S.F. and B.M. at G and S.F. and B.M.
at H. [8]
(b) Draw the influence line diagrams for the forces in
members L
1
U
2
, U
2
L
2
, U
2
L
3
and L
1
L
2
for the truss shown
below. [8]
10. (a) A beam ABC 7 m long fixed at A and is simply supported
at B and is provided with an internal hinge at C, 4 m
from A. Draw influence line diagrams for the following :
(i) Reaction at A
(ii) Reaction at B
(iii) Reaction at C
(iv) B.M. at D, the middle point of AC. [8]
A
G B
H
C D
E
F
6 m
4 m 4 m 6 m
24 m
Hinge
8 m 12 m
4 m
Panels at 4 m each = 24 m
U
2
U
3
U
4
U
5
U
6
L
2
L
3
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
1
L
7
2 m 2 m
1 m 2 m
Hinge
A
D
C
E
B
[3862]-110 9 P.T.O.
(b) Draw the influence line diagrams for the forces in
members U
3
U
4
, L
3
L
4
, U
3
L
3
and U
3
L
4
for the truss shown
in Fig. Q. No. 9 (b). [8]
11. (a) Draw the influence lines for reactions at supports A, B, C
and bending moment at support B for the beam shown. There
is a hinge provided at D. Find their maximum values when
a travelling load of 60 kN per meter may cover any part
of span. [8]
(b) Two wheel loads 200 kN and 80 kN spaced 0.8 m apart
roll on the girder shown below. Find the maximum
positive and negative bending moments that can occur at
the section C. [8]
12. (a) A distributed load of 80 kN/m run may occupy any part of
span on the beam. Find maximum positive and negative shear
force at section marked C. [8]
A
6 m
3 m 3 m
B
D
C
3 m 3 m 4 m 2 m
D
A
C
B E
3 m 3 m 4 m 2 m D
A
C
B E
[3862]-110 10
(b) The wheel load system shown below can move on a girder
of span 5 m. Find the maximum positive and negative shear
force for the girder. [8]
120 kN 400 kN
150 kN 250 kN
0.8 m 0.8 m 1 m
P.T.O.
[3862]-111
S.E. (Mechanical)(First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer three questions from each Section.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Obtain an expression for entropy change in the form :

2 2
2 1
1 1
T P
S S ln R ln .
T P
p
c - = -
[8]
(b) What are statements of second law of thermodynamics ?
How is second law applicable to compressors and air receiver
tanks ? [8]
[3862]-111 2
Or
2. (a) Air is compressed from 100 kPa and 17C to 600 kPa
and 57C. What will be entropy change ? Now if this
process is carried out in isentropic way by maintaining
initial conditions and pressure ratio, what will be final
temperature of air ? [8]
(b) Explain Clausius inequality. [8]
3. (a) Carbon steel balls of density 7833 kg/m
3
and C
p
0.465
kJ/kgK, diameter 8 mm are annealed by heating to 900C and
then by slow cooling at 100C in the air. Air temperature
is 35C. If 1200 balls are to be processed per hour, determine
total rate of heat transfer and lost work. [10]
(b) Derive expression for polytropic specific heat capacity. [6]
Or
4. (a) 0.1 m
3
of a gas is compressed from 120 kPa and 25C to
1.2 MN/m
2
according to a law PV
1.2
= C. Calculate work done,
change of internal energy, heat transfer. Also state direction
of heat transfer. [8]
(b) Obtain expression for non-flow energy. [8]
[3862]-111 3 P.T.O.
5. (a) Explain with sketch working of separating and throttling
calorimeter. [8]
(b) What is throttling process ? Steam at 1.5 MPa and 0.7
dry is throttled to 0.10 MPa. Find out dryness fraction after
throttle. [6]
(c) Explain significance of specific steam consumption and work
ratio. [4]
Or
6. (a) Show Rankine cycle of P-V and T-S diagram when steam is
superheated. Also discuss whether efficiency of cycle will change
if reheat is employed. Show this process of reheat in two
stages on Mollier chart. [8]
(b) A steam turbine plant working on Rankine cycle uses steam
at 15 bar and condenses at 0.3 bar. Determine Rankine
efficiency if :
(i) steam is dry saturated
(ii) superheated at 400C.
Also find specific steam consumption in second case. Neglect
feed pump work in both cases. [10]
[3862]-111 4
SECTION II
7. (a) Distinguish between :
(i) Mass fraction and mole fraction
(ii) Lean mixture and rich mixture. [4]
(b) Explain NDIR method of gas analysis in brief. [4]
(c) The following data was obtained during experimental deter-
mination of calorific value of fuel by Bomb calorimeter :
Mass of coal = 0.78 gm
Mass of fuse wire = 0.032 gm
Calorific value of fuse wire = 7 kJ/gm
Mass of water in calorimeter = 2 kg
Water equivalent of calorimeter = 0.4 kg
Rise in temperature of calorimeter water = 3.2C
Cooling correction = 0.01C.
Determine HCV and LCV of coal at NTP conditions. Given
the coal contains 90% of carbon and 5% of hydrogen. [8]
Or
8. (a) With the help of neat sketch discuss the method of determining
calorific value of gaseous fuel. [8]
[3862]-111 5 P.T.O.
(b) The composition of dry flue gas as obtained by using Orsat
apparatus was CO
2
= 9.8%, CO = 7.2%, H
2
= 3.4%,
CH
4
= 0.3%, N
2
= 79.3%. Calculate :
(i) Air fuel ratio
(ii) Stoichiometric air
(iii) Mixture strength. [8]
9. (a) What are the advantages of multistaging in reciprocating air
compressor ? [4]
(b) Differentiate between reciprocating and rotary compressors. [4]
(c) A single stage, single acting reciprocating air compressor delivers
0.7 kg of air per min at 6 bar. The suction temperature and
pressure are 25C and 1 bar. The bore and stroke of the
compressor are 100 mm and 150 mm respectively. The clearance
is 3% of swept volume. Assuming index of compression and
expansion to be 1.3. Find :
(i) Volumetric efficiency of the compressor
(ii) Power supplied to drive the compressor if mechanical
efficiency is 85%
(iii) Speed of the compressor (RPM). [10]
[3862]-111 6
Or
10. (a) Discuss the factors those influence the volumetric efficiency
of a reciprocating air compressor. [6]
(b) A two-stage reciprocating air compressor takes in air at
1 bar and 27C. Air is delivered at 10 bar. The intermediate
pressure is deal and intercooling is perfect. The law
for compression is PV
1.35
= C. The rate of discharge is
0.1 kg/s. Find :
(i) Power required to drive the compressor
(ii) Saving in work compared to single stage
(iii) Isothermal efficiency for multistage
(iv) Heat rejected in intercooler.
Take R = 0.287 kJ/kg K and C
p
= 1 kJ/kg K. [12]
11. (a) Differentiate between mountings and accessories of the
boiler. [4]
(b) Write a short note on artificial draught. [4]
(c) During the boiler trial the following data were obtained :
Duration of trial = 8 hrs.
Pressure of steam = 1400 kPa
Dryness fraction = 0.973
Feed water evaporated = 26700 kg
Hot well temperature = 50C
[3862]-111 7 P.T.O.
Coal used = 4260 kg
CV of coal = 28900 kJ/kg
Air used per kg of fuel = 17 kg
Temperature of flue gases = 344C
Boiler house temperature = 21C
C
p
of flue gases = 1.1 kJ/kg K.
Determine :
(i) Boiler efficiency
(ii) Equivalent evaporation
(iii) Heat lost to flue gases. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain the term boiler efficiency and equivalent evaporation
by writing its significance. [6]
(b) Explain how it is an advantageous using an economizer and
superheater in steam power plant. [4]
(c) A 32 m high chimney is used to discharge hot gases at 297C
to the atmosphere which is at 27C. Find the mass of air
actually used per kg of fuel, if the draught produced is
12 mm of water. Also calculate draught measured in terms
of hot gas column. [6]
[3862]-112
S.E. (Mech. & Mech. Sand) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
METALLURGY
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer any three questions from each Section.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. Answer the following :
(a) Define cold working. Draw microstructure of mild steel before
and after cold working. Why cold worked materials are
annealed ? [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-112 2
(b) Give reasons (any three) : [9]
(i) Aluminium shows higher ductility than steel.
(ii) Fine grained steels are stronger than coarse grained steels.
(iii) Substitutional and interstitial crystal defects improve the
strength and hardness.
(iv) Dislocations play an important role during plastic deforma-
tion of metals.
(c) Define slip plane and slip direction. [3]
Or
(a) Give the classification of crystal imperfections. Explain with neat
sketches screw dislocation and volume defects. [8]
(b) Define the recrystallization temperature and work hardening.
Why are alloys worked hardened during plastic deforma-
tion ? [5]
(c) Obtain effective number of atoms per unit cell for cubic unit
cells and state its significance. [5]
(a) Define engineering and true stress. Obtain the relationship between
engineering stress, strain and true stress, strain. [6]
[3862]-112 3 P.T.O.
(b) Draw a neat sketch of creep testing m/c and explain the test
procedure. Draw the standard creep curve. [7]
(c) Explain the significance of Endurance limit. [3]
Or
(a) With a neat sketch explain the procedure for Rockwell hardness
test. State two main differences between Brinnel and Rockwell
hardness tests. [7]
(b) Give the reason (any three) : [9]
(i) Specimens are notched in impact test.
(ii) Ultrasonic flaw inspection is not suitable to detect the defects
in thin materials.
(iii) Magnaflux test is used to detect surface and subsurface
defects.
(iv) Radiography is used to detect the defects in welded joints
of boilers.
(v) Eddy current test can be used for sorting the steels.
(a) Draw Fe-Fe
3
C phase equilibrium diagram and label completely.
Explain the phases, critical temperatures and phase transfor-
mation reactions. [10]
[3862]-112 4
(b) State the requirements of steels used for various tools. Explain
the significance of chromium and vanadium in tool steel. [6]
Or
(a) Draw the microstructures and state the properties and appli-
cations of the following : [6]
(i) S.G. iron
(ii) Grey cast iron.
(b) Give the significance of the following (any two) : [6]
(i) En353
(ii) AISI1040
(iii) C45
(c) Explain free cutting steels w.r.t. composition and
machinability. [4]
SECTION II
(a) Define annealing and normalising. Explain any three annealing
treatments with the use of proper portion of Fe-Fe
3
C phase
equilibrium diagram. [9]
[3862]-112 5 P.T.O.
(b) Define hardenability. Draw standard Jominey hardenability test
set-up. Draw hardenability curves for 0.4% carbon and 0.8% carbon
steels. Explain the significance of hardenability curves. [7]
(c) Give four differences between flame and induction hardening. [2]
Or
(a) Draw TTT curve for 0.8% carbon steel. How are TTT curves
used for the annealing, normalising and hardening
treatments. [8]
(b) Explain the principle of carburising and nitriding. [4]
(c) State the characteristics of martensite and tempered martensite.
Why are tool steels multitempered ? [6]
(a) Explain the following characteristics of metal powder : [6]
(i) Particle size and shape distribution
(ii) Flow rate
(iii) Apparent density.
(b) Explain the effect of the following variables on metal powder
characteristics in atomisation method : [6]
(i) Atomising pressure
[3862]-112 6
(ii) Nozzle geometry
(iii) Pouring temperature.
(c) Draw Al-Si phase transformation diagram and give eutectic phase
transformation reaction. [4]
Or
(a) Define sintering. Why Briquettes need sintering treatment ?
Explain the sintering process used for cemented carbide
tools. [6]
(b) Explain the blending and compacting processes. [4]
(c) Explain anodising used for aluminium alloys. [3]
(d) Distinguish between brass and bronze. [3]
(a) Explain the basic characteristics required to produce good
composites. [4]
(b) Explain the properties and applications of the following
fibers : [8]
(i) Aramid
(ii) Glass
[3862]-112 7 P.T.O.
(iii) Graphite
(iv) Alumina
(v) Silicon.
(c) State and explain usual problem that occur at cryogenic
temperature. [4]
Or
(a) Explain the characteristics of high temperature materials. [3]
(b) State any one material used for the turbine and give the
reason. [4]
(c) Give classification of refractories. State properties and appli-
cations of each type of refractories. [7]
(d) Give classification of silicate glass. [2]
[3862]-113
S.E. (Mechanical/S/W) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
FLUID MECHANICS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(iii) Neat diagrams must be drawn whenever necessary.
(v) Your answers will be valued as a whole.
(vi) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic
(vii) Assume suitable data, if necessary.
SECTION I
(Unit I)
1. (a) State and explain Newtons law of viscosity. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-113 2
(b) A 0.12 m disc rotates on a table separated by an oil film of
0.018 m thickness. Find the viscosity of oil if the torque required
to rotate the disc at 60 r.p.m. is 4 10
4
Nm. Assume the
velocity gradient in the oil film to be linear. [8]
(c) Differentiate between the Eulerian and Lagrangian methods of
representing fluid flow. [6]
Or
2. (a) What is capillarity ? Derive expression for height of capillary
rise. [6]
(b) Derive the continuity equation in Cartesian coordinates. [6]
(c) Define stream function and velocity potential. Show that the
streamlines and equipotential lines form a net of mutually
perpendicular lines. [6]
(Unit II)
3. (a) Derive expressions for total pressure and centre of pressure
for a vertically immersed surface. [6]
(b) Explain briefly different types of equilibrium of floating
bodies. [4]
(c) A solid cube of sides 1 m each is made of a material of relative
density 0.5. The cube floats in a liquid of relative density 0.95
with two of its faces horizontal. Determine its stability. [6]
[3862]-113 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) Describe the experimental method of determination of the
metacentric height of a floating object. [6]
(b) A 3.6 m by 1.5 m wide rectangular gate is vertical and is hinged
at point 0.15 m below the centre of gravity of the gate. The
total depth of water is 10 m. What horizontal force must be
applied at the bottom of the gate to keep the gate closed ? [10]
(Unit III)
5. (a) State and prove Bernoullis equation. What are limitations of
the Bernoullis equation ? [6]
(b) Describe an orificemeter and find an expression for measuring
discharge of fluid through a pipe with this device. [6]
(c) What is a Pitot tube ? How is it used ? [4]
Or
6. (a) Describe an Venturimeter and find an expression for measuring
discharge of fluid through a pipe with this device. [8]
(b) What is a notch ? How are the notches classified ? Find an
expression for measuring discharge of fluid across a triangular
notch. [8]
[3862]-113 4
SECTION II
(Unit IV)
7. (a) Derive Hagen-Poiseuille equation and state the assumptions
made. [6]
(b) Oil of viscosity 0.05 Ns/m
2
is flowing between two stationary
parallel plates 1 m wide and maintained 10 mm part. The velocity
midway between the plates is 3 m/s. Find : [10]
(i) Pressure gradient along flow
(ii) Average velocity
(iii) Discharge of oil
Or
8. (a) What is dimensional homogeneity ? Explain how dimensional
analysis helps in analysis of fluid flow problem. [8]
(b) Explain in brief the Buckinngham p-theorem as method of
dimensional analysis. [8]
(Unit V)
9. (a) Derive Darcy-Weisbach formula for calculating loss of head due
to friction in pipe. [8]
[3862]-113 5 P.T.O.
(b) What is Syphon ? Where is it used ? [4]
(c) Derive an expression for the power transmission through the
pipes. [4]
Or
10. (a) What do you mean by Hydraulic Gradient line and Energy Gradient
line ? [6]
(b) Define the terms major energy losses and minor energy losses
in pipe. [6]
(c) What is an equivalent pipe ? [4]
(Unit VI)
11. (a) Why is it necessary to control the growth of boundary layer
on most of the bodies ? What are the methods for such
control ? [6]
(b) How will you determine whether a boundary layer flow is attached
flow, detached flow or on the verge of separation ? [8]
(c) What is CFD methodology ? [4]
Or
12. (a) Define drag force and lift force of an object immersed in a fluid.
Distinguish between the friction drag and the pressure drag. [8]
[3862]-113 6
(b) Derive an expression for the lift produced on a rotating cylinder
placed in a uniform flow field such that the axis of the cylinder
is perpendicular to the direction of flow. [6]
(c) What is Magnus effect ? [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-114
S.E. (Mech., Production, S/W)(First Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICSIII
(2008 COURSE)
Q. No. 4, Q. No. 5 or Q. No. 6 from Section I
and Q. No. 7 or Q. No. 8, Q. No. 9 or Q. No. 10,
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Solve the following differential equations (any three) : [12]
(1)
( )
3 2 2
D D 6D 1 y x - - = +
(2)
( )
2
D 5D 6 cos2 y x x - + =
[3862]-114 2
(3)
2
2
2 2
log
5 3
d y dy x
x x y
dx
dx x
+ + =
(4)
( )
( )
3 2
D 4D 2cosh 2 y x - =
(5)
2 2
.
2
x dx dy dz
y z y z
z yz y
= =
+ -
- -
(b) Solve the simultaneous differential equations :
4 0, 2 0
dx dy
x y x y
dt dt
+ - = + - =
given x = 20 and y = 100 at t = 0. [5]
Or
2. (a) Solve the following differential equations (any three) : [12]
(1)
( )
2
D 6D + 9 5 log 2
x
y + = -
(2) ( )
( )
2
2 2
D 1 D 1 sin
2
x
x
y e - + = +
(3) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
2
2
2
1 1 2 3 2 4
d y dy
x x x x
dx
dx
+ + + = + +
(4)
( ) ( )
2
2
D 1 1
x
y e
-
- = +
(5)
( )
2 3 / 2
D 2D + 1 .
x
y x e - =
(by using variation of parameters method)
[3862]-114 3 P.T.O.
(b) A body weighing 20 kg is hung from a spring. A pull of
40 kg weight will stretch the spring to 10 cm. The body is
pulled down to 20 cm below the state of equilibrium position
and then released. Find the displacement of the body from
its equilibrium position at time t secs. Also find maximum
velocity and period of oscillation. [5]
3. (a) Find Laplace Transform of (any two) : [6]
(1)
( )
3
1
t
e t +
(2) 1 sin t t +
(3)
( ) sin .
t
e t u t
-
- p
(b) Solve using Laplace Transform method :
y + 4y + 8y = 1
given y(0) = 0, y(0) = 1. [5]
(c) Find Fourier transform of :
f(x) = sin x 0 < x < p
= 0 x > p and x < 0. [6]
Or
4. (a) Find inverse Laplace Transform of (any two) : [8]
(1)
( )
2
2
3
s
s s
+
+
[3862]-114 4
(2)
( ) ( )
4
1
2 3 s s - +
by convolution thm.
(3)
( )
2
1
log .
1
s
s s
+
+
(b) Evaluate :

2 2
0
sin3 .
t
e t t dt
-
[4]
(c) Solve the integral equation : [5]
( )
0
sin f x x dx
= 1 0 l < 1
= 2 1 l < 2
= 0 l > 2.
5. (a) A homogeneous rod of conducting material of length 100 cm
has its ends kept at zero temperature and the temperature
initially is :
u(x, 0) = x 0 x 50
= 100 x 50 x 100.
Find the temperature u(x, t) at any time. [8]
(b) The vibrations of an elastic string is governed by the partial
differential equations :
2 2
2 2
.
u u
t x

=

[3862]-114 5 P.T.O.
The length of the string is p and the ends are fixed.
The initial velocity is zero and the initial deflection is
u(x, 0) = 2(sin x + sin 3x). Find the deflection of the string
for t > 0. [8]
Or
6. (a) Solve :
2 2
2 2
0,
u u
x y

+ =

subject to the conditions :
(1) u(0, y) = 0
(2) u(10, y) = 0
(3) u(x, ) = 0
(4) u(x, 0) = 20x 0 x 5
= 20(10 x) 5 x 10. [8]
(b) Use Fourier sine transform to solve the equation :
2
2
u u
t
x

=

0 < x < , t > 0
subject to the conditions :
(1) u(0, t) = 0
(2) u(x, 0) = e
x
x > 0
(3) u &
u
x
0 as x . [8]
[3862]-114 6
SECTION II
7. (a) Ten students got the following percentage of marks in Economics
and Statistics :
Marks in Economics Marks in Statistics
78 84
36 51
98 91
25 60
75 68
82 62
90 86
62 58
65 53
39 47
Calculate coefficient of correlation. [6]
(b) The probability that a bomb dropped from a plane will strike
the target is
1
5
. If six bombs are dropped, find the probability
that exactly two will strike the target. [5]
(c) Calculate the first four moments of the following distribution
about the mean and hence find b
1
and b
2
: [6]
x f
0 1
1 8
[3862]-114 7 P.T.O.
2 28
3 56
4 70
5 56
6 28
7 8
8 1
Or
8. (a) Goals scored by two teams A and B in a football season were
as follows :
No. of Goals Scored No. of Matches
in a Match A B
0 27 17
1 09 09
2 08 06
3 05 05
4 04 03
Find out which team is more consistent. [6]
(b) Between the hours 2 p.m. and 4 p.m. the average number
of phone calls per minute into switch board of a company
is 2.35. Find the probability that during one particular minute
there will be at most 2 phone calls. [6]
[3862]-114 8
(c) In a test on 2000 electric bulbs it was found that the life
of a particular make was normally distributed with an average
time 2040 hours and S.D. of 60 hours. Estimate the number
of bulbs likely burn for more than 1920 hours but less than
2160 hours.
(Given z = 2, Area = .4772) [5]
9. (a) The acceleration of a particle at any time t 0 is given
by :
12cos 2ti 8sin 2tj + 16tk.
The velocity and displacement are zero at t = 0. Find velocity
and displacement at any time t. [6]
(b) If ( )
( )
b
a a a
xyz x i y j z k + + is an irrotational vector field, prove
that either b = 0 or a = 1. [6]
(c) Find the directional derivative of div
( )
5 5 5
x i y j z k + + at
(2, 2, 1) in the direction of outward normal to the surface
x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
= 9 at the point (2, 2, 1). [5]
Or
10. (a) Prove that (any two) : [6]
(1)
1
r
f = satisfies Laplace equation
(2) ( )
( )
4
2 .
log
a r r
a r
r
=
(3)
3 4
1 3
. . r
r r

=

[3862]-114 9 P.T.O.
(b) Show that the vector field ( ) f r r is always irrotational and
determine f(r) such that the field is solenoidal also. [6]
(c) If f has at the point (1, 2) directional derivative +2 in the
direction towards (2, 2) and 2 in the direction towards
(1, 1). Find grad f at (1, 2). [5]
11. (a) Evaluate
F .
c
dr
where
( )
( )
( )
2 2
F 3 6 2 3 1 4 x yz i y xz j xyz k = - + + + -
along the line joining the points (0, 0, 0), (1, 2, 3). [5]
(b) Evaluate :
F .
s
ds
where
2 2
F 4 2 xi y j z k = - +
and s is surface bounding region x
2
+ y
2
= 4, z = 0,
z = 3. [6]
(c) Apply Stokes theorem to evaluate :
c
y dx z dy x dz + +
where c is the curve of intersection of x

2
+ y
2
+ z
2
= a
2
and x + z = a. [5]
[3862]-114 10
Or
12. (a) Use divergence theorem to evaluate :
( )
2
2 .
s
xyi yz j xzk ds + +
where s is surface of the region bounded by x = 0, y = 0,

z = 0, y = 3, x + 2z = 6. [5]
(b) Verify Stokes theorem in the plane z = 0 for
( )
2
F 2 x y i xyj = - +
for the region bounded by y = 0, x = 2, y = x. [6]
(c) Find the work done by :
( )
2 2
F 2 2 xy i x y y j = + +
in taking a particle from (0, 0, 0) to (2, 4, 0) along the parabola
y = x
2
, z = 0. [5]
[3862]-115 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-115
S.E. (Mech.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
(2008 PATTERN)
from Section II.
books.
(v) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rules, Mollier charts, electronic
pocket calculator and steam table is allowed.
SECTION I
UNIT I
1. (a) Explain pattern making allowances in detail. [6]
(b) Describe centrifugal casting process with suitable sketch and
also explain its various types. [6]
(c) Draw only a neat sketch of gating system and show the following
elements on it (any three) : [6]
(i) Pouring basin
(ii) Sprue
(iii) Riser.
Or
2. (a) Explain in brief shell moulding process. [6]
(b) Explain the following characteristics of good moulding sand : [6]
(i) Permeability
(ii) Thermal stability
(iii) Porosity.
[3862]-115 2
(c) Explain the following defects in casting process with their causes
and remedies : [6]
(i) Hot tears
(ii) Mismatch.
UNIT II
3. (a) What is stretch forming ? How is it done and what are its
advantages ? [5]
(b) Write down difference between Hot working and Cold working. [5]
(c) Write a short note on Roll Forging. [6]
Or
4. (a) Explain forward extrusion process. [4]
(b) Explain any two : [6]
(i) Wire drawing
(ii) Spinning
(iii) Shot peening.
(c) Explain drop forging process with suitable sketch. [6]
UNIT III
5. (a) Explain submerged Arc welding process with a suitable sketch. [6]
(b) Describe Arc shielding. [4]
(c) Explain Forehand welding and Backhand welding technique. [6]
Or
6. (a) Explain principle of resistance welding and its applications. [6]
(i) GTAW
(ii) GMAW
(iii) FCAW.
(c) Differentiate : [4]
(i) Soldering
(ii) Brazing.
[3862]-115 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
UNIT IV
7. (a) Describe with neat sketch : [8]
(i) Apron mechanism of a Lathe.
(ii) Geometry of single point cutting tool.
(b) Explain the method of taper turning using tailstock setover. [4]
(c) Explain the following Lathe operations with sketch (any three) : [6]
(i) Chamfering
(ii) Knurling
(iii) Grooving
(iv) Threading.
Or
8. (a) Calculate machining time for a workpiece 0 and f 90 mm diameter
and 130 mm length turned in 2 passes. If the approach length
is 12 mm and over travel is 5 mm. Given cutting speed =
30 m/min and feed 0.3 mm/rev. [6]
(b) List the various Lathe M/c accessories and explain any two
in detail. [6]
(c) Explain with neat sketch Lathe setup for thread cutting
operation. [6]
UNIT V
9. (a) Differentiate between upmilling and downmilling. [4]
(b) Explain with neat sketch working mechanism knee type milling
machine. [6]
(c) Explain milling cutter geometry. [6]
[3862]-115 4
Or
10. (a) A hole of 30 mm dia. and 75 mm depth is to be drilled.
The suggested feed 1.3 mm per rev. and the cutting speed
62 m/mim. Assuming tool approach and tool overtravel as
6 mm, calculate : [6]
(i) Spindle rpm
(ii) Feed, speed
(iii) Cutting time.
(b) Write short notes on : [6]
(i) Radial Drilling M/c
(ii) Horizontal Milling M/c.
(c) It is required to divide the periphery of a job into 28 equal
divisions. Find the indexing arrangement. [4]
UNIT VI
11. (a) Differentiate between Honing and Lapping. [6]
(i) Buffing
(ii) Superfinishing
(iii) Dressing.
(c) Explain the meaning of grinding wheel signature :
26C60M7V28. [6]
Or
12. (a) Explain centreless grinding operation. [6]
(b) Describe various type of surface grinders with simple sketches. [6]
(c) What are the properties required for a good abrasive ? [4]
[3862]-116 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-116
S.E. (Mechanical) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
THEORY OF MACHINESI
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
(ii) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate
answer-books.
(viii) The problems having graphical solutions preferred to solve
completely on drawing sheets.
SECTION I
UNIT I
1. (a) Define :
(i) Kinematic link
(ii) Kinematic pair
[3862]-116 2
(iii) Kinematic chain
(iv) Mechanism. [4]
(b) Write a short note on Gnome engine. [4]
(c) What is the condition of correct steering ? Explain the construction
and working of Davis Steering Gear Mechanism with the help
of neat sketch. [8]
Or
2. (a) Define :
(i) Degree of freedom
(ii) Machine
(iii) Ternary joint
(iv) Grashoffs law. [4]
(b) Write a short note on Scotch yoke mechanism. [4]
(i) Pantograph
(ii) Equivalent linkage of mechanisms. [8]
UNIT II
3. The dimensions of the differential stroke engine mechanism are shown
in Fig. 1 and other are OA = 75 mm, QB = 35 mm, AC = BC
= 150 mm, CP = 100 mm, OA and QB are geared together so
[3862]-116 3 P.T.O.
that QB turns at twice the speed of OA and in opposite direction
of OA. For the given configuration, find velocity, acceleration of piston
and angular velocity, angular acceleration of CP if OA turns with
a speed of 700 rpm in clockwise direction. [16]
Or
4. The Fig. 2 shows a crank OA 100 mm long, rotating clockwise about
O at 130 rpm. AB is connecting rod 400 mm long. At a point C
on AB, 150 mm from A, the rod CE, 350 mm long is attached.
This rod CE slides in a slot in a turnnion at D. The end E is
connected by link EF 300 mm long, to the horizontally moving slides F.
Fig. 1
[3862]-116 4
For the mechanism in the position shown, determine using theorem
of three centers in line the velocity of F. [16]
UNIT III
5. The Fig. 3 shows a mechanism in which crank OA is rotating clockwise
at 10 rad/s. At the instant shown, the coupler AC is horizontal
and freely slides in a slotted trunnion B. The slotted trunnion is
carried on the second link EF which is freely slides vertically in
the guides. Hence determine :
(i) linear velocity and acceleration of link EF,
(ii) angular velocity and angular acceleration of the trunnion. [18]
Fig. 2
[3862]-116 5 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) In a slider crank mechanism having a crank length 20 cm
and obliquity ratio of 4. The crank is rotating uniformly clockwise.
The angular acceleration of connecting rod is 50 rad/s
2
when
the crank is perpendicular to the line of stroke. Determine
using Kleins construction :
(i) Linear velocity and acceleration of slider.
(ii) Angular velocity of the connecting rod. [6]
Fig. 3
[3862]-116 6
(b) The Fig. 4 shows a mechanism in which crank OA is rotating
clockwise at 10 rad/s. Slider pivoted at A slides along the
rod BC. Link BCD is a rigid bell crank lever pivoted at C.
At the instant shown, determine :
(i) Acceleration of point D
(ii) Instantaneous angular acceleration of bell crank lever
BCD. [12]
SECTION II
UNIT IV
7. (a) In an IC engine mechanism, stroke is 120 mm and connecting
rod is 3 times the crank length. The crank rotates at
1200 rpm in counterclockwise direction. Determine :
(i) Velocity and acceleration of piston
(ii) Angular velocity and angular acceleration of the connecting
rod when the piston has moved one-fourth of its stroke
from inner dead center. [8]
Fig. 4
[3862]-116 7 P.T.O.
(b) Two horizontal shafts are connected by a Hookes joint.
The angle between the shafts is 160. The driving shaft
rotates uniformly at 150 rpm. The driven shaft with attached
masses has a mass of 50 kg at a radius of gyration of
100 mm.
(i) If a driven shaft is subjected to a constant resisting torque
of 100 N-m, find the torque required at the driving shaft,
when q = 30. [6]
(ii) At what value of inclination angle will the total fluctuation
of speed of the driven shaft be limited to 25 rpm ? [2]
Or
8. (a) The crank of a reciprocating engine is 100 mm long and it
rotates at an uniform speed of 20 rad/sec counterclockwise.
The connecting rod length is 400 mm. Determine :
(i) velocity and acceleration of piston
(ii) angular velocity and angular acceleration of connecting
rod
by using Complex Algebra method when the crank makes normal
to the line of stroke. [12]
(b) State the applications of Hookes joint. [4]
[3862]-116 8
UNIT V
9. (a) The rocker of a crank-rocker mechanism is to have a length
of 400 mm and swing through a total angle of 50 with a
time ratio of 1.25. Determine the suitable lengths of remaining
links. [8]
(b) A function varies from 0 to 8. Find the Chebychev spacing
for four precision positions by using graphical method. [4]
(c) Explain the following terms related to synthesis problem :
(i) Function Generation
(ii) Body Guidance. [4]
Or
10. (a) Synthesis a four bar mechanism for three successive positions
given in the table below :
Positions 1 2 3
q 30 90 180
f 40 115 175
Consider L
1
= Grounded Link, L
2
= Input Link, L
3
= Coupler
Link, L
4
= Output Link, q = input link angle, f = output
link angle.
If the grounded link of length 100 mm is horizontal and input
link is of 20 mm length, synthesize the mechanism using precision
[3862]-116 9 P.T.O.
positions of the input link and precision positions of the output
link. Ground the pivot of input link on left hand side and
ground the pivot of output link on right hand side. Input and
output links are rotating in opposite directions. Use the method
of inversion. [7]
Draw the mechanism in its first precision position. [2]
Comment on the mechanism obtained. [1]
(i) Precision positions
(ii) Structural error
(iii) Chebychev spacing. [6]
UNIT VI
11. A high speed vertical engine has a connecting rod length five times
the crank which is 60 mm. Its mass is 3 kg and has a C.G. 200 mm
from the small end bearing. When suspended in a small end bearing,
it makes 50 oscillations in 52 seconds. The reciprocating parts have
a mass of 1.5 kg. Determine the torque exerted on the crankshaft
due to inertia of the moving parts when the crank makes an angle
of 135 with TDC, and speed of rotation is 1200 rpm. [18]
[3862]-116 10
Or
12. (a) With the help of a neat diagram, derive the expression for
the natural frequency of Trifilar Suspension. [8]
(b) The connecting rod of an engine has a length equal to
220 mm between centers and has a mass equal to 2 kg. Its
centre of gravity is at 150 mm from the small end centre
and the moment of inertia of 0.02 kg-m
2
about its centre
of gravity. Find :
(i) the two mass dynamically equivalent system when one
mass is located at the small end centre,
(ii) the correction couple, if two masses are placed at the
two ends and the angular acceleration of the connecting
rod is 20,000 rad/s
2
anticlockwise. [10]
[3862]-117
S.E. (Mechanical) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
(2008 COURSE)
form Section II.
(ii) Answers to the two Sections should be written in separate-
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Derive an expression for air standard efficiency of a Otto cycle
with usual notations. Hence show that the efficiency of the
Otto cycle is lower than that of a Carnot cycle. [8]
(b) An oil engine takes in air at 1.01 bar, 20C and the maximum
cycle pressure is 69 bar. The compression ratio is 18 : 1. Calculate
the air standard efficiency and mean effective pressure based
P.T.O.
[3862]-117 2
on dual combustion cycle. Assume that heat added at
constant volume is equal to heat added at constant
pressure. Take C
p
= 1.005 kJ/kgK, C
v
= 0.718 kJ/kgK and
g = 1.4 [10]
Or
2. (a) Explain in brief how chemical equilibrium affects the performance
of the engine. [6]
(b) Draw theoretical and actual valve timing diagrams for four
stroke diesel engine. Explain the reasons for the
difference. [7]
(c) Explain pumping and friction losses and their effects on the
power output of the engine. [5]
3. (a) What are the advantages and disadvantages of petrol injection
system over conventional carburettor system ? [5]
(b) Discuss the effect of the following engine variables on flame
propagation :
(i) Fuel-air ratio
(ii) Compression ratio. [5]
(c) Explain the factors which affect the tendency to
detonate. [6]
[3862]-117 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) Explain with neat sketches the following systems of a
carburettor :
(i) Idling system
(ii) Choke. [7]
(b) Explain any three types of combustion chambers used in S.I.
engines. [9]
5. (a) Explain phenomenon of diesel knock. Compare it with the
phenomenon of detonation in S.I. engines. [8]
(b) Explain the following factors which affect the delay
period : [8]
(i) Fuel
(ii) Injection pressure
(iii) Compression ratio
(iv) Speed.
Or
6. (a) Draw a schematic diagram of a Bosch type fuel pump and
explain its construction and working : [8]
(b) Write short notes on the following :
(i) Supercharging
(ii) Turbocharging. [8]
[3862]-117 4
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain battery ignition system with a neat sketch. [8]
(b) What are the different properties of lubricating oil ? [4]
(c) Write a short note on additives used in lubrication system. [4]
Or
8. (a) Define intake manifold and their function. State materials used.
Discuss the requirement for design of intake manifolds. [8]
(b) Explain the valve mechanism for overhead valves in engine cylinder
and list the materials for valves. [8]
9. (a) What is a dynamometer ? Name various types of dynamometers.
Explain prony type of dynamometer with the help of a neat
sketch. [8]
(b) A six cylinder gasoline engine operates on the four stroke cycle.
The bore of each cylinder is 80 mm and stroke 100 mm. The
clearance volume per cylinder is 70 CC. At a speed of 4000
r.p.m., the fuel consumption is 30 kg/hr. and the torque developed
is 150 N.m. Calculate :
(i) The brake power
(ii) The brake mean effective pressure
(iii) The brake thermal efficiency.
Assume the calorific value of fuel as 43,000 kJ/kg. Also estimate
relative efficiency when engine works on constant volume cycle
with
g
= 1.4 for air. [10]
[3862]-117 5 P.T.O.
Or
10. (a) The following observations were recorded during a trial on
4-stroke diesel engine :
Speed of the engine = 1700 r.p.m.
Brake Torque = 327.4 N.m
Friction power = 15 kW
Fuel used = 15 kg/hr
C.V. of fuel = 42,000 kJ/kg
Air supplied = 4.75 kg/min
Outlet temperature of cooling water = 65.8C.
Cooling water circulated = 16 kg/min
Temperature of exhaust gas = 400C
Room temperature = 20.8C
Specific heat of exhaust gas = 1.25 kJ/kgK
Specific heat of water = 4.18 kJ/kgK
Estimate the following :
(i) BP
(ii) Mechanical efficiency
(iii) bsfc
(iv) Draw heat balance sheet on kW basis. [10]
(i) Importance of heat balance sheet
(ii) Various factors affecting volumetric efficiency. [8]
[3862]-117 6
11. (a) Discuss various types exhaust emissions from an automobile.
Which of these are harmful ? [8]
(b) What is cracking ? What are the various methods of cracking
employed to obtain various hydrocarbon compounds ? [8]
Or
12. (a) Enumerate the desirable properties of a fuel for I.C.
engines. [8]
(b) What are Euro-III and Bharat norms ? List these norms for
petrol engines. [8]
[3862]-118
S.E. (Mech. Sand/Prod./Indus.) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
(2008 COURSE)
(ii) Answer to the two Sections should be written in separate
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) State and explain various factors affecting for good lighting
scheme. [5]
(b) Explain in brief constituents of HT/LV electricity bill. [5]
(c) Draw only the connection diagram how CT and PT are used
for measurement of energy of single phase load. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-118 2
(d) Three identical impedances each of 14 45.578 W are connected
in delta across a 400 V, 3-phase, 50 Hz A.C. supply. If power
supplied to the load is measured by two wattmeter method, find
the two wattmeter readings. [4]
Or
2. (a) Write a short note on Existing 1-phase and 3-phase tariff. [5]
(b) Two wattmeter method is used for the measurement of power
in a three-phase balance circuit, supplied from 415 V, three-
phase, 50 Hz supply. Calculate : [5]
(i) Total power
(ii) Power factor
(iii) Line current
if both wattmeter readings are 8.5 kW each.
(c) Define the following terms in connection with illumination : [4]
(i) Plane angle
(ii) Solid angle
(iii) Luminous flux
(iv) Illumination.
[3862]-118 3 P.T.O.
(d) State and explain any four specifications of three-phase
energymeter. [4]
3. (a) Derive condition for maximum efficiency in a transformer.
Also derive the expression for kVA supplied at maximum ef-
ficiency. [8]
(b) Full load power input to 4-pole, 50 Hz, three-phase induction
motor is 50 kW while running at 1440 r.p.m. If stator losses
are 1000 watt and frictional losses are 800 watt, determine : [8]
(i) synchronous speed
(ii) % slip
(iii) rotor losses
(iv) rotor power output
(v) % efficiency at full load.
Or
4. (a) With simple diagram explain construction, working, advantages,
disadvantages and applications of three-phase induction
motor : [8]
(i) Squirrel cage
(ii) Wound rotor/slip ring.
[3862]-118 4
(b) With the help of single line diagram explain distribution trans-
former substation. (Answer should contain explanation of various
equipments, protections, instruments etc. used in the system) [8]
5. (a) State the various types of single-phase motors used in day-to-
day practice. Explain construction, working and applications of
any one motor with diagram. [8]
(b) Derive from first principle, the e.m.f. generated per phase of
synchronous generator. [5]
(c) A three-phase, 4-pole, 50 Hz alternator has total 96 slots and
12 conductors per slot. If flux per pole is 50 mWb, coil span
factor is 0.9914 and distribution factor is 0.9576, determine e.m.f.
generated per phase. [3]
Or
6. (a) A 100 kVA, 865 V, 50 Hz, three-phase star connected alternator
has an armature resistance and synchronous reactance of
0.2 W and 4 W respectively per phase. Find the regulation when
the alternator its rated output at : [8]
(i) 0.8 lagging power factor
(ii) 0.8 leading power factor.
[3862]-118 5 P.T.O.
(b) With neat construction diagram explain construction, working,
application and features of shaded pole motor. [5]
(c) List the specifications of synchronous generator used in
practice. [3]
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive the e.m.f. equation of a d.c. generator from first
principle. [6]
(b) With the help of suitable diagram, explain any one type of stepper
motor. Also state its applications. [6]
(c) A 8-pole d.c. motor takes 80 A armature current from supply.
If flux per pole of the motor is 50 mWb and armature has total
720 conductors lap wound, calculate the gross torque develop
by the motor armature. [6]
Or
8. (a) State the comparison between a.c. and d.c. servomotor. [6]
(b) A 250 V, d.c. shunt motor has armature resistance 0.15 W and
field winding resistance of 125
W
. At full load motor draw
50 A current from the supply and runs at 1500 r.p.m. Determine
the speed of the motor when motor draws 15 A current from
the supply. [6]
[3862]-118 6
(c) Explain with diagram any two methods of speed control of d.c.
series motor. [6]
9. (a) Draw and explain V-I characteristic of SCR. Mark all salient
points on it. [8]
(b) Explain construction, working, output characteristic, transfer
characteristic of enhancement type n-channel MOSFET. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain merits, demerits and applications of IGBT. Also explain
its V-I characteristic. [8]
(b) State in detail comparison between SCR and MOSFET (at least
8 points). [8]
11. (a) State and explain various advantages offered by electrical
drives. [6]
(b) Explain with the help of neat diagram and V-I characteristic
two quadrant chopper circuit. [6]
(c) Write a short note on V/F control of three-phase induction
motor. [4]
Or
12. (a) State advantages, disadvantages and applications of group drives
system used in industry. [6]
[3862]-118 7 P.T.O.
(b) Explain with suitable diagram, how frequency control of
three-phase induction motor is obtained by solid state controlled
devices. [6]
(c) Suggest the motor suitable for the following application with
reason : [4]
(i) Electrical traction
(ii) Lathe machine.
P.T.O.
[3862]-119
S.E. (Mechanical & Mechanical Sandwich)
(Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
(For Mechanical Branch Sem.-II and
For Mechanical Sandwich Sem.-I
STRENGTH OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
UNIT I
1. (a) Derive the relation between Youngs modulus and Bulk
modulus. [4]
[3862]-119 2
(b) A wagon weighing 35 kN is attached to the wire rope and
moving down an inclined plane at speed of 3.6 kmph. The
wire rope diameter is 40 mm and its length is 60 m. When
the rope jams and the wagon is suddenly brought to rest.
Calculate the maximum instantaneous stress and maximum
instantaneous elongation produced in it. Take modulus of elasticity
E = 210 GPa. [6]
(c) A steel rod 40 mm in diameter is enclosed by a copper tube
of external diameter 50 mm and internal diameter 40 mm.
A pin 25 mm in diameter is fitted transverse to the assembly
at each end as shown in Fig. 1 so as to secure the rod and
the tube. If the temperature of the assembly is raised by
60C, find :
(i) the stresses in steel rod and copper tube and
(ii) shear stress in the pin.
Take E
st
= 200 GPa, E
cu
= 100 GPa, a
st
= 1.2 10
5
/C,
a
cu
= 1.6 10
5
/C. [8]
Fig. 1
f 50
f 40
Copper tube
Steel Rod
[3862]-119 3 P.T.O.
Or
2. (a) Water under pressure 8 MPa is suddenly admitted on to a
plunger of 80 mm diameter, attached to a rod of 25 mm diameter,
2.5 m long. Find the maximum instantaneous stress and
deformation of the rod. Take E = 210 GPa. [6]
(b) Determine the elongation of a bar of tapering section
having diameter d
1
and d
2
and length L and subjected to
an axial force P. [4]
(c) The bulk modulus for the material is 50 GPa. A 12 mm
diameter rod of the material was subjected to an axial
pull of 14 kN and the change in diameter was observed to
be 3.6 10
3
mm. Calculate Poissons ratio and Modulus of
elasticity. [8]
UNIT II
3. (a) Simply supported beam of span L carrying U.D.L. of W per
unit run over the whole span. Derive the equation for maximum
deflection and slope at each end. [6]
[3862]-119 4
(b) A beam ABCDEF 12 m long and supported at A and E as
shown in Fig. 2. Draw Shear Force and Bending Moment
diagrams of the beam. Also find the position of point of
contraflexure, if any. [10]
Fig. 2
Or
4. (a) Determine slope and deflection at point B and maximum deflection
for the beam as shown in Fig. 3. Take E = 200 GPa, Moment
of Inertia I = 20 10
5
. [8]
Fig. 3
2 m 2 m 1.5 m 5 m 1.5 m
1
.
5

m
20 kN/m
15 kN/m
40 kN
20 kN
30 kN
A
B C D
F
E
A
B
C D
2 m 2 m
1 m
0.5 m
2 kN
0.5 m
[3862]-119 5 P.T.O.
(b) Fig. 4 shows the Shear Force diagram for a beam which rests
on two supports one of them is at left end. Draw the Loading
diagram and Bending moment diagram and also find the position
of second support. [8]
Fig. 4
UNIT III
5. (a) Derive the equations for normal and shear (tangential)
stresses on an inclined plane BE when it is subjected to two
mutually perpendicular tensile stresses s
x
and s
y
as shown
in Fig. 5. [8]
Fig. 5
2 m
10 m 6 m
10 kN
5.5 kN
1.5 kN
3 kN
9 kN
3 kN
A
B
C D
E
s
x
s
x
s
y
s
y
q
[3862]-119 6
(b) A bolt is subjected to an axial pull of 8 kN and a transverse
shear force of 3 kN. Determine the diameter of the bolt required
based on :
(i) Maximum principal stress theory
(ii) Maximum shear stress theory and
(iii) Maximum strain energy theory.
Take elastic limit in simple tension is equal to 270 MPa and
Poissons ratio = 0.3. Adopt Factor of Safety = 3. [8]
Or
6. (a) What are various theories of failures ? Explain in detail :
(i) Maximum Principal stress theory and
(ii) Maximum strain energy theory. [8]
(b) A rectangular block of material is subjected to stresses on
perpendicular planes as shown in Fig. 6. Using Mohrs Circle
method (Graphical method) find :
(i) The normal and shear stresses on a plane for which
q = 30
(ii) The magnitude of principal stresses and
[3862]-119 7 P.T.O.
(iii) inclination of the planes on which principal stresses
acts. [8]
Fig. 6
SECTION II
UNIT IV
7. (a) A simply supported beam of 4 m span carries a load P acting
vertically downward as shown in Fig. 7 (a). The cross-section
is I section the dimensions are given in Fig. 7 (b). If the
permissible stresses in tension and compression are 40 MPa
and 30 MPa respectively. Determine the maximum safe value
of P. [8]
Fig. 7 (a)
90 N/mm
2
90 N/mm
2
140 N/mm
2
140 N/mm
2
q = 50 N/mm
2
q = 50 N/mm
2
1 m
3 m
4 m
P
[3862]-119 8
Fig. 7 (b)
(b) A cantilever beam of negligible self-weight carries uniform
distributed load 40 kN/m over entire span of 1 m and also
has a concentrated load 80 kN at free end, find shear stresses
along horizontal planes passing through points a, b and c. Section
of beam and the points are shown in Fig. 8. [8]

Fig. 8
60 mm
20 mm
100 mm
100 mm
20 mm
20 mm
100 mm
100 mm
80 mm
200 mm
30 mm
0.5 m
0.5 m
X
80 kN
40 kN/m
X Section
b
c
a
[3862]-119 9 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) A cantilever beam has T shaped cross-section. It is acted upon
by a clockwise couple M at free end. Determine M if allowable
stresses in bending in tension and compression are 40 MPa
and 105 MPa respectively. Fig. 9 shows the dimensions. [8]
Fig. 9
(b) A timber box beam having cross-section as shown in Fig. 10.
The beam is simply supported and carries a vertical load P
at mid span. Length of beam is 2 m; allowable working stress
in bending is 8 MPa. Each screw can transmit a shear force
of 3000 N. Find the spacing of screws. [8]
Fig. 10
100 mm
12 mm
38 mm
12 mm
30 mm
240 mm
30 mm
50 mm
200 mm
50 mm
[3862]-119 10
UNIT V
9. (a) A hollow shaft has 60 mm external diameter and 50 mm internal
diameter :
(i) Determine the twisting moment it can resist if permissible
shear stress is 100 MPa.
(ii) Determine the diameter of solid circular shaft made of
the same material which can transmit same twisting
moment.
(iii) Compare their weights per meter length.
Take G = 80 GPa. [8]
(b) Compare the crippling load given by Eulers and Rankines formula
for a tubular steel strut 2.3 m long having external diameter
38 mm and internal diameter 33 mm. Strut is fixed at one
end and hinged at other end. Yield stress for steel 335 MPa,
E = 205 GPa, a =
1
7500
. [8]
[3862]-119 11 P.T.O.
Or
10. (a) A solid shaft of 180 mm diameter has the same cross-sectional
area as that of hollow shaft of the same materials of inside
diameter 130 mm.
(i) Find out the ratio of power transmitted by the two shafts
of same angular velocity.
(ii) Compare angle of twist in equal lengths of these shafts
when stressed equal. [8]
(b) Derive Eulers formula for buckling load for column with hinged
ends. Also state the limitations of Eulers formula. [8]
UNIT VI
11. (a) Design a cotter joint to transmit a load of 90 kN in tension
or compression. Assume the following stress for socket, spigot
and cotter :
Allowable tensile stress = 90 MPa
Allowable crushing stress = 120 MPa
Allowable shear stress = 60 MPa. [12]
(b) What is preferred series ? What are the advantages of
it ? Write the first five numbers of R-10 series. [6]
[3862]-119 12
Or
12. (a) A knuckle joint is subjected to an axial load of 100 kN. Determine
the diameter of knuckle pin considering the load to be uniformly
distributed over the pin in the eye and uniformly varying over
the portion of pin in forks :
Allowable tensile and compressive stress for pin = 600 N/mm
2
Allowable shear stress for pin = 300 N/mm
2
Allowable bearing pressure for pin = 200 N/mm
2
Thickness of eye = 1.5 pin diameter
Total fork thickness = eye thickness.
Draw a neat sketch of the joint. [12]
(b) Write a short note on Design for environment. [6]
[3862]-120 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-120
S.E. (Mechanical) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Attempt one question of each unit from Section I and
Section II.
answer-books.
(iii) Draw neat diagrams wherever necessary.
(iv) Assume suitable data, if required.
SECTION I
UNIT I
1. (a) How is the tool shank of a single point cutting tool designed ? [8]
(b) In an orthogonal cutting test with a tool rake angel 10, the
following observations were made :
(i) Chip thickness ratio : 0.3
(ii) Horizontal component of the cutting force = 1290 N
[3862]-120 2
(iii) Vertical component of the cutting force = 1650 N.
From Merchants theory, calculate the various components of
the cutting force and the coefficient of friction at the chip
tool interface. [10]
Or
2. (a) What is meant by built-up edge (BUE) ? With a neat sketch
explain the formation of a (BUE). [6]
(b) How do you define tool life ? Explain the parameters that
control the tool life of a single point cutting tool. [6]
(c) During an orthogonal machining (turning) operation of C-40
steel, the following data were obtained :
(i) chip thickness = 0.45 mm
(ii) width of cut = 2.5 mm
(iii) feed = 0.25 mm/rev
(iv) Tangential cut force = 1130 N
(v) Feed thrust force = 295 N
(vi) Cutting speed = 2.5 m/s
(vii) Rake angle = +10.
Calculate :
(a) Force of shear at the shear time.
(b) Kinematic coefficient of friction at the chip tool interface. [6]
[3862]-120 3 P.T.O.
UNIT II
3. (a) Explain the principle of Gear hobbing. List advantages and
disadvantages of gear hobbing. [8]
(b) What is thread rolling ? Explain its advantages. [8]
Or
4. (a) Sketch the tool shape of broach and write briefly about its
elements. [6]
(b) The bore of an alloy steel component prior to broaching is
0.05
0.00
32.25 mm
+
-
. The bore is to be finish broached to
0.01
0.00
32.75 mm
+
-
diameter. If the length of bore is 35 mm
and cutting speed is 0.15 m/s, determine the broaching power
for broaching and design the broach. Given : Value of Rise
per tooth = 0.05 s-mm. Value of C Alloy steel = 45 N/mm
2
. [10]
UNIT III
5. (a) Write short notes on the following : [8]
(i) FMS (Flexible Manufacturing System)
(ii) CNC Machine.
(b) Explain principle and block diagram of machining centers. State
its advantages and disadvantages. [8]
[3862]-120 4
Or
6. (a) Explain the advantages and limitations of numerical control
of machine tool. [8]
(b) Explain the following codes : [8]
(i) G06
(ii) G08
(iii) G11
(iv) M68
(v) M13
(vi) G92
(vii) M16
(viii) M40-M45.
SECTION II
UNIT IV
7. (a) What factors should be considered for selecting an appropriate
press for a given job ? [6]
(b) Differntiate between cutting die and blanking die. [4]
(c) Find the total pressure, dimensions of tools to produce a
washer 50 mm. Outside diameter with a 24 mm diameter hole,
from material 4 mm thick, having a shear strength of
360 N/mm
2
. [8]
[3862]-120 5 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) The symmetrical cup workpiece shown in figure below is to
be made from cold rolled steel 0.8 mm thick. Make the necessary
calculations for designing the drawing die for this part. [8]
(b) Define spring back and explain how allowances may be made
to compensate for its harmful effects. [5]
(c) Sketch the various methods of applying shear to the punch
and die. [5]
UNIT V
9. (a) Explain why unconventional machining processes are used. [4]
(b) Explain the disadvantages of the relaxation circuit and show
the alternative arrangement of pulse generator used in
EDM. [6]
(c) Briefly explain the working of ECM showing important element. [6]
50
1.6 R
50
0.8
[3862]-120 6
Or
10. (a) What is the function of abrasive slurry in USM ? Explain
how the abrasive selection is made. [6]
(b) Explain the various methods used for preparing the mask for
chemical machining. [6]
(c) Draw sketch of LBM and state its advantages. [4]
UNIT VI
11. (a) Describe the degrees of freedom of a workpiece located in
space. [6]
(b) What is meant by angular location ? [4]
(c) What is meant by foolproofing as applied to jig and fixture ?
How can it be achieved ? [6]
Or
12. (a) Design and draw drilling jig for drilling the holes in the component
shown in figure below. [10]
(b) Explain the advantages to be obtained from the use of pneumatic
and hydraulic clamping devices. [6]
80 mm
100 mm
Drill 6 mm dia. hole
250.050
0.025
P.T.O.
[3862]-121
S.E. (Mech-SW) (First Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
THERMAL ENGINEERINGI
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
(v) Useoflogarithmictables,sliderule,Molliercharts,electronic
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain the adiabetic process. Derive an expression for
the workdone during the adiabetic expansion of an ideal
gas. [6]
(b) How do you determine whether a given process is reversible
or irreversible ? [4]
[3862]-121 2
(c) 5 kg of oxygen is heated in a reversible non-flow constant
volume process from temperature of 60C until the pressure
is doubled. Determine :
(i) final temperature
(ii) work done
(iii) change in internal energy
(iv) heat transfered
(v) change in entropy.
Take C
V
= 0.653 kJ/kgK, C
P
= 0.913 kJ/kgK. [6]
Or
2. (a) Areversibleheatengine,areversibleheatpumpandareversible
refrigerator are operating between a high temperature reservoir
at T
1
and a low temperature reservoir at T
2
, prove that :
( )
( ) ( )
engine HP Ref
HP
1
and COP = 1 + COP .
COP
h =
[6]
(b) What is the physical concept of entropy ? Explain. [4]
(c) A Carnot heat engine works between two temperature of
sourceat900Kandsinkat300K.Itrunsa Carnotrefrigerator
working between two temperature of 300K and 250K.
The engine is supplied 4000 kJ/min and net workout of heat
[3862]-121 3 P.T.O.
engine-refrigerator plant is 12 kW. Determine the heat
transfered to the refrigerant and the net heat transfer to the
sink maintained at 300K. [6]
3. (a) What are the major differences between mountings and
accessories ? Give three examples each. [6]
(b) What are the advantages of Preheating the air ? Explain the
function of superheater. [4]
(c) Calculate the boiler efficiency and equivalent evaporation from
and at 100C of a boiler for which the following data were
obtained during a trial :
(i) steam pressure : 16 bar
(ii) steam temperature : 280C
(iii) feed water temperature : 38C
(iv) water evaporated 10 kg per kg of coal fired of calorific
value 33700 kJ/kg. [6]
Or
4. (a) Explain why safety valves are needed in boiler. Also explain
the purpose of fugible plug. [4]
(b) Explain the heat balance sheet of a boiler. [4]
[3862]-121 4
(c) A coal fired boiler plant consumes 400 kg of coal per hour.
Theboilerevaporates3200kgofwaterat44.5Cintosuperheated
steam at a pressure of 12 bar and 274.5C. If the calorific
value of fuel is 32760 kJ/kg of coal, determine :
(i) Equivalent evaporation
(ii) Boiler efficiency.
Assume specific heat of superheated steam as 2.1 kJ/kgK. [8]
5. (a) Explain the term quality of steam. Differentiate between wet,
dry saturated and superheated steam. [6]
(b) Discuss the principle of throttling calorimeter used for
determining the dryness fraction of steam. [4]
(c) Steam at 15 bar and 0.95 dry expands isentropically to
7.5 bar and then throttled until it becomes just dry. Determine
per kg of steam, change in enthalpy and change in entropy.
Also calculate change in internal energy. [8]
Or
6. (a) Draw Rankine cycle on T-S diagram using dry saturated
steam and obtain an expression for the Rankine cycle
efficiency. [4]
(b) Write a short note on combined separating and throttling
calorimeter. [6]
[3862]-121 5 P.T.O.
(c) In an ideal Rankine cycle, the steam condition at turbine inlet
is 20 bar and 350C. The condenser pressure is 0.08 bar.
Determine :
(i) Rankine efficiency
(ii) If the steam flow rate is 2000 kg/h, what is the power
output in kW. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain with neat sketch Boys gas calorimeter. [6]
(b) What is the significance of knowing volumetric analysis of dry
combustion products ? [4]
(c) A steam boiler uses pulverised coal in the furnace. The ultimate
analysis of coal as received is C = 78%, H
2
= 3%, O
2
= 3%,
ash = 10% and moisture = 5%. Excess air supplied is 30%.
Calculate actual air supplied and mass of gaseous products
formed per kg of coal burnt. [6]
Or
8. (a) Explain the following terms related to fuels :
(i) Volatility
(ii) Flash point
(iii) Specific gravity. [6]
[3862]-121 6
(b) What are alternative fuels used in IC engine ? [4]
(c) A fuel having chemical formula C
7
H
16
is burnt with 10% excess
air. Assume 90% carbon burnt to CO
2
and remaining to CO.
Determine volumetric analysis of dry flue gases. [6]
9. (a) Derive an expression for thermal efficiency of dual cycle. [8]
(b) Anengineworkingonconstantvolumecyclehasclearancevolume
of 1 litre and stroke volume of 6 litre. The suction pressure
and temperature are 1 bar and 20C respectively. The pressure
at the end of heat addition is 25 bar. Determine :
(i) Pressure and temperature of salient points of cycle.
(ii) Thermal efficiency of cycle.
(iii) Work done per cycle.
Take C
V
for heat supplied is 0.807 kJ/kgK
C
V
for heat rejected is 0.737 kJ/kgK. [8]
Or
10. (a) Compare Otto, Diesel and dual cycle for :
(i) Same compression ratio and same heat input
(ii) For constant max. pressure and same heat input. [8]
[3862]-121 7 P.T.O.
(b) A diesel engine operating on air standard diesel cycle has
100 mm bore and 120 mm stroke. Engine speed is 1800 rpm.
At the beginning of compression the pressure and temperature
of air are 1.03 bar and 35C. If clearance volume is 1/8th
of stroke volume, calculate :
(i) Pressure and temperature at salient points of cycle
(ii) Compression ratio
(iii) Efficiency of cycle. [8]
11. (a) Explain the following terms related to compressor :
(i) Free air delivery
(ii) Capacity of compressor
(iii) Volumetric efficiency. [6]
(b) What is the influence of intake temperature, intake pressure,
clearanceandcompressionandexpansionindicesonperformance
of reciprocating compressor ? [6]
(c) A single stage single acting air compressor works between
1 bar and 16 bar. Compression follows PV
1.3
= C. Piston speed
is 200 m/min. It runs at 350 r.p.m. It has an indicated power
consumption of 300 kW and volumetric efficiency is 85%. Find
cylinder diameter and stroke length. [6]
[3862]-121 8
Or
12. (a) Prove that intercooler pressure (P
2
) for minimum work
required, for two stage reciprocating air compressor is given
by P
2
=
1 3
P P . [6]
(b) Discuss various methods to improve isothermal efficiency of
reciprocating compressor. [4]
(c) In a 3 stage compressor air is compressed from 98 kPa to
500 kPa. Calculate for 1 m
3
of air per second :
(i) Work under ideal condition
(ii) Isothermal work
(iii) Saving in work due to multistaging
(iv) Isothermal efficiency in each case. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-122
S.E. (Mechanical Sandwich) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
THEORY OF MACHINE AND MACHINE DESIGNI
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
(iv) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic
(v) Assume suitable data, if necessary.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain the following terms :
(i) Lower Pair
(ii) Higher Pair
(iii) Kinematic Chain
(iv) Inversion. [8]
(b) Explain Grublers criterion for determining degree of freedom
for mechanisms. [4]
(c) State and prove the condition of correct steering for a four
wheeled vehicle. [4]
[3862]-122 2
Or
2. (a) Explain the following mechanisms with neat sketch :
(i) Pendulum pump
(ii) Crank and slotted lever quick return mechanism.
(iii) Whithworth quick return mechanism
(iv) Elliptical trammel. [12]
(b) Write a short note on Kutzbach Criterion. [4]
3. (a) State and prove Kennedys theorem of three centres in
line. [4]
(b) The driving crank AB of the quick return mechanism, as shown
in Fig. 1 revolves at a uniform speed of 200 rpm. Find the
velocity and acceleration of slider R, in the position when the
crank makes an angle of 60 with the vertical line of centres
PA. Also find the acceleration of sliding of block at B along
the slotted lever PQ. [14]
Fig. 1
Link AB = 75 mm
RQ = 500 mm
AP = 200 mm
PQ = 375 mm
[3862]-122 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) What is the significance of the loop-closure equation in
Kinematics ? [4]
(b) In the mechanism shown in Fig. 2 OA = 300 mm,
AB = 600 mm, AC = 1200 mm and BD = 1200 mm. OD is
horizontal at the instant shown and OA rotates at 200 rpm
in clockwise direction. Find :
(i) Velocities of C and D
(ii) Angular velocities of links AC and BD
(iii) Acceleration of C. [14]
Fig. 2
C
A
B
30
D
30
300 mm
O
[3862]-122 4
5. (a) In a slider crank mechanism, the crank is 200 mm long and
connecting rod 800 mm long. Find analytically (i) the velocity
and acceleration of piston (ii) angular velocity and acceleration
of connecting rod when the crank is turned through 60 from
IDC. The angular velocity of the crank is 20 rad/s and is
increasing at rate of 10 rad/s every second. [6]
(b) Explain :
(i) The compound pendulum method of finding radius of gyration
of rigid body.
(ii) Two point dynamically equivalent system.
(iii) Correction couple. [10]
Or
6. (a) The piston diameter of an internal combustion engine is
125 mm and stroke is 220 mm. The connecting rod is 4.5
times the crank length and has a mass of 50 kg. The mass
of the reciprocating parts is 30 kg. The centre of mass of
the connecting rod is 170 mm from the crank pin centre and
the radius of gyration about an axis through the centre of
mass is 148 mm. The engine runs at 320 rpm. Find the magnitude
and direction of the inertia force and the corresponding torque
on the crankshaft when the angle turned by the crank is 140
from the IDC. [10]
[3862]-122 5 P.T.O.
(b) Explain the following :
(i) Piston effort of an IC engine.
(ii) Bifilar suspension method of finding radius of gyration
of a rigid body. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) A steel shaft made of 40C8 is used to drive a machine. It
rotates at 1500 rpm. The pulleys A, B and bearings C, D
are located as shown in Fig. 3. The belt tensions are also
shown in figure. Determine the diameter of the shaft
using ASME code of design. The yield strength of shaft
material is 330 N/mm
2
and the ultimate tensile strength is
600 N/mm
2
. Combined shock and fatigue factor applied to
bending = 1.5 and combined shock and fatigue factor applied
to torsion = 1.2. [8]
Fig. 3
[3862]-122 6
(b) A square key is stronger against crushing than rectangular
key. Explain. [6]
(c) Give advantages and disadvantages of Welded joints over
threaded joints. [4]
Or
8. (a) A protected type flange coupling is used to transmit 25 kW
power at 500 rpm from an engine to a machine. Design the
coupling for an overload capacity of 25%. Assume the following
permissible stresses :
CI Flanges Shaft Bolts
& Keys
Permissible tensile stress, MPa 20 60 60
Permissible shear stress, MPa 12 35 28
Permissible compressive stress, MPa 60 60 60
Assume number of bolts as 6. Draw a neat sketch of the
assembly showing all the components. [10]
(b) Explain design of Kennedy key. [2]
[3862]-122 7 P.T.O.
(c) A bracket as shown in Fig. 4 is welded to a column. Determine
the size of the weld, if the permissible shear strength of the
weld is 80 N/mm
2
. [6]
Fig. 4
9. (a) A power screw having double start square threads of 25 mm
nominal diameter and 5 mm pitch is acted upon by an axial
load of 10 kN. The outer and inner diameters of screw collar
are 50 mm and 20 mm respectively. The coefficient of thread
friction and collar friction may be assumed as 0.2 and 0.15
respectively.
The screw rotates at 12 rpm. Assuming uniform wear condition
at collar and allowable thread bearing pressure of 5.77 N/mm
2
,
find :
(i) the torque required to rotate the screw
(ii) the stress in screw and
(iii) the height of the nut. [8]
[3862]-122 8
(b) A composite compression spring has two closed coiled helical
springs. The outer spring is 75 mm longer than the inner
spring. The outer spring has 10 coils of mean diameter
40 mm and wire diameter of 5 mm. The inner spring has
8 coils of mean diameter 30 mm and wire diameter 4 mm.
When the spring is subjected to an axial load of 400 N, find :
(i) Compression of each spring,
(ii) Load shared by each spring,
(iii) Shear stress induced in each spring,
(iv) Combined stiffness.
Assume G = 84 kN/mm
2
. [8]
Or
10. (a) A valve spring of an IC Engine is to be designed for the
following details :
Spring load = 80 N when valve is closed
Spring load = 100 N when valve is open
Space constraints for the fitment of the spring are :
Inside guide bush diameter = 24 mm
Outside recess diameter = 36 mm
Valve lift = 5 mm
[3862]-122 9 P.T.O.
Spring steel has the following properties :
Permissible shear stress = 355 MPa
Modulus of rigidity = 8 10
4
N/mm
2
Spring ends = squared and ground
Design :
(i) wire diameter,
(ii) spring index,
(iii) total number of coils,
(iv) solid length of the spring,
(v) free length of the spring
when additional 15% of working deflection is used to avoid
complete closing of coils. [10]
(b) The lead screw of a lathe has ACME threads of 60 mm outside
diameter and 8 mm pitch. It supplies drive to a tool carriage
which needs an axial force of 2000 N. A collar bearing
with inner and outer radii as 30 mm and 60 mm respectively,
is provided. The coefficient of friction for screw threads
is 0.12 and for collar it is 0.1. Find the torque required to
drive the screw and efficiency of the screw. If the lead
screw rotates at 30 rpm, find the power required to drive
the screw. [6]
[3862]-122 10
11. (a) Two parallel shafts are to be connected by an open flat belt.
The diameter of the pulleys are 1.5 m and 1 m and they
are 3 m apart. The initial tension in the belt when stationary
is 4 kN. The mass of the belt is 2.5 kg/m and the coefficient
of friction between the belt and pulley is 0.3. Calculate the
power transmitted, if the smaller pulley rotates at 600 rpm.
Also suggest the speed of the smaller pulley for maximum
power transmitted by the belt. Determine its maximum
power. [8]
(b) The effective turning moment exerted by a two stroke engine
at crank is represented by :
T = 8000 + 1000 sin 2q 2000 cos 2q, Nm
where q is the inclination of the crank to the IDC. The
cycle repeats after every 180 of crank rotation. Assuming an
external resistance constant, determine the mass and cross
section (b = 4t) of the flywheel. Also find the power developed
by the flywheel. Assume total percentage fluctuation of speed
as 0.8% of mean speed of 300 rpm and r = 7200 kg/m
3
.
From space constraints, the flywheel radius should not exceed
750 mm. [8]
[3862]-122 11 P.T.O.
Or
12. (a) The T-q diagram of a diesel engine consists of intercepted
areas which are +40, 85, +79, 68, +96 and 62 mm
2
in one
cycle in the given order. The torque axis scale is 1 mm =
75 Nm and crank angle scale is 1 mm = 5. Mean speed
of the engine is 500 rpm. Design the rim of the flywheel
for the following data :
(i) Limiting rim speed at mean radius = 30 m/sec.
(ii) The fluctuation of speed is not to exceed 2% of mean
speed.
(iii) Width to thickness ratio for rectangular rim cross-section
is 1.5.
(iv) Flywheel material density is 7200 kg/m
3
. Neglect the effect
of hub and arms.
Also evaluate the stresses in the rim by considering the
centrifugal forces. [8]
(b) Explain phenomenon of slip and creep in the belt drives. [4]
(c) Compare Flat belts and V-belts. [4]
+1 Chart Attached
[3862]-123
S.E. (Mech. S/W) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
THERMAL ENGINEERING-II
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
(v) Useoflogarithmictables,sliderule,MollierCharts,electronic
SECTION I
1. (a) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of vapor absorption
refrigeration system over vapor compression system. [6]
(b) Discuss the relative merits of NH
3
and R12 as refrigerants. [4]
(c) A refrigerator working on Bell Coleman cycle operates between
pressure limits of 1.05 bar and 8.5 bar. Air is drawn from
cold chamber at 10C, compressed and then it is cooled to
30C before entering the expansion cylinder. Expansion and
Compression follow the law PV
1.35
= C. Determine theoretical
COP of the system and heat rejected per kg of air.
Take = 1.4 and C
P
= 1.0 kJ/kgK for air. [6]
Or
2. (a) What is subcooling and superheating ? Explain with the help
of diagram ? Why is superheating considered to be good in
certain cases ? [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-123 2
(b) A Refrigerator works between 7C and 27C. The vapor is
dry and saturated at the end of isentropic compression. There
is no undercooling and the evaporation is by throttle valve.
Find (i) C.O.P. (ii) power of compressor to remove 175 kJ/min.
The properties of refrigerant are as under : [8]
Temperature Sensible Latent Entropy Entropy of dry
C Heat Heat of Liquid Saturated Vapor
kJ/kg kJ/kg kJ/kgK kJ/kgK
7 29.4 1298 0.1088 4.748
27 124.8 1172.8 0.427 4.334
3. (a) Establish the following expression for air-vapor mixture : [4]
Specific Humidity = w = 0.622
V
V
P
P P
where P
V
= Partial Pressure of water vapor
P = Barometric Pressure.
(b) Show the following processes on the skeleton psychrometric
chart and explain : [4]
(i) Dehumidification of moist air by cooling
(ii) Adiabatic mixing of two streams.
(c) Two kg of air at 40C DBT and 50% RH is mixed with three
kg of air at 20C DBT and 12C DPT. Calculate temperature
and specific humidity of the mixture. Take ambient pressure
= 1.013 bar. Use psychrometric relations only. [8]
Or
4. (a) Define : [4]
(i) Specific humidity
(ii) DPT
(iii) Degree of saturation
(iv) By-pass factor.
[3862]-123 3 P.T.O.
(b) Explain summer air-conditioning system with heat sketch. [4]
(c) 90 m
3
of air per minute at 20C and 75% RH is heated unit
its DBT becomes 30C. Determine : [8]
(i) R.H. of heated air
(ii) Heat added per minute.
Use psychrometric chart.
5. (a) Explain the classification of condensers used in refrigeration
andair-conditioningsystem.Explainanyonewithneatsketch. [6]
(b) What are the methods used for duct sizing ? Explain. [6]
(c) Write a short note on Types of Ducts used in air-conditioning
plants. [6]
Or
6. (a) Explain the common refrigeration controls. [6]
(b) Explain the functions of automatic controls in air-conditioning
plants. [6]
(c) Explain the equal friction method for ducts. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain with neat sketch simple carburettor. [6]
(b) What is the importance of ignition timing and what are major
factors affecting optimum spark setting ? [4]
(c) A single cylinder four stroke petrol engine delivers 100 kW
ofbrakepowerat3000rpm.BMEPis9bar.Mechanicalefficiency
is 80%. BSFC is 0.240 kg/kwh. Calorific value of fuel is 43000
kJ/kg. Stroke to bore ratio is 1. Compression ratio is 7.
Determine :
(i) Bore and stroke length
(ii) Brake thermal efficiency
(iii) Air standard efficiency
(iv) Indicated thermal efficiency
(v) Indicated mean effective pressure. [8]
[3862]-123 4
Or
8. (a) Explain dry sump lubrication system. [6]
(b) What is the purpose of testing I.C. engine ? [4]
(c) A diesel engine develops 75 kW and consumes 20.4 kg of diesel
oil per hour. C.V. of fuel is 45000 kJ/kg. The water supplied
to engine jacket on its exit enters an exhaust gas calorimeter.
The following observations are made :
Mass of water circulated to jacket = 25 kg/min.
Temperature of water entering jacket = 27C
Temperature of water leaving jakcket = 66C
Temperature of water leaving exhaust gas calorimeter = 91C
Temperature of exhaust gas leaving engine = 410C
Temperature of exhaust gas leaving exhaust gas calorimeter
= 160C
Room temperature = 27C
If air standard efficiency is 60%, find relative efficiency. Draw
up energy balance on minute basis and percentage basis. [8]
9. (a) Explain stages of combustion in S.I. engine. [6]
(b) What are the factors influencing flame speed ? [4]
(c) Explain T-shape combustion chamber with neat sketch. [6]
Or
10. (a) Explain diesel knock. [6]
(b) How are diesel fuels rated ? [4]
(c) Explain the effect of variable that affects ignition delay
period. [6]
11. (a) Explain with neat sketch constant pressure turbochanging. [6]
(b) What are the limitations of superchanging in CI engine ? [4]
(c) Explain with neat sketch any two superchargers. [6]
Or
12. (a) Explain with neat sketch exhaust gas recirculation system. [6]
(b) What are the harmful effects of engine emission ? [4]
(c) What are the latest emission norms ? [6]
[3862]-124
S.E. (Mech.S/W) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING
(2008 PATTERN)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain the procedure to find grain fineness number. [6]
(b) Explain Upset and shot peening process. [5]
(c) Distinguish between hot working and cold working. [5]
Or
2. (a) List the defects in casting with remedies for the same. [5]
(b) Explain the jolting molding machine with a neat sketch. [6]
(c) Write a note on tube drawing process. [5]
P.T.O.
[3862]-124 2
3. (a) Write a note on FCAW mentioning its advantages. [6]
(b) Explain the steps in soldering and also list its application. [6]
(c) What are the types of adhesives used ? [6]
Or
4. (a) Write a note on submerged arc welding. [6]
(b) Write a note on GTAW. [6]
(c) On what principle resistance welding is done and explain projection
welding. [6]
5. (a) Explain the lapping process with neat sketch mentioning the
control parameters. [6]
(b) List the taper turning methods on lathe and describe taper
turning attachment with neat sketch. [6]
(c) Explain the procedure for compound indexing. [4]
Or
6. (a) What is the difference between truing and dressing related
to grinding wheel ? [4]
(b) Sketch and explain floating holder used on drilling machine
and why is it used ? [6]
(c) Sketch and explain the arbor assembly of milling machine. [6]
[3862]-124 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) List the limitations of broaching operation. [5]
(b) Explain merchant force circle with a neat sketch. [6]
(c) Write a note on gear hobbing. [5]
Or
8. (a) Define tool life and factors affecting tool life. [6]
(b) Explain thread chasing operation. [5]
(c) Sketch and label single point cutting tool. [5]
9. (a) Distinguish between NC and CNC. [4]
(b) Write a note on AJM. [6]
(c) Write a note on ATC. [6]
Or
10. (a) Write a note on machining centre. [6]
(b) Write a note on EBM. [6]
(c) What do you mean by a block in CNC programming ?
Write the format of the block mentioning the meaning of
each. [4]
11. (a) What are the methods to reduce cutting force ? [6]
(b) Sketch diamond pin and conical locator mentioning its
application. [6]
[3862]-124 4
(c) Draw the strip layout showing back scrap, front scrap, scrap
bridge and scrap on the length and give relations to find out
feed, no. of pieces and scrap on the length and percentage
utilization. [6]
Or
12. (a) Define center of pressure. Why is it found ? What are the
steps to find it ? [6]
(b) Write a note on modular fixture. [6]
(c) Explain turning fixture with neat sketch. [6]
[3862]-125
S.E. (Mech. S/W) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
COMPUTER APPLICATION
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
(iv) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts,
electronic pocket calculator and steam tables is
allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) Find a real root of equation :
3x = cos x + 1
by Newton-Raphsons method. [8]
(b) Draw a flowchart to solve Gauss-Legendre 2-point
formula. [4]
(c) Differentiate between Newton-Raphsons method and Regula-Falsi
method. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-125 2
Or
2. (a) A train is moving at speed of 30 m/s, suddenly brakes are
applied. The speed of the train per second after t second
is given by :
Time (t) Speed (v)
00 30
05 24
10 19
15 16
20 13
25 11
30 10
35 08
40 07
45 05
Apply Simpsons 3/8 rule to determine the distance moved by
the train in 45 seconds. [6]
(b) What is modified Newton-Raphsons method ? [4]
(c) Evaluate :
1 1
0 0
A .
x y
e dx dy
+
=
,
using trapezoidal rule. [6]
[3862]-125 3 P.T.O.
3. (a) From the following table, estimate the number of student who
obtained marks between 40 & 45 : [8]
Marks No. of Students
3040 31
4050 42
5060 51
6070 35
7080 31
(b) Find
dy
dx
and
2
2
d y
dx
at x = 1.1 : [8]
x y
1.0 7.981
1.1 8.403
1.2 8.781
1.3 9.129
1.4 9.451
1.5 9.750
1.6 10.031
Or
4. (a) The velocity distribution of fluid near a flat surface is given
below :
x v
0.1 0.72
0.3 1.81
0.6 2.73
0.8 3.47
[3862]-125 4
x is distance from surface (mm) and v is the velocity
mm
sec

.
Use Lagranges interpolation polynomials to obtain the velocity
at x = 0.4. [8]
(b) The relation between x and y is defined by a function :

2
10
x
y = , find
2
2
and
dy d y
dx
dx
at x = 6.
The given values of x are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. [8]
5. (a) Apply the Gauss-Seidel iterative method to solve the following
equations :
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
10 5 2 3
4 10 3 3
6 10 3
x x x
x x x
x x x
- - =
+ - =
- + =
Iterate up to a maximum of 10 times or up to an accuracy
of 0.0001. [12]
(b) Explain Cholesky method. [6]
Or
6. (a) Solve the equations :
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
10 12
10 10
2 10 9
x x x
x x x
x x x
+ + =
+ - =
- + =
by using Gauss-Jordon method. [10]
(b) Explain LU decomposition method. [8]
[3862]-125 5 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) For the following data fit a curve of the type y = ax
b
: [8]
x y
10 1.06
20 1.33
30 1.52
40 1.68
50 1.81
60 1.91
70 2.01
80 2.11
(b) Draw flowchart for fitting a curve of the type y = ae
bx
. [4]
(c) Explain the following type of errors with example : [4]
(i) Absolutor error
(ii) Relative error
(iii) Percentile error
(iv) Round-off error.
Or
8. (a) Fit a second degree curve of the type y = ax
2
+ bx + c
of the following data : [8]
x y
3 12
2 4
1 1
0 2
1 7
2 15
3 30
[3862]-125 6
(b) Draw flowchart for fitting a straight line. [4]
(c) Explain error propagation. [4]
9. (a) Given :

2
1 dy y
dx x
x
+ =
, y(1) = 1.
Evaluate y(1.2) by modified Euler method. Take h = 0.1,
accuracy = 0.001. [10]
(b) Write a computer program for Taylor series method to solve : [6]
1
dy
xy
dx
= +
Or
10. (a) Using Runge-Kutta method of fourth order find y(0.1), y(0.2)
and y(0.3) : [10]
Given 1
dy
xy
dx
= + , y(0) = 2.
(b) Draw flowchart for modified Euler method. [6]
11. (a) Solve Laplace equation :
2 2
2 2
T T
0
x y

+ =

at the interior points of square mesh is given below : [10]
[3862]-125 7 P.T.O.
(b) Draw a flowchart for solving hyperbolic equation of type : [8]
2 2
2 2
16 .
u u
x u

=

Or
12. (a) Solve :

2 2
2 2
16
u u
x t

=

given that u(0, t) = 0, u(5, t) = 0
u(x, 0) = x
2
(x 5) and u(x, 0) = 0
by taking h = 1 and up to 4 times steps. [10]
(b) Draw flowchart to solve Laplace equation in Q. 11 (a). [8]
[3862]-131
S.E. (Prod./S/W) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
HEAT AND FLUID ENGINEERING
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Define the following terms : [8]
(i) Ideal fluid and real fluid
(ii) Compressibility and bulk modulus
(iii) Dynamic viscosity and kinematic viscosity
(iv) Surface tension and vapour pressure.
P.T.O.
[3862]-131 2
(b) The space between two square flat parallel plates is filled with
oil. Each side of the plate is 60 cm. Thickness of the oil film
is 12.5 mm. The upper plate which moves at 2.5 m/sec requires
a force of 98.1 N to maintain the speed. [8]
Determine :
(i) Dynamic viscosity of oil in poise
(ii) Kinematic viscosity of oil in stokes if specific gravity of the
oil is 0.95.
Or
2. (a) Derive an expression for total pressure and center of pressure
for an inclined plane immersed in liquid. [10]
(b) State and prove Pascals law. Write its application. [6]
3. (a) A horizontal venturimeter with inlet diameter 20 cm and throat
diameter 10 cm is used to measure the flow of oil of sp. gr.
0.8. The discharge of oil through venturimeter is 60 litres/sec.
Find the reading of the oil-mercury differential manometer. Take
C
d
= 0.98. [8]
(b) What are the different types of forces acting on the fluid
flow ? [4]
(c) Write Bernoullis equation and write its assumption. [4]
[3862]-131 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) Derive an expression for discharge through circular orifice
plate. [8]
(b) Water flows through a triangular right angled notch and then
over a rectangular notch of 1 m width. The discharge coefficients
of the triangular and rectangular notch are 0.6 and 0.7 respec-
tively. If the depth of the triangular notch is 360 mm, find the
depth of water over the rectangular notch. [8]
5. (a) Derive Darcy-Weisbach equation for head loss due to
friction. [8]
(b) The pressure difference Dp in a circular pipe of diameter D
and length L due to viscous flow depends on the velocity V,
viscosity m and density r. Using Buckinghams p-theorem, obtain
an expression for : [10]
N L
[Re].
D D
p
m
D = f
Or
6. (a) Explain with neat sketch working of any one hydraulic
turbine. [8]
(b) Explain the following terms : [10]
(i) Reynolds number
[3862]-131 4
(ii) Froude number
(iii) Euler number
(iv) Mach number
(v) Dimensional homogeneity.
SECTION II
7. (a) The following results were obtained in a boiler trial : [10]
Feed water/hr 700 kg
Feed water inlet temperature 27C
Steam produced at a pressure 8 bar
Dryness fraction of steam 0.97
Coal used 100 kg/hr
C.V. of coal 25000 kJ/kg
Ash and unburnt coal collected 7.25 kg/hr
C.V. of unburnt fuel 2000 kJ/kg
Flue gases formed/kg of fuel 17.3 kg
Flue gas temperature 325C
Temperature of air in the room 16C
C
p
of flue gases 1.025 kJ/kgK
Draw up energy balance on minute basis and find boiler efficiency.
[3862]-131 5 P.T.O.
(b) Explain the working principle of Babcock and Wilcox Boiler with
neat sketch. [6]
Or
8. (a) A petrol consists of 86% carbon, 14% hydrogen by mass. If fuel
is burnt with 20% excess air and combustion is complete, estimate
volumetric composition of products of combustion including water
vapour formed. [8]
(i) Mole fraction and Mass fraction
(ii) Stoichiometric air and Excess air
(c) Explain ultimate and proximate analysis. [4]
9. (a) Describe with a neat sketch the operation of an air refrigeration
system working on Bell Coleman cycle. [8]
(b) Draw P-h and T-s diagrams of vapour compression refrigeration
system and explain the effect of superheating and subcooling
on COP of it. [8]
Or
10. (a) What are the different types of air-conditioning system ? Explain
the Central Air-conditioning system. [8]
[3862]-131 6
(b) Explain the following with psychrometric chart : [4]
(i) Heating and Humidification;
(ii) Cooling and Dehumidification.
(c) Define the following terms : [4]
(i) Dry bulb temperature
(ii) Wet bulb temperature
(iii) Due point temperature
(iv) Relative humidity.
11. (a) Derive the relation for volumetric efficiency of reciprocating air-
compressor with clearance and hence explain the effect of pressure
ratio and clearance ratio on it. [8]
(b) Define volumetric efficiency and isothermal efficiency of
reciprocating air compressor.
A single stage double acting compressor running at 120 r.p.m.
and power input = 75 kW, Piston speed = 200 m/min, suction
pressure 1 bar and delivery pressure 10 bar h
vol
= 85%. Assuming
the index for expansion and compression (n) = 1.25, find the
cylinder bore and clearance volume as a percent of swept
volume. [10]
[3862]-131 7 P.T.O.
Or
12. (a) A trial carried out on a four-stroke single cylinder gas engine.
The following are the observations taken during trial : [10]
Cylinder diameter = 30 cm
Engine stroke = 50 cm
Clearance volume = 6750 cm
3
Indicated mean effective pressure = 7.64 bar
Net load on the brake = 1.864 kN
Brake diameter = 1.5 m
Rope diameter = 2.5 cm
Speed = 240 r.p.m.
Gas used = 20 m
3
/hr
C.V. of gas = 42000 kJ/m
3
Determine :
(i) The compression ratio
(ii) The mechanical efficiency
[3862]-131 8
(iii) The indicated thermal efficiency
(iv) The air-standard efficiency
(v) The relative efficiency (Assume g = 1.4 for air)
(b) Using the T-s diagram, prove that, for the same quantity of
heat added, increase of compression ratio increases the thermal
efficiency of an Otto-cycle. [8]
[3862]-132
S.E. (Production & Production Sandwich)
(First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
STRENGTH ANALYSIS OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Attempt one question form each Unit of Section I and
Section II.
answer-books.
(iv) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.
(v) Use of non-programmable electronic pocket calculator is allowed.
SECTION I
UNIT I
1. (a) Explain with neat sketches tensile, compressive and shear stresses
and strains. [6]
(b) A member ABCD is subjected to point loads P
1
, P
2
, P
3
,
and P
4
as shown in Fig. 1. Calculate the force P
3
necessary
for the equilibrium if P
1
= 120 kN, P
2
= 220 kN and
P.T.O.
[3862]-132 2
P
4
= 160 kN. Also determine the net change in the length
of the member. Take E = 2 10
5
N/mm
2
. [10]
Or
2. (a) Comment on the bars of composite sections. Derive the relation
for total load on composite bar and modular ratio. [6]
(b) A weight of 200 kN is supported by three short pillars, each
500 mm
2
in section. The central pillar is of steel and the
outer pillars are of copper. The pillars are so adjusted that
at a tempreature of 15C each carries equal load. The temperature
is then raised to 115C. Estimate the stress in each pillar
at 15C and 115C.
Take E
s
= 2.0 10
5
N/mm
2
and E
c
= 0.8 10
5
N/mm
2
.
s
= 1.2 10
5
per C,
c
= 1.85 10
5
per C. [10]
[3862]-132 3 P.T.O.
UNIT II
3. (a) A simply supported beam AB of span 8 m carrying concentrated
loads of 4 kN, 10 kN and 7 kN at distances of 1.5 m,
4 m and 6 m from the left support as shown in Fig. 2. Draw
the shear force diagram and bending moment diagram for the
beam AB. [6]
(b) Find the reaction at the fixed end of the cantilever loaded
as shown in Fig. 3. Also draw the shear force diagram and
bending moment diagram for the beam. [12]
[3862]-132 4
Or
4. (a) Draw the bending moment diagram for the cantilever shown
in Fig. 4. [6]
(b) The diagram shown in Fig. 5 is the shear force diagram for
a beam which rests on two supports one being the left hand
end. Deduce directly from the shear force diagram.
(i) Loading on the beam
(ii) Determine the magnitude of maximum bending moment
and draw the bending moment diagram. [12]
[3862]-132 5 P.T.O.
UNIT III
5. (a) Prove the relations :
M E
= =
I R y
Where,
M = Total moment of resistance offered by the beam section
in N-mm
I = Moment of Inertia of the section about the neutral
axis in mm
4
= Stress intensity in the fiber N/mm
2
y = Distance of the fiber from the neutral axis in mm
E = Modulus of Elasticity in N/mm
2
R = Radius of Neutral surface in mm. [6]
(b) A cast iron bracket as shown in Fig. 6 is subjected to bending
and has cross-section of I-form with unequal flanges. The total
depth of the section is 280 mm and the metal is 40 mm
thick throughout. The top flange is 200 mm wide. Find the
position of neutral axis and the moment of inertia of the section
about the neutral axis and determine the maximum bending
moment that should be imposed on this section if the tensile
stress in the top flange is not to exceed 20 N/mm
2
. What
[3862]-132 6
is then the value of the compressive stress in the bottom
flange ? [10]
Or
6. (a) State the assumptions made in the theory of simple
bending. [6]
(b) The T-beam section shown in Fig. 7 is subjected to sagging
moment. If the extreme tensile stress is two times the extreme
compressive stress, find the thickness of the flange and the
web. Note that the thickness of the flange is two times the
thickness of the web. [10]
[3862]-132 7 P.T.O.
SECTION II
UNIT IV
7. (a) Show that in a direct stress system, the maximum shear stress
in a body is half the magnitude of the applied stress. [8]
(b) At a certain point in a strained material the principal stresses
are 100 N/mm
2
and 40 N/mm
2
both tensile. Find the normal,
tangential and resultant stresses across a plane through the
point at 48 to the major principle plane, using Mohrs circle
of stress. [8]
Or
8. (a) What is strain energy of a material ? Derive the expressions
for the same in different forms. [8]
(b) A rod 12.5 mm in diameter is stretched by 3.20 mm under
a steady load of 10,000 N. What stress would be produced
in the bar by a weight of 700 N falling through 75 mm before
commencing to stretch the rod if it is initially unstressed.
The value of E may be taken as 2.1 10
5
N/mm
2
. [8]
UNIT V
9. (a) Deduce the torsion equation stating the assumptions
made. [8]
(b) Determine the diameter of a solid shaft which will transmit
90 kW at 160 rpm if the shear stress in the shaft is limited
to 60 N/mm
2
. Find also the length of the shaft, if the twist
must not exceed 1 over the entire length.
Take C = 8 10
4
N/mm
2. [10]
[3862]-132 8
Or
10. (a) Two shafts of the same meterial are subjected to the same
torque. If the first shaft is of solid circular section and the
second shaft is of hollow section whose internal diameter is
2/3 of the outside diameter, compare the weights of the two
shafts. [10]
(b) A solid circular shaft is to transmit 300 kW at 100 rpm. If
the shear stress is not to exceed 80 N/mm
2
, find the diameter
of the shaft. What percentage saving in weight would be obtained
if this shaft is replaced by a hollow one whose internal diameter
equals 0.6 of the external diameter, the length, the material
and the mxaimum shear stress being the same. [8]
Unit VI
11. (a) A horizontal beam, simply supported at its ends carries a load
of varying intensity which varies uniformly from 10 kN/m at
one end to 50 kN/m at the other. Find the central deflection
if the span is 9 m in length and 500 mm deep. Take maximum
bending stress as 80 MPa and E = 210 GPa. [8]
(b) Explain Maculays method of beam deflection analysis and discuss
its advantages over the dierct integration method. [8]
[3862]-132 9 P.T.O.
Or
12. (a) What is Eulers curve ? Describe its features. [6]
(b) A 800 mm long straight bar of alloy steel and of
10 mm 4 mm section is mounted in a strut testing machine
and loaded axially. The load is increased till the bar buckles.
Determine the maximum central defection before the material
attains the yield point of 300 MPa. Assume the Eulers formula
for pinned ends. E = 75 GPa. [10]
[3862]-133
S.E. (Production) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MACHINE TOOL OPERATIONS
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Solve three questions from each Section.
(ii) Use separate answer-sheets for each Section.
(iii) Assume suitable data, if required.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain working of all geared head stock with suitable
sketch. [8]
(b) Discuss various types of mandrels with suitable sketches. [6]
(c) Find full taper angle, if D = 100 mm, d = 85 mm and
length = 120 mm. [4]
Or
2. (a) Discuss various taper turning methods with suitable
sketches. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-133 2
(b) Explain tumbler gear feed reversing mechanism with suitable
sketches. [6]
(c) The pitch of leadscrew is 8 mm and the pitch of the thread
to be cut is 1.5 mm. Find the change gears. [4]
3. (a) Discuss various types of drills with suitable sketches. [8]
(b) Explain working of floating holder with suitable sketch. [8]
Or
4. (a) Discuss various types of reamers with suitable sketches. [8]
(b) Explain construction and working of Jig boring machine with
a suitable sketch. [8]
5. (a) List various types of milling machine and explain column and
knee type milling machine with suitable sketch. [8]
(b) Explain construction and working of universal dividing
head. [8]
Or
6. (a) Explain Up milling and Down milling with suitable
sketches. [8]
(b) Discuss various types of milling cutters with suitable
sketches. [8]
[3862]-133 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) Discuss various types of Broaching machines with suitable
sketches. [10]
(b) Explain hydraulic mechanism used in shaper with suitable
sketch. [8]
Or
8. (a) Explain auto feed mechanism used in shaper with suitable
sketch. [10]
(b) Explain working of Crank and Slotted Link mechanism with suitable
sketch. [8]
9. (a) Discuss factors to be considered for selection of grinding
wheel. [8]
(b) Explain external centerless grinding with suitable sketches. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain mounting of grinding wheel with suitable sketch. [8]
(b) Explain marking system of grinding wheel. [8]
11. (a) Explain Honing with suitable sketch. [8]
(b) Explain electroplating with suitable sketch. [8]
[3862]-133 4
Or
12. Write short notes on the following : [16]
(i) Polishing;
(ii) Metal spraying
(iii) Hot dipping.
[3862]-134 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-134
S.E. (Production) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
(Common to Prod./SW)
MATERIAL SCIENCE
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Attempt Q. No. 1 or 2, Q. No. 3 or 4, Q. No. 5 or
6 from Section I and Q. No. 7 or 8, Q. No. 9 or 10,
Q. No. 11 or 12 from Section II
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is cast iron ? What are different types of C.I. ? Explain
with one application each. [6]
[3862]-134 2
(b) What is work Hardening ? Explain its effect on Mechanical
Properties of metal with proper graph. [6]
(c) Draw the following planes on cubic : [6]
(i) (1 1 1)
(ii) (2 2 2)
(iii) (1 1 0).
Or
2. (a) Explain classification of steels based on % carbon and give
typical use of each of them with mech. properties. [6]
(b) Explain Edge and Screw dislocation. [6]
(c) Define : [2]
(i) Unit cell
(ii) Co-ordination no.
(d) Explain point imperfections in detail. [4]
3. (a) Differentiate between Izod and Charpy. [16]
(b) Explain Radiography.
(c) What is fatigue ? What factors improve fatigue strength ?
(d) Show self-explanatory diagram :
(i) Stress-strain diagram for MS
(ii) S-N. diagram for steel.
[3862]-134 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) Draw self explanatory diagram for Erichsen cupping and cone
test and explain. [16]
(b) Differentiate between Vickers and Brinell Hardness Tester.
(c) Write a short note on ultrasonic testing.
(d) Explain and give reason.
(i) Magnetic particle test is used to detect defects in plastic
component.
(ii) Hardness of rubber blade is checked on Brinell hardness
tester.
5. (a) Write Hume Rothery Rule for solid-solution formation. [16]
(b) Draw and explain cooling curve for pure metal.
(c) Draw a typical equilibrium diagram for 2 metals, which have
100% solubility in each other in liquid as well as solid state.
(d) Explain :
(i) Eutectic transformation
(ii) Eutectoid transformation.
Or
6. (a) Write a short note on use of eutectic alloys. [4]
(b) Define Gibbs phase rule and show its application on cooling
curve for eutectic alloys. [4]
[3862]-134 4
(c) Plot an equilibrium dia on given data and show slow cooling
of alloy having 15% B from its liquidus temp. till the room
temp.
Melting point of A : 961C
Melting point of B : 1083C
Eutectic temp. : 780C
Eutectic composition : 28.1% of B
Max. solubility of B in A i.e. in a is 8.8% at Eutectic temp.
and A in B is 7.9% at Eutectic temp. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain strengthening by martensitic transformation. [16]
(b) Explain principle, operation of resistance pyrometer.
(c) Draw disappearing filament pyrometer.
(d) How composite materials are useful for strengthening ? Explain.
Or
8. Write short notes on : [16]
(a) Total radiation pyrometer
(b) Solid-solution hardening
(c) Precipitation hardening
(d) Thermocouple.
[3862]-134 5 P.T.O.
9. (a) What is corrosion ? How is corrosion prevented in material
selection processes ? Explain. [8]
(b) Explain electrodeposition in detail. [6]
(c) How is humidity responsible in increasing corrosion
rate ? [2]
Or
10. (a) Explain ion implantation. [4]
(b) How is design of component responsible to change corrosion
of metal ? Explain with example. [6]
(c) What is Anodic coating ? [2]
(d) Explain PVD process. [4]
11. (a) Explain mechanical processes for powder manufacturing. [6]
(b) What are different advantages of Powder Metallurgy ? [6]
(c) Define the following : [6]
(i) Apparent Density
(ii) Tap Density
(iii) Compressibility.
[3862]-134 6
Or
(i) Diamond impregnated tool
(ii) Electrical contact material
(iii) Carbide tool.
(b) What are physical methods of powder manufacturing. [4]
(c) Is it possible to manufacture a component having wt. of 10 kg
by powder metallurgy ? Explain. [2]
P.T.O.
[3862]-135
S.E. (Prod/Prod SW) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
THEORY OF MACHINES
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Define the following terms :
(i) Screw pair
(ii) Mechanism
(iii) Ternary link
(iv) Compound chain. [4]
(b) Explain in brief Kutzback criterion for determining DOF of
Mechanism. [6]
(c) List inversions of four bar chain and explain any two with
neat sketch. [6]
Or
2. (a) Define Kinematic link. Can spring, belt, liquid be treated as
links ? Justify your answer. [5]
(b) Describe Watts straight line mechanism. What are the practical
uses of straight line mechanism ? [6]
(c) Differentiate between Spatial and Planer Mechanism. [5]
[3862]-135 2
3. (a) The length of various links of mechanism as shown in
Fig. 1 are OA = 0.3 m, AB = 1 m, CD = 0.8 m and
AC = CB.
Determine for the given configuration :
(i) Velocity of slider B
(ii) Velocity of slider D
(iii) Angular velocity of CD
(iv) Angular velocity of AB.
If OA rotates at 60 rpm clockwise, use instantaneous centre
method.
Also find absolute velocity of point C. [12]
Fig. 1
(b) In a slider crank mechanism having a stroke length of
30 cm and an obliquity ratio of 4, the crank is rotating
uniformly clockwise. The velocity of slider is 6 m/s when the
crank has turned 120 from I.D.C. Determine using Kleins
construction :
(i) Acceleration of slider
(ii) Angular velocity and angular acceleration of connecting
rod. [6]
[3862]-135 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) Fig. 2 shows the toggle mechanism in which the crank OA
rotates at a uniform speed of 105 rpm in clockwise direction.
Determine the velocity and acceleration of slider P.
The lengths of various links are : OA = 8 cm, AB = 18 cm,
BC = 24 cm and BP = 28 cm. [14]
Fig. 2
(b) Explain different types of ICRs. [4]
5. (a) Explain in detail various types of friction. [8]
(b) Explain in detail the following :
(i) Coulombs theory of Interlocking
(ii) Stick-slip Mechanism of friction. [8]
[3862]-135 4
Or
6. (a) Define Tribology. Discuss the different areas covered under
Tribology. [5]
(b) State the applications where friction and wear are useful. [5]
(c) Write short notes on (any two) :
(i) Two body and three body abrasive wear
(ii) Corrosive wear
(iii) Surface fatigue wear. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Define and explain the following terms :
(i) Belt-drive
(ii) Rope-drive
(iii) Chain-drive
(iv) Slip and creep of a belt. [6]
(b) Two pulleys, one 450 mm diameter and the other 200 mm
diameter are on parallel shafts 1.95 m apart and are connected
by a crossed belt. Find the length of the belt required and
the angle of contact between the length and each pulley.
What power can be transmitted by the belt when the larger
pulley rotates at 200 rev/min, if the maximum permissible tension
in the belt is 1 kN, and the coefficient of friction between
the belt and pulley is 0.25 ? [10]
[3862]-135 5 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) Distinguish between initial tension and centrifugal tension in
a belt. [6]
(b) An open belt running over two pulleys 240 mm and 600 mm
diameter connects two parallel shafts 3 meters apart and transmits
4 kW from the smaller pulley that rotates at 300 rpm. Coefficient
of friction between the belt and the pulley is 0.3 and the
safe working tension is 10 N per mm width. Determine :
(i) Minimum width of the belt
(ii) Initial belt tension and
(iii) Length of the belt required. [10]
9. (a) What is the difference between brakes and dynamometers ? [5]
(b) A simple-band brake is applied to a rotating drum of
diameter 500 mm. The angle of lap of the band on the
drum is 270.
One end of the band is attached to a fulcrum pin of the
lever and other end is to a pin 100 mm from the fulcrum.
If the co-efficient of friction is 0.25 and a braking force of
[3862]-135 6
90 N is applied at a distance of 600 mm from the fulcrum,
find the braking torque when the drum rotates in the :
(i) Anti-clockwise direction and
(ii) Clockwise direction. [11]
Fig. 3
Or
10. (a) Differentiate between Absorption dynamometer and Transmission
dynamometer. [6]
(b) Fig. 4 shows a differential band brake of drum diameter
400 mm. The two ends of the band are fixed to the points
[3862]-135 7 P.T.O.
on the opposite side of fulcrum of the lever at a distance
of 50 mm and 160 mm from the fulcrum as shown in figure.
The brake is to sustain a torque of 300 Nm. The coefficient
of friction between band and the brake is 0.2.
The angle of contact is 210 and the length of lever from
the fulcrum is 600 mm. Determine :
(i) The force required at the end of the lever for the clockwise
and anticlockwise rotation of the drum.
(ii) Value of OB for the brake to be self-locking for clockwise
rotation. [10]
Fig. 4
[3862]-135 8
11. (a) Explain DAlemberts principle. [4]
(b) Explain the trifilar suspension system. [6]
(c) A connecting rod is suspended from a point 25 mm above
the small end centre and 650 mm above its C.G. It takes
35 seconds for 20 oscillations. Find dynamically equivalent system
of two masses when one mass is located at small end centre.
Mass of the connecting rod is 40 kg. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain dynamically equivalent system. [6]
(b) With the help of neat Schematic diagram, derive frequency
equation of Bifillar Suspension System. [6]
(c) A rigid link, 500 mm long has mass 2 kg and radius of gyration
200 mm. Replace this link by dynamically equivalent system
of two concentrated masses located at the ends of the
link. [6]
[3862]-136
S.E. (Production) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
WELDING AND FOUNDRY
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
books.
(v) Assume suitable data if necessary.
SECTION I
Unit I
1. (a) Explain GTAW process considering the points :
(i) Working principle
(ii) Process parameters
(iii) Advantages
(iv) Disadvantages
(v) Applications. [10]
(b) Explain with neat sketch an arc blow in the welding. Also explain
causes, effects and remedies of arc blow. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-136 2
Or
2. (a) Describe with neat sketch SAW process and its applications. [10]
(b) Explain Voltage-Current and Voltage-Arc length characteristics
in welding. [8]
Unit II
3. (a) Compare spot welding and projection welding processes with neat
sketch. [8]
(b) Distinguish with suitable sketches different types of Oxy-Acetylene
gas flames stating how they are obtained and their applications. [8]
Or
4. (a) Discuss the different variables in resistance welding process. How
are dissimilar metals welded by resistance welding ? [8]
(b) Sketch various types of flames used in the welding of Mild
Steel, Alloy Steel, Aluminum and High Carbon Steel. [8]
Unit III
5. (a) Explain Laser beam welding process with neat sketch and state
its advantages and limitations over electron beam welding process. [8]
(b) Write a short note on friction welding. [8]
Or
6. (a) Explain with neat sketch electron beam welding process and
effect of vacuum on the penetration. [8]
(b) Write a short note on explosive welding. [8]
[3862]-136 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
Unit IV
7. (a) Explain in detail various allowances given to the patterns. [8]
(b) With neat sketch explain construction and operation of a
Cupola. [8]
Or
8. (a) Which are the different ingredients of moulding sand ? State
their importance during mould making. [8]
(b) Explain with neat sketch construction of an electric furnaces. [8]
Unit V
9. (a) Explain with neat sketch pressure die-casting process. List out
merits, demerits and applications of it. [8]
(b) Explain with neat sketch investment casting process. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain with neat sketch centrifugal casting process. [8]
(b) Explain various casting defects with their causes and remedies. [8]
Unit VI
11. (a) What is meant by pressurized and un-pressurized gating system?
State the standard gating ratios used for Aluminium, Steel and
Brass. [8]
(b) Compare directional and progressive solidification of casting. [6]
(c) Explain Chvorinovs rule. [4]
[3862]-136 4
Or
12. (a) Using Caines method calculate the size of cylindrical riser
(Height = Diameter) necessary to feed steel slab casting
30 30 5 cm with side riser, casting is poured horizontally
into the mould.
Data for Steel Casting a = 0.1, b = 0.03 and c = 1.0 [8]
(b) Explain the following : [10]
(i) Criteria used for designing of pouring basin
(ii) Casting yield and methods to increase it.
P.T.O.
[3862]-137
S.E. (Production/Production S/W) (II Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What are the different design methods ? Also compare these
methods. [6]
[3862]-137 2
(b) A link of S shape made of 30 mm diameter as shown in
Fig. 1. Determine the maximum tensile stress and shear stress
in the link. [12]
Or
2. (a) What is design synthesis and design analysis ? [6]
(b) A bell crank lever is to be designed to raise load of 5 kN
at the short end. The arm lengths are 150 mm and 500 mm.
The permissible stresses for lever and pin material in shear
and tension are 60 N/mm
2
and 90 N/mm
2
respectively. The
bearing pressure on the pin is to be limited 12 N/mm
2
. Assume
the lever cross-section as t 4t. [12]
1000 N
75 mm
1000 N
100 mm
f 30
Fig. 1
[3862]-137 3 P.T.O.
3. (a) Compare the weights of equal length of hollow shaft and solid
shaft to transmit a given torque for the same maximum shear
stress. The material for both the shafts is same and inside
diameter is 2/3rd of outside diameter for hollow shaft. [6]
(b) A standard splined connection of 8 52 60 mm is used
for the gear and shaft assembly of gearbox, 20 kW power
at 300 r.p.m. is transmitted by the splines. The normal pressure
on splines is limited to 6.5 N/mm
2
. Coefficient of friction is
0.06. Calculate the length of hub of the bear and force
required. [10]
Or
4. (a) Write a short note on protected type flange coupling. [6]
(b) Along with a neat sketch state the design procedure for rigid
type flange coupling. [10]
[3862]-137 4
5. (a) Derive the expression for the torque requirement for tightening
of bolt. [6]
(b) A bracket shown in fig. is fixed to the support by means
of three bolts. The dimensions given in Fig. 2 are in mm.
The bolts are made of plain carbon steel 45C8. (S
yt
= 380
N/mm
2
) factor of safety is 2.5, assume d = d
c
/0.84. [10]
250
7500 N
2 Bolts (2, 3)
25
175
25
1 Bolt (1)
Fig. 2
[3862]-137 5 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) A Fig. 3 shows the welded joints subjected to an eccentric
load of 25 kN. The welding is on only one side. Permissiable
shear stress is 55 MPa. Determine the weld size. [10]
(b) Write a short note on welded joints subjected to torsional
load. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain various types of screw threads along with
applications. [6]
(b) The following data is given for a screw jack :
(1) Nominal diameter of the shaft of screw : 40 mm
100
150
100
25 kN
Fig. 3
[3862]-137 6
(2) Pitch of square threads : 7 mm
(3) Coefficient of thread friction : 0.15
(4) Coefficient of collar friction : 0.1
(5) Effective mean diameter of collar : 70 mm.
The operator can comfortably exert a force of 150 N at radius
of 1.2 m to raise the load. Assuming single start threads,
calculate the maximum load can be lifted, the efficiency of
the screw and the overall efficiency. [10]
Or
8. A power screw having double start square threads of 25 mm nominal
diameter and 5 mm pitch is acted upon by an axial load of
10 kN. The collar outer and inner are 50 mm and 20 mm respectively.
The coefficient of friction of thread and collar friction is 0.22 and
0.15 respectively. The screw rotates at 12 r.p.m. Assuming uniform
wear condition at the collar and allowable bearing pressure of
5.5 N/mm
2
, find the torque required to rotate the screw and stresses
in the screw and height of nut. [16]
[3862]-137 7 P.T.O.
9. (a) Write a short note on Wahl stress factor. [4]
(b) Design a helical compression spring for a maximum load of
1200 N for deflection of 25 mm using the value of spring
index as 5. Assume maximum permissible shear stress for spring
material as 400 N/mm
2
, Modulus of rigidity can be assumed
as 85 GN/m
2
. [12]
Or
10. A valve spring of I.C. Engine is designed as the following details :
(1) Spring load 80 N when the valve is closed.
(2) Spring load 105 N when valve is open.
(3) Inside guide bush diameter 25 mm.
(4) Outside recesses diameter 35 mm.
(5) Valve lift 5 mm.
(6) Permissible shear stress 350 MPa.
(7) Modulus of Rigidity 80 GPa.
Assume the spring ends are square ground determine wire diameter,
spring index, total number of coils, solid length and free
length. [16]
[3862]-137 8
11. (a) Explain along with suitable example role of Ergonomics in
Design Engg. [6]
(b) Write a short note on Morgans color Code. [6]
(c) Explain the aesthetics design principles. [6]
Or
12. (a) Write a short note on design for manufacturing (DFM). [6]
(b) What are the guidelines followed in design of the parts for
the following processes :
(1) Casting
(2) Forging
(3) Welding
(4) Powder metallurgy. [12]
[3862]-138
S.E. (Production) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
INDUSTRIAL ORGANISATION AND MANAGEMENT
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer any three questions from Section I and any three
questions from Section II.
answer-books.
(iii) Use of calculator is allowed.
(v) Answer one question from 1 & 2, 3 & 4, 5 & 6, 7
& 8, 9 & 10, 11 & 12.
SECTION I
1. (a) Define Organization. Explain functions of organization. [8]
(b) What do you mean by joint stock company ? Discuss types,
advantages and limitations. [8]
Or
2. (a) Define Co-operative Organization. State objectives, advantages
and limitations of co-operative enterprises. [8]
(b) Explain project organization with advantages and
disadvantages. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-138 2
3. (a) Discuss styles of leadership. Which one is preferable and
why ? [8]
(b) Explain Vrooms expectancy theory of motivation. [8]
Or
4. (a) Define Group Dynamics. Discuss various types of groups. [8]
(b) Explain Maslows theory of need hierarchy. Compare it with
Herzbergs two factor theory. [8]
5. (a) Discuss any four sources of finance for an entrepreneur. [9]
(b) Explain the following in break-even analysis with chart : [9]
(i) Break-even point
(ii) Margin of safety
(iii) Angle of incidence
Or
6. (a) What does bank look for in a business plan ? When does
a bank reject a business plan ? [9]
(b) Define entrepreneur, entrepreneurship. Explain various qualities
of an entrepreneur. [9]
SECTION II
7. (a) Discuss the major factors that influence the buyer
behaviour. [8]
(b) Describe various stages of product life cycle. [8]
[3862]-138 3 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) Explain various steps in marketing research. [8]
(b) Explain various brand development strategies. [8]
9. (a) Define human resource management. Explain its objectives. [8]
(b) Explain sources of recruitment with advantages and
limitations. [8]
Or
10. (a) List and explain various functions of human resource
management. [8]
(b) Define Selection. Explain steps in selection procedure. [8]
11. (a) Define the term Worker and discuss briefly the provisions relating
to the welfare of worker under Factories Act 1948. [8]
(b) List and explain any two merit-rating methods. [6]
(c) Explain Halsey Plan for payment of wages. [4]
Or
12. (a) Define wage. Discuss imposition of fine and penalty under the
Payment of Wages Act 1936. [8]
(b) Explain various steps in job evolution process. [6]
(c) Explain Rowan plan for payment of wages. [4]
[3862]-139 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-139
S.E. (Prod. S/W) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MANUFACTURING PROCESS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
UNIT I
1. (a) What are the main constituents of moulding sand ? How are
binders classified ? Name few binders of each type. [6]
(b) Write short notes on the following : [4]
(i) Use of padding
(ii) Use of exothermic materials.
[3862]-139 2
(c) What is centrifuging ? Describe the process with neat
sketch, stating differences with other centrifugal casting
methods. [8]
Or
2. (a) Sketch a cross-section through a complete mould and label
it properly. Describe the following terms related to it : [6]
(i) Pattern
(ii) Riser
(iii) Flask
(iv) Gate
(v) Vent
(vi) Parting line.
(b) What is moulding machine ? What main function does it
perform ? Explain with a neat sketch sand slinger. [6]
(c) What are chapletes ? Why are they used ? Sketch and
describe various types of chapletes. [6]
UNIT II
3. (a) State the advantages and limitations of cold working process
and hot working process. [6]
(b) Compare a forged part with cast part in relation to
mechanical properties. [4]
[3862]-139 3 P.T.O.
(c) Identify and name few components made by spinning
process. Describe cold spinning process in short with neat
sketch. [6]
Or
4. (a) List few components made by extrusion process. Describe
indirect extrusion process in short with neat sketch. [6]
(b) Explain with neat sketch the working of Board drop
hammer. [6]
(c) What are different rolling defects produced in the rolling
process ? Discuss in short. [4]
UNIT III
5. (a) State the principle and working of resistance welding
process. Explain with a neat sketch the Resistance
projection welding . [6]
(i) Adhesive bonding
(ii) Gas flames used in gas welding.
(c) State only advantages and disadvantages of submerged arc
welding process and state the area of application of this
process. [4]
[3862]-139 4
Or
6. (a) Differentiate between soldering and brazing. [4]
(b) Write advantages, limitations and area of application of the
following processes : [9]
(i) Ultrasonic welding
(ii) Electron beam welding
(iii) Explosive welding.
(c) Explain the following welding defects : [3]
(i) Lack of fusion
(ii) Slag
(iii) Lack of penetration.
SECTION II
UNIT IV
7. (a) Draw three view of single-point cutting tool, showing
different angles. What is tool designation ? [6]
(b) Write short notes on the following : [6]
(i) Lathe spindle
(ii) Lathe carriage
(iii) Tumbler gears.
[3862]-139 5 P.T.O.
(c) A hallow work-piece of 75 mm outside diameter and
160 mm length is held on mandrel between centres and
turned all over. Calculate the machining time for turning
by using the following data : [6]
Approach length = 20 mm
Overtravel = 15 mm
Average feed = 0.6 mm/rev
Cutting speed = 30 m/min
No. of passes = 5.
Or
8. (a) Describe the following lathe operations with neat sketch : [6]
(i) Facing
(ii) Knurling
(iii) Parting off.
(b) What do you understand by thread catching ? Why is it
necessary ? [4]
(c) What is taper ? State different taper turning processes
used for production of taper on job. Describe tailstock set
over method for producing taper with sketch. [8]
[3862]-139 6
UNIT V
9. (a) List out various types of drills. Draw a neat sketch of
twist drill and show its elements and angles. [6]
(b) Index 87 divisions by compound indexing method, the hole
circles available are : [6]
Plate I : 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20
Plate II : 21, 23, 27, 29, 31, 33
Plate III : 37, 39, 41, 43, 47, 49.
(c) Compare sensitive drilling machine with radial drilling
machine. [4]
Or
10. (a) Explain the terms cutting speed, feed and depth of cut to
drilling operation. [4]
(b) Explain with neat sketch the following milling operation : [6]
(i) Stradle milling
(ii) Angular milling
(iii) Face milling.
(c) Draw block diagram of planer type milling machine and
describe it. [6]
[3862]-139 7 P.T.O.
UNIT VI
11. (a) Explain the following bond in grinding, stating merits and
demerits : [6]
(i) Vitrified bond
(ii) Silicate bond.
(b) Why truing and dressing are necessary in grinding wheel ?
Describe any one method of dressing abrasive wheel. [6]
(c) What are the advantages of centreless grinding over centre
type grinding ? [4]
Or
12. (a) State necessity of finishing methods. Name the finishing methods.
What do you mean by micro-finishing processes ? [6]
(b) What are the common shapes used in grinding work ?
Sketch and describe in brief (any four). [6]
(c) What are the merits and demerits of grinding as compared
to other machining operations ? [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-140
S.E. (Production S/W) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING AND
METROLOGY PRACTICES
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(iii) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic
(v) All questions are compulsory.
SECTION I
1. (a) Calculate the cutting speed in meters per minute if spindle
speed of a 19.05 mm drill is 400 rpm. [2]
(b) During turning a steel rod of diameter 160 mm at speed
560 rpm, feed 0.32 mm/rev and depth of cut 4.0 mm by a
ceramic insert of geometry :
0, 10, 6, 6, 15, 75, 0 (mm).
[3862]-140 2
The following were observed :
P
Z
= 1600 N, P
X
= 800 N and chip thickness = 1 mm.
Determine with the help of Merchants circle diagram the possible
values of :
(i) F Friction force at chip tool interface
(ii) N Force normal to rake face
(iii) m
a
Apparant coefficient of friction at chip tool interface
(iv) P
s
Shear force
(v) P
n
Force normal to shear force
(vi) Cutting Power
(vii) Specific energy consumption. [14]
Or
(a) Define Machinability. Explain effects of the following on
Machinability :
(i) Tool Rake Angle(s)
(ii) Cutting Angles
(iii) Clearance Angles
(iv) Nose Radius. [8]
[3862]-140 3 P.T.O.
(b) If in turning of a steel rod by given cutting tool (material
and geometry) at a given machining condition (S
0
and t) under
given environment of cutting fluid application, the tool life
decreases from 80 min to 20 min, due to increase in cutting
velocity (V
C
) from 60 m/min to 120 m/min. Then at what cutting
velocity the life of that tool under same condition and environment
will be 40 min ?
S
0
feed, tdepth of cut. [8]
2. (a) Explain with the help of neat sketch, what is the difference
between turret and capstan lathe ? [10]
(b) Explain the need of transfer line from manufacturing point
of view. [6]
Or
With the help of neat sketch, explain principle of operation, kinematic
system, types of tools and jobs, applications for :
(i) Shaping machine
(ii) Planing machine
(iii) Slotting machine. [16]
[3862]-140 4
3. (a) Draw a neat sketch of pull type broach used for finishing
holes and show the following terminologies in sketch :
(i) Pull End
(ii) Neck
(iii) Front Pilot
(iv) Cutting teeth
(v) Finishing teeth
(vi) Rear Pilot. [6]
(b) Draw a typical sketch demonstrating geometry of teeth of Broaching
tools. What are the effects of rake angle and clearance angle
on Broaching operation ? [8]
(c) What type of materials are used for Broach ? Which are the
desired material properties ? [4]
Or
(a) Draw a neat sketch of dies for manufacturing external screw
threads :
(i) Split die
(ii) Spring die
(iii) Pipe die. [6]
(b) Explain Gear Manufacturing process by Gear Hobbing and Gear
Grinding. [12]
[3862]-140 5 P.T.O.
SECTION II
4. (a) Explain the following terminologies for Numerical Control :
(i) Manual Data Input (MDI)
(ii) G-code programming
(iii) Fixed canned cycles. [12]
(b) Explain advantages of CNC over NC. [4]
Or
(a) For machining centres explain the following :
(i) Automatic tool changers
(ii) Automatic pallet changers. [8]
(b) A flexible manufacturing system is a computer controlled machining
arrangement that can perform a variety of continuous metal-
cutting operations on range of components without manual
intervention. Explain. [8]
5. (a) A circular Bank of 30 mm diameter is to be cut from 2 mm
thick 0.1 C steel sheet. Determine the die and punch sizes.
Also estimate punch force and stripping force needed. Assume
the following for steel :
Tensile strength : 410 MPa, Shear strength : 310 MPa. [8]
[3862]-140 6
(b) Explain with suitable sketch drawing operation with a
mathematical expression for Blank size and Drawing
force. [8]
Or
(a) Explain clearance between, die and punch for Blanking and
Piercing operation. [8]
(i) Inverted Die
(ii) Compound Die. [8]
6. Explain the following elements of jigs and fixtures : [18]
(i) Locating elements
(ii) Supporting surfaces and Base
(iii) Clamping elements
(iv) Tool guiding frame and bushes for jig
(v) Indexing systems
(vi) Auxiliary elements.
[3862]-140 7 P.T.O.
Or
Explain the following for Drill Jig Bushing : [18]
(i) Factors considered for designing jig
(ii) Types of jig bushes :
(a) Without head
(b) With head
(c) Flange
(d) Using eccentric bush.
[3862]-141
S.E. (Prod/SW) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
PRODUCTION AND INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENTI
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(vi) All questions are compulsory.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain contribution of F.W. Taylor in the field of management. [8]
(b) Define organisation. Explain the principles of organisation. Draw
any one organisation chart. [8]
Or
(a) Discuss the contribution of H. Fayol in the field of management. [8]
(b) List various forms of business ownerships and explain joint stock
company with its advantages and disadvantages. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-141 2
2. (a) Define Plant Layout. Which are the characteristics of good
plant layout ? [8]
(b) Define production planning and control. Discuss in brief various
functions of it. [10]
OrOr
(a) Define the term production. List out any seven characteristics
of mass production. [8]
(b) What is process planning ? What is its importance ? [4]
(c) Define maintenance. Mention various types of maintenance and
differentiate between them. [6]
3. (a) Explain and construct two handed process chart to record the
activities performed by an operator working on Xerox machine. [8]
(b) Explain micro-motion study. How is it carried out ? What are
the various symbols used in it ? [8]
Or
(a) Explain the concept and significance of the following in developing
new improved methods : [8]
(i) Primary questions
(ii) Secondary questions.
(b) Define Ergonomics. State its objectives. Explain the effect of
working conditions on human performance. [8]
[3862]-141 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
4. (a) Explain various types of allowances that are considered in calculation
of standard time. [8]
(b) Explain MTM in detail. [8]
Or
(a) Write short notes on :
(i) Stopwatch time study
(ii) Standard data. [8]
(b) What are work elements ? Explain various types of work elements
with suitable example. [8]
5. (a) Define motivation. Explain various non-financial motivation
techniques to motivate the employees. [8]
(b) Discuss various styles of leadership. [8]
Or
(a) Discuss the qualities of successful entrepreneur. [8]
(b) Discuss any two motivational theories. [8]
(a) Training and development
(b) Job evaluation
(c) Sources of finance.
[3862]-141 4
Or
(a) Explain how we can calculate selling price of product by considering
various expenses incurred. [6]
(b) Explain :
(i) Recruitment procedure
(ii) Merit rating. [6]
(c) A toy manufactures a doll and sells it for Rs. 25 per item.
Fixed cost is Rs. 1,20,000 and variable cost is Rs. 15/unit.
Calculate :
(i) The number of units for no profit-no loss condition. [3]
(ii) The number of units to be produced to have a profit of
Rs. 24,000. [3]
[3862]-151
S.E. (Electrical) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
POWER PLANT ENGINEERING
(2008 COURSE)
(ii) Use separate answer-book for each Section.
(iii) Use of steam tables, Mollier charts and electronic calculators
is allowed.
SECTION I
(Unit 1)
1. (a) Explain with neat sketch pulverised bed combustion system. [8]
(b) Define :
(i) HCV of fuel
(ii) Stoichiometric A : F ratio
(iii) Actual A : F ratio. [6]
(c) Differentiate between mass fraction and mole fraction. [4]
Or
2. (a) In a Rankine cycle, the steam at inlet to turbine is saturated
at a pressure of 35 bar and the exhaust pressure is 0.2 bar.
Mass flow rate is 9.5 kg/sec. Determine :
(i) Pump work
P.T.O.
[3862]-151 2
(ii) Turbine work
(iii) Rankine efficiency
(iv) Condenser heat flow
(v) Dryness at the end of expansion. [10]
(b) Name the apparatus used for measurement of C.V. of
gaseous fuels and discuss its working with the help of neat
sketch. [8]
Unit 2
3. (a) How boilers are classified ? Compare the fire tube boiler and
water tube boiler. [6]
(b) Explain with neat sketch working of Jet Condenser. [6]
(c) Explain with a neat sketch working of air preheater. [4]
Or
4. (a) What is boiler draught ? Explain natural and artificial draught
with sketches. [6]
(b) Explain any three methods of coal transferring with neat
sketches. [6]
(c) Explain with neat sketch Pneumatic Ash Handling System. [4]
Unit 3
5. (a) Draw the schematic layout of hydroelectric power plant and
discuss the functions of each components and operation of
plant. [8]
[3862]-151 3 P.T.O.
(b) Explain working of surge tank and give its classification with
neat sketch. [8]
Or
6. (a) Explain different methods of governing mechanisms of a Francis
Turbine. [6]
(b) What is Hydrograph ? Explain with a neat sketch. [4]
(c) What is spillway ? Discuss various types of spillways in
brief. [6]
SECTION II
Unit 4
7. (a) Explain BWR with a neat sketch. [6]
(b) Discuss the site selection criteria for Nuclear power plants
and explain Nuclear Fission. [6]
(c) Explain with neat sketch wet sump lubrication system. [6]
Or
8. (a) Explain CANDU reactor power plant. [6]
(b) State advantages and disadvantages of Diesel Power plant. State
the applications of Diesel Power plants. [6]
(c) Write a short note on Nuclear Waste Disposal. [6]
Unit 5
9. (a) Compare Gas turbine with I.C. Engine. [6]
(b) Discuss the operation of intercoolers and regenerators used
in gas turbine with a neat sketch. [6]
(c) Explain fuels for gas turbine power plants. [4]
[3862]-151 4
Or
10. (a) Write a short note on materials used for different parts of
a gas turbine. [8]
(b) Explain prospects and development of non-conventional power
plants in India. [4]
(c) Write a short note on tidal power generation. [4]
Unit 6
10. (a) Discuss the various fixed charages and running charges which
are used for calculation of cost of electrical energy. [8]
(b) What are base load and peak load plants ? Explain the methods
by which economic load sharing between base load and peak
load plants can be determined. [8]
Or
12. (a) Find the cost of power generation per kWh for the following
data :
Capacity of plant 150 MW
Capital cost = Rs. 25,000 per kW installed
Interest and depreciation = 10% on capital
Fuel consumption = 1.5 kg/kWh
Fuel cost = Rs. 400 per tonne
Salaries, wages and maintenance = Rs. 150 10
6
per year
Max. demand = 120 MW
Load factor = 50%. [8]
(b) Explain :
(i) Input-output curve
(ii) Heat rate and incremental rate curve. [8]
[3862]-152
S.E. (Electrical) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MATERIAL SCIENCE
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(iv) You are advised to attempt not more than 6 questions.
Physical Constants :
(1) Angstrom Unit (AU) = 10
10
metres.
(2) Avogadros number (N
A
) = 6.0254 10
23
/gram molecule.
(3) Boltzmanns constant (k) = 1.380 10
23
Joule degree
1
.
(4) Dielectric constant of free space
0
( ) = 8.85 10
12
Faradmetre
1
.
(5) Charge on electron (e) = 1.601 10
19
Coulomb.
(6) Mass of electron (m) = 9.107 10
31
kg.
(7) Electron volt (eV) = 1.602 10
19
Joules.
(8) Permeability of free space (
0
) = 4 10
7
.
(9) Mass of proton (m
) = 1.627 10
27
kg.
(10) Velocity of light (C) = 2.998 10
8
metre second
1
.
(11) Debye unit = 3.33 10
30
Coulomb-metre.
P.T.O.
[3862]-152 2
SECTION I
1. (a) Differentiate between photo-conductive and photo-emissive
cells. [8]
(b) Describe polarization process in detail. Why and how does it
occur ? [8]
Or
2. (a) Write different materials used for photovoltaic material. Describe
its construction and working principle. [8]
(b) Explain ionic polarization in detail. How is it different from
oriental polarization ? [8]
3. Write down properties or applications of Paper Press Board, Fibrous
Materials, Ceramics, Asbestos, Varnish, Askarel Insulating Gases like
Air and SF6. [16]
Or
4. (a) Describe insulating materials used in switchgears and line
insulators. [8]
(b) Describe between :
(i) Breakdown voltage and breakdown strength. [4]
(ii) Primary ionization and secondary ionization. [4]
5. (a) Explain Spontaneous Magnetization and Curie-Weiss law. [9]
(b) Write a short note on Magnetic Recording Materials and Compact
Discs. [9]
[3862]-152 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Differentiate between :
(i) Permeability and Magnetic susceptibility. [4]
(ii) Soft and hard magnetic materials. [5]
(b) Describe properties and applications of paramagnetic materials. [9]
SECTION II
7. Write down properties or applications of Constantan, Nickel-Chromium
Alloy, Tungsten, Canthal, Silver, Copper Alloys, Tungsten and
Carbon. [16]
Or
8. Describe Lamp Filaments, Solders, Thermal Bimetal and
Thermocouple. [6]
9. With neat diagrams describe :
(i) Carbon Nano-structures and Carbon Molecules. [4]
(ii) Carbon Clusters [4]
(iii) Carbon Nano-tubes [4]
(iv) Nano wires. [4]
Or
10. (a) Write down applications of Carbon Nano-tubes and BN nano-
tubes. [8]
(b) What do you mean by Single Electron Transistor, Molecular
Machines ? [8]
[3862]-152 4
11. (a) How will you test transformer oil ? Explain with a neat diagram
of test set up. [9]
(b) Describe any three tests on cable. [9]
Or
12. (a) Explain measurement of Tangent of Dielectric Loss Angle
(tan
d
) by Schering Bridge as per IS 13585-1994. [9]
(b) Describe measurement of Dielectric strength of solid insulating
material with reference to IS 2584. [9]
[3862]-153 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-153
S.E. (Electrical) (First Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
ANALOG AND DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain input-output characteristics of CE configuration with
neat connection diagram and characteristic curve. [10]
(b) Explain AC-DC load line analysis using common emitter
configuration. [8]
Or
2. (a) Draw and explain multistage amplifier. Also state advantages
and applications. [6]
[3862]-153 2
(b) Define the following terms associated with FET :
(i) Transconduction
(ii) Amplification factor. [4]
(c) What is significance of transfer and drain characteristics of
FET ? Draw and explain. [8]
3. (a) Explain with neat diagram Schmitt trigger as an application
of op-amp. [8]
(b) Explain grounded type load voltage to current converter. [8]
Or
4. (a) What is the role of op-amp as an instrumentation amplifier ?
Explain 3-op-amp instrumentation amplifier. [8]
(b) Explain open loop and close loop configuration of op-amp. [8]
5. (a) Draw and explain monostable multivibrator. Also state
applications. [8]
(b) Using LM317 explain variable voltage regulator with neat
diagram. [8]
Or
6. (a) Explain sine wave generator using op-amp. Draw output
w/fs. [8]
(b) Explain with neat connection diagram low pass filter. [8]
[3862]-153 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) Convert the following numbers into equivalent BCD : [6]
(i) (11011011)
2
(ii) (333)
8
(iii) (DB)
16
(b) State De Morgans theorem and using Boolean algebra prove
the following : [6]
(A B) (A B D) D BD + + + = .
(c) Explain Excess-3 code in detail. [6]
Or
8. (a) If
(4, 5, 6, 7, 8,12) (1, 2, 3, 9,13,14) f m d = +
using K-map reduce expression and realise using logic gates. [6]
(b) Explain binary number system in detail. Also give the difference
between binary number system and BCD. [6]
(c) Design 1-bit comparator using K-map and realise it using logic
gates. [6]
9. (a) Explain J-K flip-flop in detail with input and output wave-
forms. Also give the functions of preset and clear pin. [8]
(b) Design and explain MOD 5 asynchronous counter with related
timing diagram. [8]
[3862]-153 4
Or
10. (a) Design 3-bit synchronous up counter using J-K flip-flops and
K-map. [8]
(b) Explain edge triggered and level triggered flip-flops. Also explain
D-flip-flop in detail. [8]
11. (a) Explain 1 : 4 demultiplexer along with logic diagram and truth
table. [8]
(b) Explain dual slope ADC in detail. [8]
Or
(i) Static RAM
(ii) Dynamic RAM
(iii) EPROM
(iv) EEPROM.
[3862]-154 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-154
S.E. (Electrical) (First Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is meant by static and dynamic characteristics of measuring
instruments ?
Explain : Accuracy, resolution, drift. [8]
(b) Describe construction and working of PMMC instrument with
suitable diagram. Derive its torque equation with usual
notations. [10]
Or
2. (a) Give detailed classification of measuring instruments. Elaborate
each type in brief. [8]
(b) (i) The inductance of moving iron ammeter with a full scale
deflection of 90 at 1.5 amp is given by the expression
L = 180 + 40 4
2

3
H, where is deflection
in radian from zero position. Calculate spring constant. [4]
(ii) With a neat sketch, explain construction and working of
moving iron instrument. What are the advantages of this
instrument ? [6]
[3862]-154 2
3. (a) Give classification of resistance. Give suitable method of
measurement for each category. [6]
(b) What are the different detectors used in a.c. bridges ? Elaborate
each type in brief. Derive the general equation for bridge
balance. [6]
(c) A length of cable is tested for insulation resistance by loss
of charge method. An electrostatic voltmeter of infinite resistance
is connected between cable conductor and earth forming a joint
capacitance of 750 pF. It is observed that after charging, the
voltage falls from 250 volt to 92 volt in 1 minute. Calculate
the insulation resistance of cable. [4]
Or
4. (a) Draw circuit diagram of Kelvins double bridge. Derive expression
for unknown resistance with usual notations. [6]
(b) With a circuit diagram derive the equation for unknown capacitance
measurement using Schering bridge. [6]
(c) The arms of Andersons bridge are as follows :
arm AB : Unknown impedance with R
1
, L
1
in series with
variable resistor r
1
arm BC : Pure resistance R
3
= 100 W
arm CD : Pure resistance R
4
= 200 W
arm DA : Pure resistance R
2
= 250 W
arm DE : Variable pure resistance r
arm EC : A loss free capacitor C = 1 F
arm BE : A detector.
a.c. supply is connected between terminal A and C. Calculate
resistance and inductance R
1
, L
1
, if r
1
= 43.1 W and r =
229.7 W under balance condition. [4]
[3862]-154 3 P.T.O.
5. (a) State and explain errors in dynamometer type wattmeter. Also
state the compensation for each type of error. [6]
(b) Two wattmeter method is used to measure power of three
phase star connected lamp bank at balanced load condition.
The phase voltage is
200 / 3
volt and line current is 5.5 amp.
What will be the reading of each wattmeter ? If now load
is connected in delta across same supply, what will be the
reading of each wattmeter ? [6]
(c) Draw block diagram of multimeter. [4]
Or
6. (a) With a block diagram explain working of digital frequency meter. [6]
(b) With circuit diagram and phasor diagram explain one wattmeter
method for measurement of reactive power in (R + L)
load. [6]
(c) Write a short note on LPF type wattmeter. [4]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain two element energy meter with neat diagram. [8]
(b) An energy meter is designed to make 3200 impulses of LED
for one unit of energy. Calculate the no. of impulses made
by it when connected to a load carrying 20A, 230V, 0.8 p.f.
for an hour. If it actually makes 12000 impulses, find the
% error. [4]
(c) Define the following terms associated with instrument transformer :
(i) Transformation ratio
(ii) Turns ratio
(iii) Nominal ratio. [6]
Or
8. (a) Explain construction and operation of single phase induction
type energy meter with neat diagram. Derive torque equation. [12]
[3862]-154 4
(b) A 230 V, single phase energy meter is connected to a constant
load of 6 A, unity power factor for 8 hours.
(i) If the impulses made during this are 35328, what is meter
constant in imp/kWh.
(ii) Calculate the power factor of load if no. of impulses
made by LED are 31795 when operating at 230 V, 9A
for 6 hours. [6]
9. (a) What are different selection factors for selecting transducers. [4]
(b) In an experiment, the voltage across 5 kW resistor is applied
to C.R.O. The screen shows a sinusoidal signal of total vertical
occupancy 4 cm and total horizontal occupancy of 2 cm. The
front panel controls volts/div and time/div are on 5 V/div and
5 ms/div respectively. Calculate the maximum, rms values of
voltage across resistance and current through resistance. Also
find its frequency. [6]
(c) Explain Pirani guage for measurement of low pressure. Also
state advantages and disadvantages. [6]
Or
10. (a) What are the advantages of electric transducer ? [4]
(b) Explain the following terms associated with CRO :
(i) Volts/division
(ii) X10
(iii) Invert. [6]
(c) Explain different characteristics of transducer. [6]
11. (a) Explain ultrasonic flowmeter with neat diagram. [8]
(b) Explain construction and working of LVDT with neat diagram. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain hydraulic method for measurement of level. [8]
(b) Explain foil strain guage. [8]
[3862]-155 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-155
S.E. (Electrical Engineering) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
POWER SYSTEMI
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer any three questions from Section I and three
questions from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What are the economical advantages of interconnected operation
of power generating stations ? [6]
(b) Write a short note on time of day tariff. [4]
(c) A generating station supplies different customer groups :
Industrial customer : 700 MW load
Commercial customer : 300 MW load
Domestic customer : 200 MW load.
[3862]-155 2
The maximum demand on the station is 1000 MW and number
of kWh generated per year is 50 10
5
. Determine :
(i) Diversity factor
(ii) Average load
(iii) Annual load factor. [6]
Or
2. (a) Define the following factors associated with generating stations :
(i) Load factor
(ii) Demand factor
(iii) Diversity factor. [6]
(b) Write a short note on H.T. and L.T. customers. [4]
(c) The load on a power plant on a typical day is :
Time Load (MW)
126 am 10
610 am 30
10 am6 pm 60
610 pm 90
10 pm12 am 10
Plot daily load curve and load duration curve. Also find the
energy supplied by the plant in 24 hours. [6]
[3862]-155 3 P.T.O.
3. (a) What are the major electrical equipments used in a power
plant ? List them all. [6]
(b) Define the term string efficiency.
Why is string efficiency of suspension type insulators less than
100% ? State different methods of equalization of potential
across each unit of a string of suspension insulators and explain
any one of them in brief. [10]
Or
4. (a) Write a note on control room equipments in a generating
station. [8]
(b) A string of suspension insulators consists of four units. The
capacitance between each link pin and earth is 1/10th of the
self-capacitance of a unit. The voltage between the line conductor
and earth is 100 kV. Find the voltage distribution across each
unit and string efficiency. [8]
5. (a) Write a short note on skin effect. [6]
(b) Derive an expression for the inductance of a three phase overhead
transmission line when conductors are unsymmetrically spaced
but transposed. [6]
(c) In a horizontal configuration of a three phase three wire system,
conductors are arranged in one plane and are 4 m apart. The
conductor diameter is 2 cm. Considering the length of the
line to be 80 km, find the total inductance of the line. Assume
complete transposition. [6]
[3862]-155 4
Or
6. (a) Derive the expression for internal and external flux linkage
of a conductor carrying current I and thereafter derive the
expression for inductance of a single phase line. [10]
(b) A three phase single circuit bundled conductor line with two
sub-conductors per phase has horizontal spacing with 6.1 m
between the centre lines of adjacent phases. The distance between
the sub-conductors of each phase is 30.5 cm and each sub-
conductor has a diameter of 2.54 cm. Find the inductance per
phase per km. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive the equation for capacitance per km of a single phase
overhead transmission line having distance D between the
conductors and r as the radius of each conductor. [6]
(b) Explain the Method of Images in determining the effect of
earth on the capacitance calculation for overhead transmission
lines. [6]
(c) A 132 kV, 50 Hz, 100 km long three phase line has its conductors
at the corners of a triangle with sides 6 m, 6 m and 10 m.
The conductor radius is 1.5 cm. Find the capacitance per phase
per km and charging current per phase. [6]
[3862]-155 5 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) Derive the expression for the capacitance per phase of a three
phase overhead transmission line with unsymmetrical spacing
of conductors, taking into account the effect of earth. Assume
complete transposition. Comment on the effect of earth on
the capacitance of the transmission line. [10]
(b) A single phase 10 km line is 6 m above the ground. The
diameter of each conductor is 2 cm and is separated 4 m
horizontally. Find :
(i) Capacitance between the conductors with the effect of
ground.
(ii) Capacitance between phase and neutral taking the presence
of ground into account.
(iii) Capacitance between the conductors neglecting the presence
of ground.
(iv) Charging current when the line is charged at 33 kV,
50 Hz. [8]
9. (a) Give classification of transmission line. [4]
(b) Derive the expression for parameters of equivalent Tee circuit
in terms of line parameters for a long transmission line. [6]
[3862]-155 6
(c) The following data refers to a 50 Hz, single phase transmission
line, length 20 km.
Load delivered at receiving end is 4 MW at 0.8 p.f. lagging.
Resistance of each conductor = 0.025 W/km.
Inductance = 0.7 mH/km.
The voltage at the receiving end is required to be kept at
10 kV. Find the sending end voltage. [6]
Or
10. (a) Express the relationship for the sending end voltage and current
in terms of receiving end voltage and current for a medium
length transmission line with nominal pi method of representation.
Evaluate the generalised circuit constants. [8]
(b) A single circuit, 50 Hz, three phase, 250 km long transmission
line has r = 0.3 W/km, L = 2.1 mH/km and C = 0.014
F/km. Find A, B, C and D constants of the line using long
line consideration. [8]
11. (a) Derive expression for maximum and minimum dielectric stress
in a single core cable. [8]
(b) A transmission line has a span of 120 m between level supports.
The conductor has a cross-sectional area of 3 cm
2
. The tension
[3862]-155 7 P.T.O.
in the conductor is 2000 kg. If the specific gravity of the
conductor is 9.9 gm/cm
3
and wind pressure is 1.5 kg/m length,
calculate the sag. Also calculate the vertical sag. [8]
Or
12. (a) Derive an expression for sag in case of an overhead transmission
line if the supports are at unequal level. [8]
(b) The capacitances of a three-core belted type cable are measured
as detailed below :
(i) Between three cores bunched together and sheath is
10 F.
(ii) Between a conductor and the other two connected to
sheath together is 8 F.
Calculate the capacitance per phase. Also find the charging
current when connected to 33 kV, 50 Hz supply. [8]
[3862]-156 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-156
S.E. (Electrical) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
ELECTRICAL MACHINESI
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What are the losses present in the transformer and their locations ?
How will you separate hysteresis and eddy current losses from
the knowledge of iron losses of a transformer ? [8]
(b) A 250 kVA, 1-f transformer has 98.135% efficiency at full-
load and 0.8 lagging p.f. The efficiency at half-load and
0.8 lagging p.f. is 97.751%. Calculate the iron loss and full-
load copper loss. [8]
Or
2. (a) What is an Auto-transformer ? Obtain the expression for saving
of copper used in Auto-transformer as compared to simillar
two winding transformer. [8]
[3862]-156 2
(b) The open circuit and short circuit tests on a 5 KVA,
250/125 V, 50 Hz, 1-f transformer gave the following
results :
O.C. Test : 250 V, 0.7 Amp, 90 Watt (HV side)
S.C. test : 12 V, 30 Amp, 90 Watt (LV side)
Calculate :
(i) Full-load efficiency and
(ii) The voltage on LV side when supplying full-load current
both at 0.8 leading p.f. [8]
3. (a) What are the conditions to be satisfied for parallel operation ?
Explain the load sharing for equal voltage ratio. [8]
(b) Two 1-f transformers A and B rated at 250 KVA each are
operated on both sides percentage impedances for A and B
are (1 + j 6) and (1.2 + j 4.8) respectively. Compute the load
shared by each when the total load is 500 kVA at 0.8 p.f.
lagging. [8]
Or
4. (a) Explain the V-V connection for a 3-f transformer for supplying
a 3-f balanced load at u.p.f. List advantages and disadvantages
of such connection. [8]
(b) Explain Scott connection to convert 3-ph supply to 2-ph
supply. [8]
5. (a) Explain the construction of DC machine. [10]
(b) A DC shunt motor runs at a speed of 1,000 rpm on no load
taking a current of 6 Amp from supply, when connected
to 220 V dc supply. Its full-load current is 50 Amp.
Calculate its speed on full-load. Assume R
a
= 0.3 W and
R
sh
= 110 W. [8]
[3862]-156 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Show the power flow diagram of DC motor. [5]
(b) Obtain the torque equation of DC motor. [5]
(c) What is back e.m.f. ? Explain the significance of back e.m.f. [4]
(d) A 4-pole series motor has Z = 944, wave wound, flux/pole
= 34.6 mWb. Gross torque 209 N-m, supply voltage = 500 V
and R = 3 W. Calculate line current and speed. [4]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain the following terms : [8]
(i) Commutation
(ii) Time of commutation
(iii) Reactance voltage
(iv) Straight line commutation.
(b) Explain any two methods of speed control of a D.C. series
motor. [8]
Or
(i) Interpole
(ii) Compensating winding.
(b) Draw and explain the Torque-Armature Current, Speed-Current
and Torque-Speed characteristics of DC series motor. [8]
9. (a) A 4-pole, 3-phase induction motor operates from a supply whose
frequency is 50 Hz. Calculate :
(i) The speed at which the magnetic field of the stator is
rotating.
(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 0.04.
(iii) The frequency of the rotor currents when the slip
is 0.03.
(iv) The frequency of the rotor currents at standstill. [8]
[3862]-156 4
(b) Distinguish between squirrel cage and phase wound induction
motor. [8]
Or
10. (a) Derive the expression regarding 3-phase induction motor for
the following : [8]
(i)
Full load torque
Maximum torque
(ii)
Starting torque
Maximum torque
.
(b) A 746 kW, 3-phase, 50 Hz, 16 pole induction motor has a
rotor impedance of (0.02 + j 0.15) W at standstill. Full torque
is obtained at 360 r.p.m. Calculate :
(i) The ratio of maximum to full-load torque
(ii) The speed of maximum torque and
(iii) The rotor resistance to be added to get maximum starting
torque. [8]
11. (a) Draw and explain the exact and approximate equivalent circuit
diagram of Induction motor. [9]
(b) Why are starters necessary for starting 3-phase induction motor ?
Also write a short note on auto-transformer starter. [9]
Or
12. (a) Explain any two methods of speed control of a 3-phase Induction
Motor. [9]
(b) A 3-phase, 6-pole, 50 Hz induction motor takes 60 A at full-
load speed of 940 r.p.m. and develops a torque of 150 N-m.
The starting current at rated voltage is 300 A. What is the
starting torque ? If a star/delta starter is used, determine
the starting torque and starting current. [9]
[3862]-157
S.E. (Electrical) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
NETWORK ANALYSIS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
(i) Ideal and practical voltage sources
(ii) Ideal and practical current sources.
(b) Find voltage across capacitor V
C
using mesh analysis. [10]
Fig. 1
P.T.O.
[3862]-157 2
Or
(i) Circuits and networks
(ii) Passive and active networks
(iii) Linear and non-linear networks.
(b) Two coupled coils L
1
= 15 mH and L
2
= 25 mH are connected
in two different ways, series adding and series opposing. Obtain
equivalent inductances of the connections, if the coefficient of
coupling K = 0.8. [4]
(c) Find the current through dependent source and 12 W resistor.
Also find value of dependent source. Use node analysis. [6]
Fig. 2
3. (a) Find the voltage across r
L
using superposition theorem. [8]
Fig. 3
[3862]-157 3 P.T.O.
(b) Obtain current in 2 W resistor in the circuit by using Thevenins
theorem. [8]
Fig. 4
Or
4. (a) Show the validity of reciprocity theorem for the following
networks. [8]
and
Fig. 5
[3862]-157 4
(b) State and explain : [8]
(i) Substitution theorem
(ii) Compensation theorem.
5. (a) Obtain the expression for capacitor voltage in a RC series circuit
connected to a d.c. voltage V for t > 0. Assume initial charge
across capacitor as zero. Also sketch the response graph for
the current through capacitor and from the graph define time
constant of the circuit. [9]
(b) In the network, find the current through the inductor for all
values of t. [9]
Fig. 6
Or
6. (a) State all properties of Laplace transform. [4]
[3862]-157 5 P.T.O.
(b) Using Laplace transformation technique, find i
2
(t) at t = 0
+
, the
following switching at t = 0 of switch K in Fig. 7. Assume the
network previously de-energized. [10]
Fig. 7
(c) Define and explain impulse function. What is the its Laplace
transform ? State the relation between impulse and step
function. [4]
SECTION II
7. (a) Obtain the complex power of the sources. [6]
Fig. 8
[3862]-157 6
(b) What should be the value of R such that maximum power
transfer can take place for the network. Obtain the amount of
this power. [6]
Fig. 9.
(c) Explain cascade connection of two port network parameter using
transmission parameters. [4]
Or
8. (a) Explain hybrid parameters of two port network. Also obtain hybrid
parameters in the terms of impedance parameters. [8]
(b) Find Y parameters. [8]
Fig. 10
9. (a) State and explain the properties of Fourier transform. [8]
(b) Explain high pass filter with circuit, characteristics and cut-off
frequency. [8]
[3862]-157 7 P.T.O.
Or
10. (a) Find the Fourier series of single rectangular pulse as
shown below. [8]
Fig. 11
(i) Half-wave symmetry
(ii) Quarter wave symmetry
(iii) Odd symmetry
(iv) Even symmetry.
11. (a) For the network shown in Fig. 12, find the transfer functions
G
21
(s), Z
21
(s) and driving point impedance Z
11
(s). [9]
Fig. 12
[3862]-157 8
(b) The current I(s) in a network is given by : [9]
2
I( )
( 1) ( 2)
s
s
s s
=
+ +
.
Plot the poles and zeros in the s plane and hence obtain time
domain response.
Or
12. (a) For the network shown in Fig. 13, calculate : [12]
(i) Transfer functions G
21
(s), G
12
(s), Z
21
(s) and Y
21
(s)
(ii) Driving point impedance Z
11
(s)
Fig. 13
(b) Write short note on location of poles on s-plane and time domain
behaviour of the output. [6]
R
1
[3862]-158 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-158
S.E. (Electrical Engineering) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
DIGITAL COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUE
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) In Section I, attempt Q. 1 or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4,
Q. 5 or Q. 6. In Section II, attempt Q. 7 or Q. 8,
Q. 9 or Q. 10, Q. 11 or Q. 12.
books.
(v) Use of non-programmable electronic pocket calculator is
allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain truncation and round-off error with suitable example. [6]
(b) Use bisection method to find the roots of the equation
e
x
3x = 0, correct to three places of decimals. [6]
(c) The height of an observation tower was estimated to be 49 m,
whereas its actual height was 47 m. Calculate its absolute,
relative errors. [6]
[3862]-158 2
Or
2. (a) Use synthetic division with x = 1, to find f '(1) and f "(1) for
the equation :
3 2
F( ) 1.0001 0.9999 0 x x x x = - - + =
. [6]
(b) State and explain Descartes rule of sign. [6]
(c) Explain numerical instability. How can it be avoided ? [6]
3. (a) Explain Regula-Falsi method to find roots of a transcendental
equation ? What are the failure cases ? [8]
(b) Find the root of the equation x
4
+ 12x + 7 = 0, lying between
2 and 3 correct to 4 places of decimals, using Newton-Raphson
method. [8]
Or
4. (a) Find the quadratic factor x
2
+ px + q = 0 of the polynomial
x
4
3x
3
+ 20x
2
+ 44x + 54 = 0 using Lin-Bairstow method
and taking the initial values of p = 2 and q = 2. Perform
two iterations only. [8]
(b) Derive Chebyshev iterative formula to find the root of an
equation. [8]
5. (a) Explain Gauss-Seidel method to find the solution of simultaneous
equation. [8]
[3862]-158 3 P.T.O.
(b) Using Gauss-elimination method to solve the following system
of equation : [8]
8x
1
3x
2
+ 2x
3
= 20
4x
1
+ 11x
2
x
3
= 33
6x
1
+ 3x
2
+ 12x
3
= 36
Or
6. (a) Explain Gauss-Jacobi method for solution of simultaneous
equations. [8]
(b) Find A
1
, using Gauss-Jordan method if :
8 4 0
A 4 8 4
0 4 8
-

= - -

-

. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) R is the resistance to motion of a train at speed V. Find
a law of the type R = a + bV
2
using the following data : [8]
V (km/hr) R(km/hr)
10 8
20 10
30 15
40 21
50 30
[3862]-158 4
(b) Using Largranges formula find a polynomial using the following
data :
x y = f(x)
2 94.8
5 87.9
8 81.3
14 68.7
Hence find f (6). [8]
Or
8. (a) Estimate the production of sugar in the year 1935 from the
data given below : [8]
Year Production (lakh-tonnes)
1931 17.1
1932 13.0
1933 14.0
1934 9.6
1936 12.4
1937 18.2
(b) Explain Newtons Forward interpolation method. [8]
[3862]-158 5 P.T.O.
9. (a) Why Adam-Bashforth and Mines method are known as predictor
corrector methods ? Explain any one of them in detail. [8]
(b) Solve by using forth order Runge-Kutta method to find
y (0.2) and y (0.4), given that :
2
, (0) 2
dy
y y x y
dx
= - =
,
by taking h = 0.2. [10]
Or
10. (a) Explain Taylor series method for the solution of ordinary
differential equation. [8]
(b) Using Eulers method, find approximate value of y when
x = 0.6 of
1 2
dy
xy
dx
= -
,
given that y(0) = 0 (take h = 0.2). [10]
11. (a) Derive the equation for Trapezoidal rule for numerical integration
using Newton-Cotes quadrature formula. [6]
(b) Evaluate :
2
1
sin x
dx
x
using Simpsons (3/8)th rule taking 10 equal intervals. [10]

[3862]-158 6
Or
12. (a) Evaluate
0.9
0.5
.
x
x e dx
-
by using Simpsons (1/3)rd rule taking 8 intervals. [10]

(b) Evaluate :
1.4
0.2
(sin log ) .
x
e
x x e dx
-
- +
using the Trapezoidal rule taking 12 intervals. [6]

[3862]-159 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-159
S.E. (Electrical) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
MICROPROCESSOR FUNDAMENTAL AND
APPLICATIONS
(2008 PATTERN)
from Section II.
(ii) Figures to the right indicate full marks.
SECTION I
1. (a) Draw and explain 4K ROM interfacing with 8085 from 0000H. [8]
(b) Explain the following instructions of 8085 microprocessor : [10]
(i) LDA Addr
(ii) DCX Rp
(iii) RAR
(iv) ANI 00H
(v) JMP Addr.
Or
2. (a) Explain various flags with format of status flag register. [8]
(b) Draw and explain the block diagram architecture of 8085
microprocessor and function of each block. [10]
[3862]-159 2
3. (a) What is interrupt ? Explain enabling, disabling and masking
of interrupts. [8]
(b) Write an assembly language program for delay of 10 ms using
two registers. Microprocessor operating frequency is 2 MHz.
Calculate the required count. [8]
Or
4. (a) Explain stack operation of 8085 microprocessor. [8]
(b) Write a program to find sum of ten numbers stored in array
from B000H location onwards. Store the result at C000H
location. [8]
5. (a) Explain RS232 standard used for serial communication. [8]
(b) Draw and explain block diagram of 8251. [8]
Or
6. (a) Explain command instruction format and status word format
of 8251. [8]
(b) Compare synchronous and asynchronous data transfer. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Draw functional block diagram of 8254 and explain function
of each block. [8]
(b) List the operating modes of 8255. Give its control word format
in I/O mode and BSR mode. [8]
Or
8. (a) Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8255 PPI. [8]
(b) Explain mode 0 and mode 1 operation of 8254. [8]
[3862]-159 3 P.T.O.
9. (a) Draw interfacing diagram of DAC with 8085 microprocessor.
Write an assembly language program to generate square wave
using DAC. [10]
(b) How power factor is measured using 8085, explain with block
diagram. [8]
Or
10. (a) With the help of interfacing diagram, explain interface of ADC0808
with 8085. Based on interfacing diagram write an assembly
language program for A to D conversion. [10]
(b) Explain application of 8085 for measurement of voltage and
current. [8]
11. (a) Explain application of 7 segment display using 8085. [8]
(b) Explain D.C. motor control using 8085. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain stepper motor control using 8085. [8]
(b) Explain temperature control of furnace or oven using 8085. [8]
[3862]-161
S.E. (E & TC/Elex)(First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Determine whether the signal is an energy or power signal.
Find the value of the same. (Refer Fig. 1) : [6]
Fig. 1
P.T.O.
x(t)
3e
t/2
3
t
1
0
[3862]-161 2
(b) Determine whether the signal is periodic or aperiodic. If periodic,
find its period :
(i)
2 2
( ) 2 cos 3 cos
3 7
t t
x t

= +
[4]
(ii) [ ] cos 2 . x n n = [2]
(c) Find the odd and even parts of the signal (Refer Fig. 2) :
[6]
Fig. 2
Or
2. (a) Sketch the following waveforms : [5]
(i)
x t u t u t u t
(ii)
x t r t r t r t
.
(b) Determine if the following systems is memoryless, causal, linear,
time invariant and stable : [7]
y(t) = sin [x (t + 2)].
(c) Determine if the given system is static, causal, stable if impulse
reponse h(t) is given by h(t) = e
2t
. u( t). [6]
x(t)
2
0
2 1
3
t
1
[3862]-161 3 P.T.O.
3. (a) State the properties of convolution integral. [3]
(b) Find the step response of the system whose impulse response
is : [6]
(i)
[ 2] [ 3] n n +
(ii) u[n].
(c) Compute the convolution of
[ ] {1, 1, 0, 1, 1} x n
=
and
[ ] {1, 2, 3, 4} h n
=
. [7]
Or
4. Find the response y(t) of the LTI system shown by the block
diagram (Refer Fig. 3) : [16]
Fig. 3
where
h(t) = e
2t
for t > 0
= 0 elsewhere.
u(t)
w(t) x(t)
y(t)
LTI
System
Delay
2 sec.
A
[3862]-161 4
5. (a) Obtain the exponential Fourier series of the rectangular pulse
shown below (Refer Fig. 4) : [8]
Fig. 4
(b) Draw the magnitude and phase spectrum of the signal in
Q. 5(a) above. [8]
Or
6. (a) Obtain the Fourier transform of the signal shown below, using
linearity property (Refer Fig. 5). [10]
Fig. 5
x(t)
2 t 0
1
2
1
x(t)
t T
0
T
2
T
0
T
0
A
0
[3862]-161 5 P.T.O.
(b) Obtain the Fourier transform of a unit step function and plot
its magnitude and phase spectrum. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) A 0.5 F capacitor is in the network which is initially charged
to 10 V and switch is closed at t = 0. Find i(t) for
t > 0 using Laplace transform (Refer Fig. 6) : [8]
Fig. 6
(b) Find the Laplace transform of x(t) = e
3t
. u( t) and plot
its R.O.C. [5]
(c) Find the initial and final value of x(t) given : [5]
2
2 3
X( )
5 7
s
s
s s
+
=
+
Also state the Initial and Final value theorem.
2
0.5 F
i(t)
1 H
[3862]-161 6
Or
8. (a) Obtain Laplace transform of the waveform shown in
Fig. 7 : [8]
Fig. 7
(b) Using properties of Laplace transform, find if : [5]
2
4
X( )
2 1
s
s
s s
=
+ +
(i) x(5t)
(ii) x(t) * u(t).
(c) Find the time domain representation of the signal given : [5]
2
2
4 3
X( ) .
( 2) ( 2 1)
s s
s
s s s
+ +
=
+ + +
9. A time domain signal x(t) = e
4t
u(t). [16]
Find :
(i) Autocorrelation function
x(t)
1
0
1
2
t
[3862]-161 7 P.T.O.
(ii) Spectrum X(f)
(iii) Energy spectral density
(iv) Energy
(v) Plot of autocorrelation
(vi) Plot of ESD.
Or
10. (a) Obtain the cross correlation of the following sequences : [8]
1 2
[ ] {2, 3, 4}, [ ] {1, 2, 3}. x n x n

= =
(b) List the properties of energy spectral density and power spectral
density. [8]
11. (a) A box contains 3 white, 4 red and 5 black balls. A ball is
drawn at random. Find the probability that it is : [6]
(i) Red
(ii) Not black
(iii) Black or White.
(b) Explain Poissons and Gaussian distribution function. [6]
(c) Find the expectation of random variable X which is defined
by : [4]
X = 2 with probability 1/4
= 3 with probability 1/2
= 1 with probability 1/4
Find E[X
2
].
[3862]-161 8
Or
12. (a) Each letter of the word ATTRACT is written on a separate
card. The cards are then thoroughly shuffled and four of them
are drawn in succession. What is the probability of getting
result as TACT ? [4]
(b) With an example explain the concept of continuous R.V. and
Discrete R.V. What is the P.D.F. and C.D.F. ? Plot PDF of
uniform distributed R.V. over an interval (0 to 2). [8]
(c) A continuous R.V. X has the following density function : [4]
f x kx
0 < X < 2
= 0 elsewhere
Find :
(i) The normalising factor k
(ii) The probabilities that 0.2 < X < 0.5.
[3862]-162
S.E. (E & TC) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
SOLID STATE DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) For the circuit shown in Fig. 1 calculate the currents
I
1
and I
2
. Consider both the diodes having R
f
= 10 and
V
r
= 0.6 V. [8]
Fig. 1
P.T.O.
10 D
1
D
2
I
2
I
1
10
3 V
15
[3862]-162 2
(b) Compare fast recovery diodes with respect to construction,
working, characteristics, switching characteristics, and
applications. [8]
Or
2. (a) Explain the following non-ideal current voltage characteristics
of MOSFET : [9]
(i) Finite output resistance
(ii) Body effect
(iii) Subthreshold conduction.
(b) The n-channel E-MOSFET has the following parameters : [7]
V
CTS
= 3V, V
T
= 1V, K = 0.15 mA/V
2
,
= 0.03 V
1
and V
DS
= 8V
Calculate :
(i) Drain current
(ii) The output resistance.
3. (a) The MOSFET used in the amplifier circuit shown in Fig. 2
has the following parameters. I
D(ON)
= 5 mA, V
GS(ON)
= 6V,
V
T
= 3V. Determine : [12]
(i) I
D
(ii) V
GS
[3862]-162 3 P.T.O.
(iii) V
DS
(iv) g
m
.
Fig. 2
(b) State True or False : [6]
(i) The transconductance increases if channel length is
reduced.
(ii) The action of MOSFET in its equivalent can best be represented
as voltage controlled current source.
(iii) MOSFET does not suffer from thermal runaway.
(iv) MOS devices are subject to damage from electrostatic
discharge.
(v) Channel-length modulation makes the output resistance in
saturation finite.
(vi) MOSFET offers extremely high input resistance.
10 m
C
S
6.8 m
750
24 V
2.2 K
C
C
V
S
~
C
C
V
o
[3862]-162 4
V
DD
40 M
4.7 k
C
C
V
o
V
i
C
C
2.2 K
10 M 1.2 K
C
S
Or
4. (a) For the common source amplifier circuit shown in
Fig. 3. [10]
Determine :
(i) g
m
(ii) A
v
(iii)
'
R , R
i i
(iv) A
V
s
(v) R
o
and
'
o
R
.
Given :
K = 0.4 mA/V
2
, V
T
= 3V, I
D
= 1.11 mA
V
GS
= 4.66 V, r
d
= 40 k.
Fig. 3
(b) Define : [8]
(i) Threshold voltage
(ii) Pinch off voltage
(iii) Transconductance
(iv) Drain resistance.
[3862]-162 5 P.T.O.
5. (a) For the BJT amplifier circuit shown in Fig. 4, [12]
calculate :
(i) A
v
(ii) R
i
and
'
i
R
(iii) A
V
s
(iv)
o
R and
'
o
R
.
Given :
h
ie
= 1.1 k, h
fe
= 50, h
re
= 2.5 10
4
h
oe
= 25 A/V.
Fig. 4
(b) Discuss thermal runaway. [4]
V
CC
10 K 68 K
500
C
C
1 K
10 K
V
o
1 K
C
C
5.6 K
V
S
[3862]-162 6
Or
6. (a) The transistor amplifier circuit shown in Fig. 5 uses a transistor
whose h-parameters are h
ic
= 1.1 K, h
fc
= 51, h
rc
= 1,
h
oc
= 25 A/V. [12]
Calculate :
(i) A
v
(ii) R
i
and
'
i
R
(iii) AVs
(iv) R
o
and
'
o
R
.
Fig. 5
(b) Explain need of multistage amplifier and its effect on
the bandwidth. [4]
SECTION II
7. (a) (i) For the CE stage shown in Fig. 6 with 1/h
oe
= , calculate
the percentage tilt in the output if the input current I
is a 100 Hz square wave.
V
CC
1 K
12 K
V
o
12 K
6.8 K
56 K
1 K
V
S
[3862]-162 7 P.T.O.
(ii) What is the lowest frequency square wave which will suffer
less than 1 percent tilt ? [10]
Fig. 6
(b) Draw and explain the small signal high frequency CE -model
of a transistor. [6]
Or
8. (a) The Bandwidth of an amplifier extends from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
Find the frequency range over which the voltage gain is down
less than 1 dB from its midband value. [8]
(b) An amplifier is assumed to have a single pole high frequency
transfer function. The rise time of its output response to a
step function input is 35 nsec. Calculate the upper 3dB frequency
for the amplifier. [4]
(c) Define F
, f
and f
T
. [4]
V
CC
3 K
10 F
V
o
2 K
I
[3862]-162 8
9. (a) For the transistor amplifier stage shown in Fig. 7, h
fe
= 50,
h
ie
= 1.1 K, h
re
= h
oe
= 0. Analyse the circuit
for : [14]
(i) Type of feedback
(ii)
(iii) R
M
(iv) R
MF
(v) A
Vf
(vi) R
if
(vii) R'
Df
.
Fig. 7
(b) Draw neat circuit diagram of Hartley oscillator and explain
its operation. [4]
3 K
1.2 K
1.2 K
50
V
o
V
CC
V
S
[3862]-162 9 P.T.O.
Or
10. (a) An amplifier with an open loop voltage gain of 1,000 delivers
10 W of output power at 10 percent second harmonic distortion
when the input signal is 10 mV. If 40 dB negative voltage
series feedback is applied and the output power is to remain
at 10 W, determine : [10]
(i) the required input signal
(ii) the percent harmonic distortion.
(b) An amplifier has an open loop gain of 100, and its lower and
upper cut off frequency of 100 Hz and 100 kHz respectively.
A feedback network with feedback factor of 0.99 is connected
to the amplifier. Calculate the new lower and upper cutoff
frequencies. [8]
11. (a) Explain advantages and disadvantages of class B push-pull power
amplifier. What modifications in this circuit may eliminate most
of the disadvantages of it ? What that modified power amplifier
is known as ? [8]
(b) The power amplifier delivers 50 W output at 50% efficiency.
The ambient temperature is 25C. If the maximum allowable
junction temperature is 150C, then calculate : [8]
(i) Power dissipation
(ii) Maximum thermal resistance.
[3862]-162 10
Or
12. (a) A class-B push-pull amplifier supplies power to a resistive load
of 12 . The output transformer has a turn ratio of 3 : 1
and efficiency 78.5%. [10]
Calculate :
(i) Maximum power output
(ii) Maximum power dissipation in each transistor
(iii) Maximum base and collector current for each transistor.
Given :
V
CC
= 20 V, h
FE
= 25.
(b) Explain how even harmonics get eliminated in class-B push-
pull amplifier. [6]
[3862]-163
S.E. (E & TC)(First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
NETWORK ANALYSIS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) State and explain maximum power transfer theorem as applied
to AC circuits. [4]
(b) Determine the current through 10 resistance of the
network shown in Fig. 1, using the superposition
theorem : [7]
Fig. 1
P.T.O.
20 0V
10
j5
10 90V
j15
+
+
[3862]-163 2
(c) For the circuit shown in Fig. 2, find the current (I) flowing
through 2 resistance. [7]
Fig. 2
Or
2. (a) Calculate the current through Z
L
using the Thevenins theorem.
Verify the result by direct calculations. Refer Fig. 3 : [7]
Fig. 3
2
1
1
I
1 A
2 V
1
1
2
1
5 V
j1
j1
(1 + j1)
Z
L
2V
[3862]-163 3 P.T.O.
(b) Find the current through the resistance of 2 in Fig. 4 using
Millmans theorem. [7]
Fig. 4
(c) With appropriate examples explain the concept of source
transformation and source shifting as in network
analysis. [4]
3. (a) Compare the series and parallel RLC circuits based on the
following points : [4]
(i) Possibility of resonance in series and parallel RLC
circuit.
(ii) Impedance of series and parallel RLC circuit above and
below, F
r
and F
ar
respectively.
(iii) Behaviour of the circuit at F
r
and F
ar
.
(iv) Applications.
3 j4
5
25 90V
10 0V
B
A
2
[3862]-163 4
(b) A constant voltage at a frequency 1 MHz is applied to an
inductor coil in series with a variable capacitor. When the
capacitor is set at 500 pF, the current has its maximum value,
while the current is reduced to one half when the capacitance
is 600 pF. Find :
(i) The resistance and the inductance of the coil.
(ii) The quality factor of the inductor. [6]
(c) A coil of 10 H and resistance of 10 is in shunt with 100
pF capacitor. The combination is connected across a
generator of 100 V, having internal resistance of 100 k.
Determine :
(i) Voltage across parallel circuit at resonance.
(ii) Bandwidth. [6]
Or
4. (a) Define Null frequency. Explain Wien Bridge Network as a
Notch Filter. [4]
(b) The generator resistance R
g
of an antiresonant circuit is increased
to twice its original value i.e. 2 R
g
. Explain its effect
on : [4]
(i) Bandwidth of the circuit
(ii) Selectivity of the circuit.
(c) A circuit contains resistance of 200 , a capacitance of 100
pF and inductance of 100 H in series. Find fall in the current
if the generator frequency is increased by 20 kHz above resonance
of the circuit. Also calculate the voltage across L and C at
F
r
. Find the maximum current in the circuit. Assume the
generator has 50 internal resistance with 10 V open circuit
voltage. [8]
5. (a) What are asymmetrical networks ? Explain two characteristics
of an asymmetrical network. [4]
[3862]-163 5 P.T.O.
(b) Design symmetrical lattice attenuator with 20 dB attenuation,
working into 600 impedance. [4]
(c) Design m derived T and high pass filter section to work
into load of 600 with cut-off frequency of
1000

Hz and
peak attenuation frequency at 300 Hz. [8]
Or
6. (a) A constant K Band Pass Filter must have equal resonant and
antiresonant frequencies. Justify the statement with appropriate
reactance curves. [6]
(b) A section filter network consists of a series arm inductance
of 20 mH and two shunt arm capacitors of 0.16 F
each. Calculate cut-off frequency and attenuation at 1.5 kHz.
What is the value of the nominal impedance in the pass
band ? [5]
(c) Design a suitable matching half section to match a symmetrical
T network with Z
OT
= 500 to a generator having an internal
resistance equal to 200 . [5]
SECTION II
7. (a) Obtain the Laplace transform of the following input
signals : [8]
(i) t . e
at
(ii) t
n
(iii) e
at
sin t
(iv) (t a).
(b) Explain the physical significance of complex frequency. Define
and explain Laplace transform. [4]
[3862]-163 6
(c) State and explain : [4]
(i) Convolution theorem
(ii) Initial and final value theorem of Laplace transform.
Or
8. (a) In the network shown in Fig. 5, the switch S is opened at
t = 0. Find out the node voltages V
1
(t) and V
2
(t), after opening
the switch. [8]
Fig. 5
(b) Obtain the inverse Laplace transform of : [4]
3 2
7 2
F( ) .
3 2
s
s
s s s
+
=
+ +
(c) Obtain the Laplace transform of basic R, L and C components
with initial conditions. [4]
9. (a) Obtain the conditions of symmetry and reciprocity for the
following : [8]
(i) h-parameters
(ii) T-parameters.
10
1
2
S
10
t = 0
10 H
i(t)
10 V
5 V
[3862]-163 7 P.T.O.
1
2 F 2 F
1
1/4
1'
z(s)
(b) For the network shown in Fig. 6, find driving point input
impedance z(s). Plot the pole and zeros of z(s) : [8]
Fig. 6
Or
10. (a) Find y parameters for the circuit shown in Fig. 7. Using conversion
formulae, calculate the Z-parameters also : [8]
Fig. 7
(b) What is a network function ? Explain various types of network
functions for a one port and two port networks. [4]
I
1
V
1
I
2
V
2
0.2 V
2
5
20
0.4 I
2
[3862]-163 8
(c) Explain the significance of poles and zeros in network
analysis. [4]
11. (a) Explain with neat diagram various types of transmission lines.
State applications of each. [4]
(b) Define primary and secondary constants of a transmission line.
Derive relationship between them. [6]
(c) A transmission line cable has the following primary constants
per kilometer.
R = 78 , L = 1.75 mH, C = 0.0945 F, G = 62 at
frequency of 1.6 kHz.
Calculate :
(1) Characteristic impedance
(2) Propagation constant
(3) Wavelength in km
(4) Velocity of signal travelling. [8]
Or
12. (a) What is distributed and lumped network. Explain the equivalent
circuit of transmission line. [5]
(b) Explain the concept of standing waves on a transmission line.
Are standing waves desirable ? Justify. [5]
(c) A 50 lossless transmission line is terminated by a load impedance
Z
L
= 50 j75 . If the incident power is 100 mW, find the
power dissipation in the load. [4]
(d) A cable has an attenuation of 3.5 dB/km and a phase constant
of 0.28 rad/km. If 3 V is applied to the sending end, what
is the voltage at a point of 10 km down the line when it
is terminated into its characteristic impedance ? [4]
[3862]-164
S.E. (E & TC/Electronics) (I Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(v) In Section I : Attempt Q. No. 1 or 2, Q. No. 3 or 4,
Q. No. 5 or 6.
(vi) In Section II : Attempt Q. No. 7 or 8, Q. No. 9 or 10,
Q. No. 11 or 12.
SECTION I
1. (a) Implement the following function using single 4 : 1 MUX and
logic gates : [8]
F(A, B, C, D) = m(0, 1, 5, 9, 10, 15).
(b) Minimize the expression using Quine-Mc-Clusky method : [10]
Y = ABCD + ABCD + ABCD + ABCD + ABCD + ABCD.
Or
2. (a) Design a Gray to BCD code converter using two dual
4 : 1 MUX ICs and some logic gates. [6]
(b) Design even parity generator circuit for 4-bit input using
multiplexer. [6]
(c) Design 2-bit comparator using suitable decoder. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-164 2
3. (a) Convert : [8]
(1) J-K FF to SR FF
(2) D FF to J-K FF.
(b) Design a type D counter that goes through states 0, 1, 2,
4, 0, ................ the undesired states must always go to zero
(000) on the next clock pulse. [8]
Or
4. (a) Design a pulse train generator using a shift register to generate
the following waveform : [8]
(b) Design and implement synchronous modulo 6 Gray code counter
using T FF. [8]
5. (a) Compare If and Case statement. Write down the VHDL code
for 4 : 1 MUX. (Use behavioural modelling). [8]
(b) What is the difference between sequential and concurrent
statement. [4]
(c) What is VHDL ? Write entity and architecture declaration for
two input NAND gate. [4]
Or
6. (a) Consider a simple example of Half adder. How will you write
a VHDL entity declaration for half adder ? Also write an
architecture of Half adder in structural style of modelling and
data flow style of modelling. [8]
(b) Write the VHDL code for DFF using synchronous and asyn-
chronous reset input. [8]
[3862]-164 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) DesignthesequentialcircuitusingJ-KFFforthestatediagram
shown in Fig. 1 : [8]
Fig. 1
(b) Explain : [8]
(1) State table
(2) State diagram
(3) Rules for state reduction
(4) State assignment.
Or
8. (a) Explain Moore circuit with example. Also compare Moore and
Mealy circuit. [8]
(b) Design a sequence detector to detect a sequence 1101 (Using
D FF and Mealy circuit). [8]
9. (a) State merits and demerits of CMOS logic family. Explain with
neat diagram two input CMOS and TTL NAND gate. [12]
(b) Compare TTL, CMOS and ECL. [6]
[3862]-164 4
Or
10. (a) Define the following parameter for digital IC and give their
typical values for TTL and CMOS : [10]
(i) Propagation delay
(ii) Noise margin
(iii) Fan out
(iv) Figure of merit.
(b) Draw and explain TTL to CMOS and CMOS to TTL
interfacing. [8]
11. (a) How to obtained 64 4 memory using 16 4 memory
chip ? [8]
(b) A combinational circuit is defined by the function : [8]
F
1
(A, B, C) = m(4, 5, 7)
F
2
(A, B, C) = m(3, 5, 7)
Implement this ckt with PLA having 3 input, 3 product terms,
and two outputs.
Or
12. (a) What is PLD ? What is the difference btween PAL and
PLA ? Explain with the help of a neat diagram. [8]
(b) What is meant by SRAM and DRAM ? Explain in detail. Also
compare SRAM and DRAM. [8]
[3862]-165
S.E. (E & TC) (First Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
POWER DEVICES AND MACHINES
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Solve Q. 1 or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4 and Q. 5 or Q. 6
from Section I and Q. 7 or Q. 8, Q. 9 or Q. 10, and
Q. 11 or Q. 12 from Section II.
answer-books.
(v) Use of logarithmic tables, non-programmable electronic pocket
calculator is allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) Draw the vertical cross-section of IGBT and explain its output
characteristics. [6]
(b) Explain switching characteristics of MOSFET. [6]
(c) The bipolar transistor is specified to have
F
in the range
of 8 to 40. The load resistance is R
C
= 1 . The dc supply
voltage is V
CC
= 200 V and the input voltage to the base
circuit is V
B
= 10 V. If V
CE
(sat) = 1 V and V
BE
(sat)
= 1.5 V, find :
(i) the value of R
B
that results in saturation with an ODF
of 5,
(ii) the
forced
and the power loss P
T
in the transistor. [6]
Or
2. (a) What is anti-saturation control of power transistor ? [4]
(b) Draw and explain Gate Drive Circuit for IGBT. [6]
(c) Explain the switching characteristic of power diode. [4]
(d) Write a short note on Thermal runaway. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-165 2
3. (a) An SCR has a Vg-Ig characteristics given as Vg = 2 + 5 Ig.
In a certain application, the gate voltage consists of rectangular
pulses of 10 V and of duration 10s is applied to gate through
a 10 series resistor. Calculate :
(i) Peak gate power
(ii) Triggering frequency to obtain an average gate power of
0.5 W. [6]
(b) Explain in detail the following current ratings of SCR in
detail : [6]
(i) Average on state current
(ii) Surge current rating
(iii) I
2
t rating.
(c) Explain with the help of circuit diagram, how DIAC is used
as a triggering agent for a TRIAC. [4]
Or
4. (a) With the help of a neat structural diagram explain the turn
off operation of GTO. [6]
(b) Describe the holding current and latching current applicable
to an SCR with the help of static V-I characteristics. [6]
(c) Explain SCR triggering using UJT. [4]
5. (a) For a single-phase ac voltage regulator feeding a resistive load,
draw the waveforms of source voltage, gating signals, output
voltage, source and output current and voltage across SCRs.
Describe its working with reference to the waveforms
drawn. [10]
(b) What is inverting and rectifying mode of single-phase full converter
with RL load ? [6]
Or
6. (a) Draw the circuit diagram, voltage and current waveforms for
= 60
, RL load of semi-converter. [6]

[3862]-165 3 P.T.O.
(b) A single-phase full wave ac voltage controller has a resistive
load of R = 10 and the input voltage is V
s
= 120V (rms),
60 Hz. The delay angles of thyristors T
1
and T
2
are equal :
1
=
2
= /2.
Determine :
(i) the rms output voltage V
o
,
(ii) the input PF,
(iii) the average current of thyristor I
A
, and
(iv) the rms current of thyristor I
R.
[8]
(c) What do you mean by commutation of SCR ? [2]
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive an expression for average output voltage of step down
chopper. [4]
(b) Explain continuous and discontinuous current mode of step down
copper with RL load. [6]
(c) The single-phase bridge inverter has a resistive load of
R = 2.4 and the dc input voltage is V
s
= 48 V.
Determine :
(i) the rms output voltage at the fundamental frequency V
01
,
(ii) the output power P
o
,
(iii) the average and peak current of each transistor,
(iv) the peak reverse blocking voltage V
BR
of each transistor
(v) the THD,
(vi) the DF,
(vii) the HF and DF of LOH. [8]
Or
8. (a) Explain the use of step up operation for energy transfer. [4]
(b) Draw the circuit diagram, necessary waveforms and
explain operation of single-phase full Bridge inverter with R
load. [6]
(c) Explain the need for feedback diodes in inverter. [3]
(d) Explain various control strategies for d.c. choppers. [5]
[3862]-165 4
9. (a) Explain the development of a revolving field in a three-phase
IM ? [6]
(b) Why is the induced e.m.f. in a dc motor called the back e.m.f.
or the counter e.m.f. ? [4]
(c) Compare squirrel cage rotor and wound rotor. [6]
Or
10. (a) A 220 V dc generator supplies 4 kW at a terminal voltage
of 220 V, the armature resistance being 0.4 . If the machine
is now operated as a motor at the same terminal voltage with
the same armature current, calculate the ratio of generator
speed motor speed. Assume that the flux/pole is made to increase
by 10% as the operation is changed over from generator to
motor. [6]
(b) What is the voltage equation of motor and condition for maximum
power ? [4]
(c) Explain Universal motor with reference to its construction, types
and characteristics. [6]
11. (a) What differentiates a core type transformer from a shell type
transformer ? [4]
(i) AC servomotor
(ii) Stepper motor.
(c) State various protection circuits for motors. Explain any one
in detail. [6]
Or
12. (a) How does the speed vary in brushless dc motor which carrying
torque ? [4]
(b) What is an autotransformer ? List its advantages and
drawbacks. [4]
(c) Draw the circuit diagram and explain star-star connection of
three-phase transformer and state merits, demerits and
application of same. [8]
[3862]-165
S.E. (E & TC) (First Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
POWER DEVICES AND MACHINES
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Solve Q. 1 or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4 and Q. 5 or Q. 6
from Section I and Q. 7 or Q. 8, Q. 9 or Q. 10, and
Q. 11 or Q. 12 from Section II.
answer-books.
(v) Use of logarithmic tables, non-programmable electronic pocket
SECTION I
1. (a) Draw the vertical cross-section of IGBT and explain its output
(b) Explain switching characteristics of MOSFET. [6]
(c) The bipolar transistor is specified to have
F
in the range
of 8 to 40. The load resistance is R
C
= 1 . The dc supply
voltage is V
CC
= 200 V and the input voltage to the base
circuit is V
B
= 10 V. If V
CE
(sat) = 1 V and V
BE
(sat)
= 1.5 V, find :
(i) the value of R
B
that results in saturation with an ODF
of 5,
(ii) the
forced
and the power loss P
T
in the transistor. [6]
Or
2. (a) What is anti-saturation control of power transistor ? [4]
(b) Draw and explain Gate Drive Circuit for IGBT. [6]
(c) Explain the switching characteristic of power diode. [4]
(d) Write a short note on Thermal runaway. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-165 2
3. (a) An SCR has a Vg-Ig characteristics given as Vg = 2 + 5 Ig.
In a certain application, the gate voltage consists of rectangular
pulses of 10 V and of duration 10s is applied to gate through
a 10 series resistor. Calculate :
(i) Peak gate power
(ii) Triggering frequency to obtain an average gate power of
0.5 W. [6]
(b) Explain in detail the following current ratings of SCR in
detail : [6]
(i) Average on state current
(ii) Surge current rating
(iii) I
2
t rating.
(c) Explain with the help of circuit diagram, how DIAC is used
as a triggering agent for a TRIAC. [4]
Or
4. (a) With the help of a neat structural diagram explain the turn
off operation of GTO. [6]
(b) Describe the holding current and latching current applicable
to an SCR with the help of static V-I characteristics. [6]
(c) Explain SCR triggering using UJT. [4]
5. (a) For a single-phase ac voltage regulator feeding a resistive load,
draw the waveforms of source voltage, gating signals, output
voltage, source and output current and voltage across SCRs.
Describe its working with reference to the waveforms
drawn. [10]
(b) What is inverting and rectifying mode of single-phase full converter
with RL load ? [6]
Or
6. (a) Draw the circuit diagram, voltage and current waveforms for
= 60
, RL load of semi-converter. [6]

[3862]-165 3 P.T.O.
(b) A single-phase full wave ac voltage controller has a resistive
load of R = 10 and the input voltage is V
s
= 120V (rms),
60 Hz. The delay angles of thyristors T
1
and T
2
are equal :
1
=
2
= /2.
Determine :
(i) the rms output voltage V
o
,
(ii) the input PF,
(iii) the average current of thyristor I
A
, and
(iv) the rms current of thyristor I
R.
[8]
(c) What do you mean by commutation of SCR ? [2]
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive an expression for average output voltage of step down
chopper. [4]
(b) Explain continuous and discontinuous current mode of step down
copper with RL load. [6]
(c) The single-phase bridge inverter has a resistive load of
R = 2.4 and the dc input voltage is V
s
= 48 V.
Determine :
(i) the rms output voltage at the fundamental frequency V
01
,
(ii) the output power P
o
,
(iii) the average and peak current of each transistor,
(iv) the peak reverse blocking voltage V
BR
of each transistor
(v) the THD,
(vi) the DF,
(vii) the HF and DF of LOH. [8]
Or
8. (a) Explain the use of step up operation for energy transfer. [4]
(b) Draw the circuit diagram, necessary waveforms and
explain operation of single-phase full Bridge inverter with R
load. [6]
(c) Explain the need for feedback diodes in inverter. [3]
(d) Explain various control strategies for d.c. choppers. [5]
[3862]-165 4
9. (a) Explain the development of a revolving field in a three-phase
IM ? [6]
(b) Why is the induced e.m.f. in a dc motor called the back e.m.f.
or the counter e.m.f. ? [4]
(c) Compare squirrel cage rotor and wound rotor. [6]
Or
10. (a) A 220 V dc generator supplies 4 kW at a terminal voltage
of 220 V, the armature resistance being 0.4 . If the machine
is now operated as a motor at the same terminal voltage with
the same armature current, calculate the ratio of generator
speed motor speed. Assume that the flux/pole is made to increase
by 10% as the operation is changed over from generator to
motor. [6]
(b) What is the voltage equation of motor and condition for maximum
power ? [4]
(c) Explain Universal motor with reference to its construction, types
and characteristics. [6]
11. (a) What differentiates a core type transformer from a shell type
transformer ? [4]
(i) AC servomotor
(ii) Stepper motor.
(c) State various protection circuits for motors. Explain any one
in detail. [6]
Or
12. (a) How does the speed vary in brushless dc motor which carrying
torque ? [4]
(b) What is an autotransformer ? List its advantages and
drawbacks. [4]
(c) Draw the circuit diagram and explain star-star connection of
three-phase transformer and state merits, demerits and
application of same. [8]
[3862]-166
S.E. (E&TC, Electronics) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) From Section I, attempt Q. No. 1 or Q. No. 2, Q. No.
3 or Q. No. 4, Q. No. 5 or Q. No. 6. From Section II,
attempt Q. No. 7 or Q. No. 8, Q. No. 9 or Q. No. 10,
Q. No. 11 or Q. No. 12.
answer-books.
(v) Use of logarithmic tables, electronic pocket calculator and
steam tables is allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) Attempt any three of the following : [12]
(1) Solve :
2
2
sin cos
x x x
d y
y e e e
dx

- .
(2) Solve :
2
2
2 sin
x
d y dy
y x e x
dx dx
- .
P.T.O.
[3862]-166 2
(3) Solve :
2
2
2
1
x
d y
y
dx e

-
(by variation of parameters)
(4) Solve :
2
2 2
2
3 5 sin (log )
d y dy
x y x x
dx dx
x - .
(5) Solve :
2
2 4 2
dx dy dz
x y xy z

.
(b) An electric circuit consists of an inductance L of 0.1 henry,
a resistance R of 20 ohms and a condenser of capacitance
C of 25 microfarads. If the differential equation of electrical
circuit is
2
2
Q Q Q
L R 0
C
d d
dt dt
- - , then find the charge Q and
current I at any time t, given that, at t = 0, Q = 0.05 coulombs
and I =
Q
0
d
dt
when t = 0. [5]
Or
2. (a) Attempt any three of the following : [12]
(1) Solve :
3
2
3
(1 )
x
d y
y e
dx
- .
(2) Solve :
2
2
3 2 cos
x
e x
d y dy
y e e
dx dx
- - - .
(3) Solve :
2
2
cosec
d y
y x
dx
-
(by variation of parameters)
[3862]-166 3 P.T.O.
(4) Solve :
2
2 2
2
(3 2) 3(3 2) 36 3 4 1
d y dy
x x y x x
dx dx
- - - - - .
(5) Solve :
2
2
2
sin (1 )
x
d y
y x x x e
dx
- - .
(b) The currents x and y in two coupled circuits are given by :
L R R( ) E
dx
x x y
dt
- -
L R R( ) 0
dy
y x y
dt
-
where L, R, E are constants, find x and y in terms of t,
given that x = 0, y = 0 at t = 0. [5]
3. (a) If f(z) is analytic, show that :
2 2
2 2
2 2
| ( )| 4| '( )| f z f z
x y

-
(
,
. [6]
(b) Evaluate :
2
2
C
4
1
z z
dz
z
-
,
where C is contour |z 1| =
1
2
. [5]
(c) Show that the map W =
2 3
4
z
z
-
transforms the circle

x
2
+ y
2
4x = 0 into the straight line 4u + 3 = 0. [5]
Or
4. (a) If f(z) = u + iv is analytic, find f(z) in terms of z, if
u v = (x y) (x
2
+ 4xy + y
2
). [6]
[3862]-166 4
(b) Evaluate using Cauchy Residue Theorem
2
3
C
2 2 1
( 1) ( 3)
z z
dz
z z
- -
-
,
where C is contour |z + 1| = 2. [5]
(c) Find the bilinear transformation which maps the points
z = 1, i, 2i on the points W = 2i, 0, 1 respectively. [5]
5. (a) Show that Fourier transform of f(x) =
2
/ 2 x
e
is
2
/2
e
. [6]
(b) Find the Fourier sine transform of
0 1
( ) 2 1 2
0 2
x x
f x x x
x

'
>
'
. [5]
(c) Find z-transform of the following (any two) : [6]
(1)
| |
1
( )
4
k
f k

(
,
, for all k
(2) ( ) 2 cos(3 2),
k
f k k - for k > 0
(3) ( ) ( 1) , 0
k
f k k a k - .
Or
6. (a) Find inverse z-transform of the following (any two) : [6]
(1) F(z) =
2
2
3 2
, 1 | | 2
3 2
z z
z
z z
-
< <
-
[3862]-166 5 P.T.O.
(2)
2
2
F( ) ,
1
z
z
z
-
by using inversion integral method
(3)
1
F( ) , 2 | | 3
( 3) ( 2)
z z
z z
< <

.
(b) Obtain f(k), given that :
12f(k + 2) 7f(k + 1) + f(k) = 0, k > 0, f(0) = 0,
f(1) = 3. [5]
(c) What is the function f(x), whose Fourier cosine transform is
sin a
? [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Find the values of y for x = 0.5 for the following set of
values of x and y using Newtons forward difference formula : [5]
x y
0 1
1 5
2 25
3 100
4 250
(b) Evaluate :
0.8
0
[log ( 1) sin(2 )]
e
x x dx - -
where x is in radian, by using Simpsons

1
3
rd rule, divide
the entire interval into 8 strips. [6]
(c) Using fourth order Runge-Kutta method, evaluate the value
of y when x = 1.1, given that :

2
1
, (1) 1.
dy y
y
dx x x
-
[5]
[3862]-166 6
Or
8. (a) Using Lagranges interpolation formula to evaluate y for
x = 1.07 for the following set of values : [5]
x y
1.0 1.0
1.2 1.728
1.3 2.197
1.5 3.375
(b) Evaluate :
3
0
1
dx
x -
with 7 ordinates by using Simpsons

3
8
th
rule and hence
calculate log 2. [6]
(c) Use Eulers modified method to find the value of y satisfying
the equation :
log ( ), (1) 2
dy
x y y
dx
-
for x = 1.2 correct upto three decimal places by taking
h = 0.2. [5]
9. (a) Show that the vector F have a constant magnitude if any
only if
F
F . 0.
d
dt
[4]
(b) If
1
F ( ) ( ) ( ) y z i z x j x y k - - - - -
and
2 2 2
2
F ( ) ( ) ( ) x yz i y zx j z xy k - -
then show that
1 2
F F is solenoidal. [5]
[3862]-166 7 P.T.O.
(c) Prove the following vector identities (any two) : [8]
(i)
2 2 2
( ) ( 6 6)
r r
r e r r e - -
(ii)
4 6 4
4( . ) 2 a r a r r a
r r r

(
,
(iii)
2 2 2
( ) 2 - -
Or
10. (a) Prove that :
3 2 2
F = (2 ) 3 xy z i x j xz k - - -
is irrotational and find the scalar potential such that
F =
. [6]
(b) Find the directional derivative of = e
2x
cos yz at the origin
in the direction tangent to the curve x = 3 sin t, y = 3 cos t,
z = 3t at t =
4
. [6]
(c) Find the angle between the normals to the surface xy = z
2
at (1, 4, 2) and (3, 3, 3). [5]
11. (a) Find the work done in moving a particle in the force field
F = ( ) ( ) ( ) x y i y z j z x k - - - - -
along the curve
x = 2(t + sin t), y = 2(1 cos t) in xy-plane from t = to
t = . [5]
(b) Use Stokes theorem to evaluate
S
( F) . n ds
over the
unclosed surface of the cylinder
2 2
2 2
1
x y
a b
- bounded by the
plane z = 5 and open at the end z = 0 for
F = ( ) ( ) ( ) . x y z i y z x j z x y k - - [6]
[3862]-166 8
(c) If
1 D
. D = , . H = 0, H = v
c t

-
(
,
,
1 H
D =
c t
where c is a constant, then prove that :

2 2
2 2
2 2 2 2 2
1 D 1 H
D ( ), H = ( ). v v
t c c t c c t
1 1
-

[6]
Or
12. (a) Evaluate
C
F . dr
along the curve x

2
+ 2y
2
= 1 in xy-plane
in positive quadrant where
2
F = 3 (2 ) . x i xz y j zk - - [5]
(b) By using Stokes theorem show that :
C S
(cos cos cos ) S ydx zdy xdz d - - - -

where S is the open surface bounded by the curve C and
, , are the angle made by the normal to the surface
S with x, y, z-axes respectively. [6]
(c) Evaluate :
over the total surface of region bounded by x = 0, y = 0,

z = 0, y = 3 and x + 2z = 6. [6]
[3862]-167
S.E. (E&TC) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Whicharethedifferentconfigurationsofdifferentialamplifiers ?
Do the D.C. analysis of Dual-Input Balanced output differential
amplifier to locate Q-point ? [8]
(b) Explain the working of current mirror circuit with neat circuit
diagram and derive the expression for constant current. Justify
why it is known as current mirror. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-167 2
Or
2. (a) What is op-amp ? Draw its block diagram and explain the
function of each block in detail. [8]
(b) An emitter-biased dual-input balanced-output differential
amplifier has the following specifications : |V
CC
| = |V
EE
|
= 10 V, R
C1
= R
C2
= 2.7 k and R
E
= 5.6 k; the transistor
array is CA3086 with
a.c.
=
d.c.
= 100 and V
BE
= 0.715 V.
Calculate :
(i) The voltage gain
(ii) The input resistance
(iii) The output resistance. [6]
(c) Compare Ideal op-amp and practical op-amp. [2]
3. (a) In the op-amp circuit given in Fig. 1, find output offset voltage.
AlsofindvalueofR
comp
tocompensatethisoutputoffsetvoltage. [6]
Fig. 1
R
1
V
oo
V
i
= 0 V
I
B2
= 350 nA
R
f
100 K
10 K
+
+
[3862]-167 3 P.T.O.
(b) Write a short note on frequency compensation in op-amps. [6]
(c) What is CMRR ? Explain its significance in op-amp. [4]
Or
4. (a) Explain frequency dependence of loop gain using Bode
plot. [8]
(b) Which are the different types of noises that are associated
with op-amps ? Draw op-amp. noise model and give expression
for output noise voltage. [8]
5. (a) Which are the different techniques used to achieve non-linear
amplification?Explainindetailsynthesizednon-linearresponse
with neat circuit diagram. [8]
(b) Why basic integrator is needed to be modified ? Draw the
circuit diagram of practical integrator along with frequency
response and explain its operation. [6]
(c) Write a short note on averaging circuit. [4]
Or
6. (a) With neat circuit diagram explain the operation of V to I
converter with grounded load and give its application. [6]
[3862]-167 4
(b) Design a differentiator to differentiate an input signal whose
frequency varies from 50 Hz to 2 kHz. [6]
(c) Draw the circuit diagram of two op-amp. differential amplifier
and explain its operation. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) What is precision rectifier ? Explain the operation of precision
full wave rectifier with neat circuit diagram. [8]
(b) For the Inverting Schmitt Trigger given in Fig. 2, find V
TH
,
V
TL
, V
T
and draw the input/output waveforms. [6]
Fig. 2
(c) Write a short note on IC LM317. [4]
V
o
V
I
(V
I
PP

= 14 V)
15 V
15 V
+
+
~
301
R
2
R
1
(8 K)
(8 K)
(V
Sat
= 13 V)
[3862]-167 5 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) Draw the neat circuit diagram of Instrumentation Amplifier
which amplifies output of a bridge which contains one resistive
transducer. Derive the expression for output voltage. [8]
(b) What is sample and hold amplifier ? Explain its operation with
the help of circuit diagram. [6]
(c) Explain operation of peak detector with the help of circuit
diagram. [4]
9. (a) Draw the neat diagram of F to V converter and explain its
operation. [8]
(b) Explain the operation of successive approximation type ADC
with neat block diagram. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain in detail specifications of ADCs. [8]
(b) Draw the circuit diagram of voltage mode R-2R ladder DAC
and explain its working. [8]
11. (a) With the help of neat block diagram explain operation of PLL.
Define the terms Lock range and Capture range. [8]
(b) Write a short note on second order active Band Pass Filter. [8]
[3862]-167 6
Or
12. Write short notes on any two : [16]
(a) Graphic equalizer
(b) PLL as frequency synthesizer
(c) FM Demodulator using PLL.
[3862]-168
S.E. (E & TC) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
ELECTROMAGNETICS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II. (Q. No. 1 or Q. No. 2, Q. No. 3 or
Q. No. 4, Q. No. 5 or Q. No. 6); (Q. No. 7 or
Q. No. 8, Q. No. 9 or Q. No. 10, Q. No. 11 or
Q. No. 12.).
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What are charge distributions ? Derive an expression of electric
field intensity due to sheet charge. [9]
(b) Determine the total charge : [9]
(i) On the line 0 < x < 5m, if
L
= 12x
2
m
C
/m
(ii) On the cylinder = 3, 0 < z < 4m if
S
= z
2
n
C
/m
2
.
(iii) Within the sphere r = 4 m if
3
V
10
C/m .
sin r
=
P.T.O.
[3862]-168 2
Or
2. (a) Explain applications of Gauss law in detail. [9]
(b) In a certain region, the electric field is given by : [9]
C 2
D = 2 ( 1) cos ( 1) sin cos /
z
z a z a a m

+ + +
(i) Find the charge density
(ii) Calculate the total charge enclosed by the volume
0 < < 2, 0 < <
2
, 0 < z < 4.
(iii) Confirm Gauss law.
3. (a) Define work done and potential difference. Explain relationship
between E and V. [8]
(b) A point charge of 5n
C
is located at the origin. If V = 2V
at (0, 6, 8), find : [8]
(i) The potential at A(3, 2, 6)
(ii) The potential at B(1, 5, 7)
(iii) The potential difference V
AB
.
Or
4. (a) Derive an expression of energy density in electric
fields. [8]
(b) If
J = (2 cos sin ) A/
, calculate the current passing
through : [8]
(i) A hemispherical shell of radius 20 cm
(ii) A spherical shell of radius 10 cm.
[3862]-168 3 P.T.O.
5. (a) State and explain Biot-Savarts law ? Determine magnetic
field at any point due to a straight filamentary
conductor ? [8]
(b) A circular loop located on x
2
+ y
2
= 9, z = 0 carries a direct
current of 10 A along
a
. Determine
H
at (0, 0, 4) and
(0, 0, 4). [8]
Or
6. (a) Derive an expression of Biot-Savarts law and Amperes law
based on magnetic potential. [8]
(b) A rectangular loop carrying 10 A current is placed on
z = 0 plane as shown in figure below. Evaluate H
at : [8]
Fig. : Rectangular Loop
(i) (2, 2, 0)
(ii) (4, 2, 0)
(iii) (4, 8, 0)
(iv) (0, 0, 2).
4
10 A
8 4
[3862]-168 4
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive an expression of Dielectric-Dielectric boundary conditions
for electrostatic field. [9]
(b) Two extensive homogeneous isotropic dielectrics meet on plane
z = 0, for z > 0,
1
4
r
=
and for z < 0, . A uniform
electric field
E 5 2 3 kV/m
exists for z > 0.
Find : [9]
(i) E
2
for z < 0.
(ii) The angles E
1
and E
2
make with the interface.
(iii) The energy densities in J/m
3
in both dielectrics.
(iv) The energy within a cube of side 2 m centered at
(3, 4, 5).
Or
8. (a) Derive an expression of boundary condition between two magnetic
media. [9]
(b) The XY-plane serves as the interface between two different
media. Medium 1(z < 0) is filled with a material whose
s
= 6 and medium 2 (z > 0) is filled with a material whose
s
= 4. If the interface carries current (1/
0
)
a
and
B 5 8
mWb/m
2
. Find
H
1
and and
B
1
. [9]
[3862]-168 5 P.T.O.
9. (a) Derive an expression of moving conducting loop in a time varying
magnetic field. [8]
(b) In free space
E 20 cos( 50 ) V/m
y
t x a
=
, calculate : [8]
(i) J
d
(ii) H
(iii) W.
Or
10. (a) Derive an expression of power Poynting theorem interpret each
term. [8]
(b) The electric field and magnetic field in free space are given
by : [8]
6
50
E . cos(10 ) V/m t a
= +
6 0
H
H . cos(10 ) A/m t a
= +
Express these in phasor form and determine the

constants H
0
and such that the fields satisfy Maxwells
equation.
11. (a) What are the different steps in Graphical representation of
electric field lines and the equipotential lines ? [8]
(b) What are the steps of finite difference method ? Where is
this method applicable ? [8]
[3862]-168 6
Or
12. (a) Explain in detail the steps of the moment methods. What are
the applications of this method ? Explain in detail. [8]
(b) What are the different steps of finite element analysis of any
problem ? [8]
[3862]-169 1 P.T.O.
[3862]-169
S.E. (Elex/E & TC) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
DATA STRUCTURES
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Write an algorithm for bubble sort. Discuss its time complexity. [6]
(b) Explain the advantages of function. Write a function to find
factorial of number. [6]
(c) Write an algorithm for sequential search. [4]
Or
2. (a) What are uses of Single Dimensional Array ? Write a program
to find sum of elements in an array. [6]
(b) Write a recursive function to find factorial of number. [6]
(c) Explain what is Abstract Data Type. [4]
[3862]-169 2
3. (a) Explain with example parameter passing : [6]
(i) By value and
(ii) By address to function.
(b) What are structures ? Explain its use. Define structure having
name, age and salary. [6]
(c) With example explain any three bitwise operators. [6]
Or
4. (a) What is an array of pointers ? Explain its use. [6]
(b) What are unions ? Explain its use. Define an union having
an array of characters of size 4 and two integers as its elements. [6]
(c) How can a polynomial be stored using an array ? Explain
with example. [6]
5. (a) Write a function for the following operations in SLL : [8]
(i) Display the elements
(ii) Search an element.
(b) Represent the following polynomial using GLL. Explain the node
structure in GLL :
3x
2
y
2
z + 8xyz + 5x
2
yz
2
+ 8xyz
2
+ 3x
2
y
2
z
2
[8]
Or
6. (a) Write a function of the following operations in DLL : [8]
(i) Display the elements
(ii) Search an element.
(b) What is CLL ? Write a function to create circular linked list. [8]
[3862]-169 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) What is priority queue ? Explain how insert and delete operations
are implemented in it. [8]
(b) Write an algorithm convert infix expression into postfix
expression. [8]
Or
8. (a) Explain how a stack can be implemented using linked list. [8]
(b) What is circular queue ? Explain the insert and delete operators
in circular queue. [8]
9. (a) For the following data draw binary tree. Show all steps : [6]
50 80 30 20 100 75 25 15 68
(b) Write a function to search an element in BST. [6]
(c) What is AVL tree ? Explain the RR and LL rotations with
example. [6]
Or
10. (a) Write an algorithm to implement non-recursive in-order traversal
of binary tree. [6]
(b) Write a function to insert an element in BST. [6]
(c) Create an AVL tree for the following data : [6]
40 20 10 30 70 60 55
[3862]-169 4
11. (a) How can a graph be represented ? Explain with suitable
example. [6]
(b) What is DFS ? Write a function for DFS for a graph. [6]
(c) Find minimum spanning tree for the following graph using Prims
algorithm. [4]
Or
12. (a) Explain Dijkstras algorithm. [6]
(b) What is BFS ? Write a function for BFS for a graph. [6]
(c) Find minimum spanning tree for the graph given in Q. 11(c)
using Kruskals algorithm. [4]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
3
2
1
4 2
2
[3862]-170
S.E. (E&TC/Elex) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
COMMUNICATION THEORY
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Derive the expression for AM wave and explain power relations
for DSB-FC. [6]
(b) Define modulation. State various types of modulation schemes
along with their waveforms. [6]
(c) Baseband signals are not used for broadcasting, why ? [4]
Or
2. (a) Draw and explain block schematic of communication system
and need of modulation. [8]
(b) AM signal is expressed as
e = [E
C
+ e
m
] cos 2f
C
t, where E
C
= Peak amplitude of 10 V
of carrier signal with frequency f
C
= 1 MHz. e
m
= modulating
signal. If modulating signal contains 500 Hz at 7 volt amplitude
P.T.O.
[3862]-170 2
and 3 kHz at 5 volt amplitude, determine total power transmitted
and effective modulation index. [8]
3. (a) Explain with the help of neat block diagram, Armstrong method
of FM generation. [8]
(b) A 15 watt, 1 MHz unmodulated carrier is frequency modulated
with a sinusoidal signal such that the peak deviation is 6 kHz.
The frequency of modulating signal is 2 kHz. Calculate the
average power contained in the Bandwidth. [8]
Or
4. (a) Describe how Bessels functions are useful for determining the
bandwidth with proper mathematical expressions. [6]
(b) A carrier is frequency modulated by signal of 15 volt peak
and frequency of 3 kHz. The frequency deviation constant is
1 kHz/volt. Calculate the peak frequency deviation and modulation
index. [6]
(c) FM is superior to AM. Justify. [4]
5. (a) How we recover the FM signal using Phase Locked Loop
(PLL) ? [6]
(b) A receiver tunes signals from 550 to 1600 kHz with an IF
of 455 kHz. Find the frequency tuning range for the oscillator
section and for the RF section. Given a two section tuning
capacitor with a maximum of 350 pF/section. Find the padder
capacitor required in the oscillator section. Assume two point
tracking. [6]
(c) What are the different types of distortions that occur in a
typical diode detector circuit ? [6]
[3862]-170 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Compare between Envelope and Synchronous detection in
AM. [6]
(b) The load on an AM diode detector consists of a resistance
of 50 k in parallel with a capacitor of 0.01 F. Determine
the maximum modulation index that the detector can handle
without distortion when modulating frequency is :
(i) 7 kHz
(ii) 12 kHz. [6]
(c) With the help of block diagram explain superheterodyne FM
receiver. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive the expression to calculate effective noise for series
and parallel connection of resistors. [6]
(b) The following Fig. 1 shows the tandem connection of three
links. Calculate output signal to noise ratio. [6]
Fig. 1 : Tandem Connection
(c) Explain different types of Noise. [4]
Or
8. (a) An amplifier circuit having noise figure of 9 dB and power
gain of 25 dB is followed by mixer having noise figure of
16 dB. Calculate overall noise figure and equivalent noise
temperature at the input of the combination. [8]
S/N = 60 dB
S/N = 80 dB S/N = 30 dB
[3862]-170 4
(i) Avalanche Noise
(ii) Burst Noise
(iii) Flicker Noise
(iv) Partition Noise. [8]
9. (a) Explain the importance of Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis network
in the performance of FM system. [8]
(b) Describe the performance of baseband system in presence of
noise. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain the performance of DSB-SC in presence of noise. [8]
(b) Describe in detail capture effect and FM threshold effect. [8]
11. (a) State and prove Sampling theorem in time domain. [6]
(b) With the help of block diagram explain differential PCM. [6]
(c) Describe with suitable example band limited and time limited
signal. [6]
Or
12. (a) With the help of block diagram explain Adaptive Delta
Modulation. [6]
(b) Explain in detail types of Sampling and distortions. [8]
(c) Describe distortions present in Delta Modulation. [4]
[3862]-171
S.E. (Instrumentation and Control) (First Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
FUNDAMENTALS OF INSTRUMENTATION
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain the requirement and contents of calibration certificate
and calibration report in calibration process. [8]
(b) What is input, output impedance and loading effect in
measurement systems ? [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-171 2
Or
(i) Drift
(ii) Reproducibility
(iii) Dead zone
(iv) Hysteresis.
(b) A moving coil voltmeter has a uniform scale with 100 divisions.
The full scale reading is 200 V and 1/10 of scale division can
be estimated with fair degree of certainty. Determine the resolution
of the instrument. [4]
(c) A 0.300 V voltmeter has an accuracy of +2% of full scale
deflection. What would be the range of readings if true voltage
is 30 V ? [4]
3. (a) Explain the construction and working of single phase induction
type energymeter. [8]
(b) Design the Aryton (universal) shunt to provide an ammeter with
current ranges of 1 A, 5 A and 10 A. A basic meter with internal
resistance of 50
W
and full scale deflection current of 1 mA
is to be used. [8]
[3862]-171 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) For the series type ohmmeter prove that : [8]
I R
S ,
I R R
m h
fs x h
= =
+
where, I
m
is the current when measuring the unknown resistance R
x
.
I
fs
is the full scale deflection current.
R
h
is the half scale deflection meter.
(b) Explain how D.C. potentiometer can be used for calibration of
voltmeter. [8]
5. (a) A resistance bridge has the configuration shown in Fig. 1, in
which R
1
= 120.4
W
, R
2
= 119.0
W
and R
3
= 119.7
W
:
(i) What resistance must R
4
have for balancing of the bridge ?
(ii) If R
4
has a value of 121.2
W
and if the input voltage is
12 V d.c., what is the output voltage of the bridge, assuming
it to be a voltage sensitive bridge. [8]
Fig. 1
[3862]-171 4
(b) With the help of neat diagram derive the balancing condition
in Hays bridge and explain how it can be used for measurement
of quality factor of a coil. [8]
(c) Differentiate voltage and current sensitive bridges. [2]
Or
6. (a) The Schering bridge as shown in Fig. 2 balances under the following
conditions : [10]
C
2
= 400 pf, R
4
= 10
k
R
3
= 1
kW
, C
4
= 100 pf
The bridge is driven by 1 kHz sine source. Find unknown
capacitance C
1
and its internal resistance r
1
. Find the dissipation
factor.
Fig. 2
[3862]-171 5 P.T.O.
(b) Derive equation for sensitivity in Wheatstone bridge and show
that the bridge sensitivity is maximum when ratio arm is equal
to 1. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain how phase can be measured using digital phase-meter. [8]
(b) With the help of neat block diagram explain the working of DMM
with typical specifications. [8]
Or
8. (a) List the advantages of Digital Instruments over analog instru-
ments. [8]
(b) Write a note on Digital Tachometer. [8]
9. (a) Explain dual trace and dual beam oscilloscope. [8]
(b) How can phase and frequency be measured using X-Y mode of
dual trace oscilloscope ? [8]
(c) Explain Z-modulation in CRO. [2]
Or
10. (a) What is the role of a time base generator in CRO ? [8]
[3862]-171 6
(b) An electrically deflected CRT has a final anode voltage of
2000 V and parallel deflecting plates 1.5 cm long and 5 mm
apart. If the screen is 50 cm from the centre of deflecting plates,
find : [8]
(i) beam speed
(ii) the deflection sensitivity of the tube
(iii) the deflection factor of the tube
(Mass of electron = 9.1 10
31
kg, Charge of electron =
1.6 10
19
C)
(c) In XY mode if the frequency of signal applied to X channel is
200 Hz and Y channel is 100 Hz, then draw the Lissajous pattern
obtained on the CRT screen. [2]
11. (a) The chart speed of a recording instrument is 10 mm/s. If the
time base of the recorded signal is 20 mm, what is the frequency
of the recorded signal ? [8]
(b) How are triangular and sine waves generated in a function
generator ? [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain different marking mechanism used in recorders. [8]
(b) Explain the difference between strip chart recorder and X-Y
recorder. [8]
[3862]-172
S.E. (Instru.) (First Semester EXAMINATION, 2010
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITI
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. Define and explain the following characteristics of operational
amplifier : [16]
(a) Slew rate
(b) CMRR
(c) Gain bandwidth product
(d) Drift.
P.T.O.
[3862]-172 2
Or
2. (a) What is offset voltage of op-amp ? Explain experimental method
for measurement. [10]
(b) What is power supply rejection ratio ? What is its effect on
performance of op-amp ? [6]
3. (a) Derive equation for voltage gain of op-amp with voltage shunt
feedback. [10]
(b) Design a circuit for non-inverting amplifier with gain of 2.5. Assume
swing of op-amp is + 13 volts. What maximum input voltage can
be given so that op-amp will not saturate ? [8]
Or
4. (a) Define amplifier, buffer, attenuater. Which configurations of op-
amp are used for above said circuits ? [12]
(b) Prove that bandwidth of an op-amp increases with feedback
configuration. [6]
5. (a) Explain principle and working of averaging circuit using op-amp
for three input voltages : V
1
, V
2
, V
3
. Support your answer with
an application. [12]
(b) For a differential amplifier input resistances are of 10 kW and
feedback resistances are of 100 kW. Calculate output voltage of
the circuit where 8.5 volts are applied at non-inverting input
and 7.0 volts are applied at inverting input. Supply voltage for
the circuit is + 20 volts. [4]
[3862]-172 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Solve using op-amp circuit : [8]
V
OUT
= 2V
1
3V
2
+ 0.5V
3
.
(b) Derive equation for gain of instrumentation amplifier and
compare differential amplifier with instrumentation amplifier. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) What is Barkhausen criteria ? How does it help for analysis
of Wien Bridge oscillator ? Derive the equation for output frequency
and gain. [12]
(b) For a Schmitt trigger, UTP = 3.5 volts and LTP = 2.5 volts.
Calculate resistor values and V
(reference);
assume V
sat
=
+ 12 volts. [4]
Or
8. (a) Explain principle of precision full-wave and half-wave rectifier. [12]
(b) Write a short note on Window Detector. [4]
9. (a) How astable multivibrator using IC 555 works ? Why can it not
generate duty cycles less than 50% ? How is this problem
overcome ?
Justify your answer with derivation for astable multivibrator. [12]
(b) How is IC 555 timer used for voltage to frequency
converter ? [6]
[3862]-172 4
Or
10. (a) Define the following with their units for voltage regulator : [6]
(i) Line regulation
(ii) Load regulation
(iii) Drop-out voltage.
(b) Explain working principle of voltage regulator using an op-amp
and pass transistor. How does it regulate output voltage/load
voltage in case of variation in the unregulated input voltage. [12]
11. Explain the working of the following filters and draw their charac-
teristics : [16]
(i) Low pass
(ii) High pass
(iii) Band pass
(iv) Band reject filter.
Or
12. What is the difference in first order and second order Butterworth
low pass filter ? Explain with circuit diagram. [16]
[3862]-173
S.E. (I & C) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
PRINCIPLES OF SENSOR AND TRANSDUCERS
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer any 3 questions from each Section.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is calibration ? Explain standards available for
calibration. [8]
(b) Define instrument. Explain function of instrument. Compare
Null type and deflection type of instrument. [8]
Or
2. (a) Define measurement list and explain various types of errors
in measurement. [8]
(i) Accuracy
(ii) Precision
(iii) Fidelity
(iv) Hysteresis. [8]
3. (a) Explain Servo controlled dynamometer in detail. [8]
(b) A metallic diaphragm of thickness 3 mm used for a measurement
of differential pressure 2 Kg/cm
2
is required to give a deflection
P.T.O.
[3862]-173 2
of its centre by 1 mm. What should be its diameter if the
Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio of the element are 1,00,000
kg/cm
2
and 0.3 respectively. [8]
Or
4. (a) Draw and explain pressure measurement using diaphragm and
bellows. [8]
(b) A load cell consists of a solid cylinder of steel 30 cm diameter,
with four strain gauges bounded to it and connected in Wheatstones
bridge. If gauges are 120 each with a gauge factor of 2,
what is the sensitivity of load cell expressed in mv/N with
bridge excited by 1V dc ? The modulus of elasticity of steel
is 200 10
9
N/m
2
and Poissons ratio 0.3. [8]
5. (a) List different units of flow measurement. [2]
(b) Explain in detail viscosity to torque converter and level to
force converter. [6]
(c) A Rotameter is calibrated for metering a liquid of density
1000 kg/m
3
and has a scale ranging from 1 to 100 lit/min
if it intended to use this meter for metering the flow of gas
of density 1.5 kg/m
3
with a flow range between 20 to 2000
lit/min. Determine the density of new float, if the original one
has a density of 2000 kg/m
3
the shape and volume of both
floats assumed to be the same. [10]
Or
6. (a) Explain float element for level measurement. Draw and explain
level to pressure converter. [8]
(i) Kinematics viscosity
(ii) Specific viscosity
(iii) Newtonian fluid
(iv) Non-Newtonian fluid.
[3862]-173 3 P.T.O.
(c) A gas of density 0.52 kg/m
3
flow through a pipe of 8 cm
diameter. The flow is measured by a venturi tube 4 cm
diameter throat and U tube manometer containing mercury.
What is the flow for manometer reading of 10 cm. Take
Cd = 0.95. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) List resistive transducers for pressure measurement. Explain
any one in detail. [6]
(b) Explain bolo-meter in detail. [4]
(c) Calculate the capacitance of an air gap parallel plate capacitor
with plates 25 mm 25 mm and plate separation of 1 mm.
Calculate change in capacitance. As the movable plate is displaced
by 0.6 mm nearer, also calculate sensitivity. [8]
Or
8. (a) Explain with principle thickness measurement using LVDT with
a suitable diagram. [8]
(b) A linear resistance potentiometer is 40 mm long and is uniformly
wound with wire having resistance of 8 k under normal condition.
The slider is at the centre of potentiometer. Find the linear
displacement when the resistance of potentiometer as measured
by Wheatstones bridge for two cases is :
(i) 3850
(ii) 7560 .
Comment on direction of motion. If it is possible to measure
a minimum value of 10 resistance, find resolution of
potentiometer in mm. [10]
[3862]-173 4
9. (a) List various types of encoders. Explain encoder for angular
displacement measurement. [8]
(b) State piezoelectric phenomenon. Explain piezoelectric transducer
for force and pressure measurement. [8]
Or
10. (a) Draw and explain electro-magnetic flowmeter. State its
advantages and disadvantages. [8]
(i) Thermoelectric phenomenon
(ii) Hall effect and its application.
11. (a) Draw and explain feedback transducer system. [8]
(i) Data logger
(ii) Alpha numeric devices.
Or
12. (a) With suitable application explain analog and digital read out
systems. [8]
(b) Draw and explain any one self-balancing system. [8]
[3862]-174
S.E. (Instrumentation) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain block diagram of control systems in detail. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-174 2
(b) For the spring, damper and mass systems shown in Fig. 1, find
differential equations governing the systems and also find force-
voltage analogy. [12]
Fig. 1
Or
2. (a) Compare : [6]
(i) Feedback Vs. Feed forward
(ii) Time invariant Vs. Time variant
(iii) Causal and non-causal systems
B
2
k
2
x
2
B
1
x
1
k
1
f
M
1
M
2
[3862]-174 3 P.T.O.
(b) Apply force to current analogy and draw equivalent network for
Fig. 2. [12]
Fig. 2
3. (a) Reduce the block diagram and find C/R. [8]
Fig. 3
(b) Define transfer function. Give merits and demerits of transfer
function. [8]
k
3
x
3
M
3
B
2
B
3
B
1
x
2
k
1
k
2
M
1
x
1
F
M
2
C
R
G
1
G
2
G
3
G
4
H
2
B
[3862]-174 4
Or
4. (a) State Masons Gain formula. Find T.F. (Transfer Function) using
the same. [8]
Fig. 4
(b) Compare block diagram technique and signal flow graph with
advantages and disadvantages (minimum 4 points with
explanation). [8]
5. (a) The block diagram of the servo system is shown in Fig. 5. Determine
the characteristic equation of the system. Hence, calculate the
following when the unit step I/P is given : [12]
(i) Undamped natural frequency (w
n
)
(ii) Damped frequency of oscillation (w
d
)
(iii) Damping ratio and damping factor
(iv) Maximum overshoot (M
p
)
G
1
G
5
G
2
G
3
G
6
G
8
G
7
G
6
H
6
H
3
C(s)
R(s)
[3862]-174 5 P.T.O.
(v) Settling time (t
s
)
(vi) Number of cycle. Complete before the output is settled
within 2% and 5% of final value.
Fig. 5
(b) Define pole, zero, type and order of control system. [4]
Or
6. (a) Define : [8]
(i) Rise time
(ii) Peak time
(iii) Peak overshoot
(iv) Settling time
(b) A unity gain feedback system has transfer function : [8]
40( 2)
G( ) .
( 1) ( 4)
s
s
s s s
+
=
+ +
Determine :
(i) Type of the system
C(s)
R(s)
20
s/6
1.2
( 1) (0.2 1) s s s + +
[3862]-174 6
(ii) All error coefficients
(iii) Error for ramp input with magnitude 4.
SECTION II
7. (a) Define stability and find the stability of the following :
5 4 3 2
1 G( ) H( ) 2 2 3 15 0 s s s s s s s + = + + + + + =
using R-H criteria (Routh Hurwitz) [8]
(b) Draw root loci, following are the details of the system :
G( )H( ) .
( 3) ( 5)
k
s s
s s s
=
+ +
Calculate all the parameters and comment on stability. [10]
Or
8. (a) Find the range of k for which systems become stable for
consideration system is given below : [8]
2
G( ) .
( 2) ( 4) ( 6 25)
k
s
s s s s
=
+ + + +
(b) The open loop transfer function (T.F.) of system is given
below :
( 6)
G( )H( )
( 4)
k s
s s
s s
+
=
+
H(s) = 1, draw root locus and comment on stability. All required
details needs to calculate and draw on root locus plot. [10]
[3862]-174 7 P.T.O.
9. (a) Correlate frequency domain specifications with time domain
specifications. [6]
(b) Draw bode plot of the following open loop transfer function :
3.5
G( )
(1 0.2 ) (1 0.05 )
s
s s s
=
+ +
.
Find gain margin and phase margin along with your comments
on stability. [10]
Or
10. (a) Define : [6]
(i) Bandwidth
(ii) Resonant frequency
(iii) Resonant peak.
(b) Draw Bode plots for the following open loop transfer function.
Indicate gain and phase margins :
1
G( ) H( )
( 1) ( 5)
s s
s s s
=
+ +
.
Comment on stability. [10]
11. (a) The open loop transfer function of a unity feedback system is
given by :
5
G( ) H( )
( 1) ( 2)
s s
s s s
=
+ +
Draw the Nyquist plot and hence, find out whether the system
is stable or not. [10]
[3862]-174 8
(b) Define : [6]
(i) State
(ii) State variable
(iii) State vector
(iv) State space
Or
12. (a) Explain the advantages of state space approach over classical
methods. [6]
(b) Plot Nyquist stability plot for the system given below : [10]
20
G( ) H( ) .
(1 0.1 ) (1 0.5 )
s s
s s s
=
+ +
[3862]-175
S.E (Instrumentation & Control)
DIGITAL TECHNIQUES
(2008 Course)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Convert the following : [8]
(i) (77466)
8
to Hexadecimal
(ii) (BACF9.61C)
16
to Binary
(iii) (11001111011110110111)
2
to Hexadecimal
(iv) (111011101111011101111)
2
to Octal
(b) Simplify the following by using tabular method : [8]
F(W, X, Y, Z) = m (0, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13)
Or
2. (a) Perform the following arithmetic functions : [8]
(i) (1BDD)
16
+ (D279)
16
P.T.O.
[3862]-175 2
(ii) (7276)
8
+ (1711)
8
(iii) (765)
8
(423)
8
+ (66)
10
.
Write the answer in hexadecimal form.
(b) What is the advantage of encoding a decimal number in
BCD as compared with straight binary ? What is a
disadvantage ? [4]
(c) Write the next four numbers in Hexadecimal counting
ACEFD, ACEFE, ,,,, [4]
3. (a) Define : [8]
(i) SAM
(ii) SRAM
(b) Convert the SR flip-flop to D flip-flop. [6]
Draw the truth table, excitation table, K-map and connection
diagram for each conversion.
(c) What is programmable output polarity ? [2]
Or
4. (a) Answer the following questions : [8]
(i) Define Edge Trigger Circuits and Level Trigger Circuits.
(ii) Write one application in detail of Edge Trigger FFs and
Level Trigger FFs.
(b) Convert the following : [8]
(i) JK flip-flop to D flip-flop
(ii) D flip-flop to T flip-flop.
Draw the truth table, excitation table, K-map and connection
diagram for each conversion.
[3862]-175 3 P.T.O.
5. (a) Compare counter IC74193 and IC7493. [10]
(b) Design MOD-52 counter using 7492 counter IC. Explain the
reset logic. [8]
Or
6. (a) Design MOD-12 upcounter by using 74193IC. The counter should
start counting from 0010. Explain the reset logic for the
same. [8]
(b) Design MOD-123 using 7490 counter IC. Explain the reset logic
for the same. [10]
SECTION II
7. (a) Define Decoder and explain one application of Decoder in
detail. [8]
(b) A certain multiplexer can switch one of 32 data input pins
to its output. How many different input does this MUX
have ? [4]
(c) Can more than one decoder output be activated at onn time ?
Justify your answer. [4]
Or
8. (a) What is the difference between PAL and PLA ? [4]
(b) Write two advantages of GAL devices over PAL devices. [4]
(c) What are the reasons for having registers with common
I/O lines ? [4]
(d) How does Priority Encoder differ from Ordinary Encoder ? [4]
9. (a) Describe the difference between current sinking and current
sourcing. [6]
(b) In which TTL input state does the largest amount of input
current flow ? Justify your answer. [6]
(c) Why are MOS ICs especially sensitive to static charges ? [4]
(d) Which IC package can be plugged into sockets ? [2]
[3862]-175 4
Or
10. (a) Which TTL series use a special diode to reduce switching time ?
How does it work ? [8]
(b) Which TTL series is best at high frequencies ? [2]
(c) What can happen if a TTL output is connected to more unit
loads than its output rating specification ? [4]
(d) What is the function of interface circuit ? [4]
11. (a) Name the basic blocks that make up a digital clock
circuit. [6]
(b) What is the best sample interval setting to use if the pulse
counter has four BCD stages and the I/P frequency is between
2 and 8 MPPS ? [4]
(c) Write a short note on Alarm Annunciator. [6]
Or
12. (a) Describe in detail the Hours Section of digital clock with the
hlep of circuit diagram. [10]
(b) The unknown frequency is 6924 pulses per second (PPS). The
counter is cleared to the zero state initially. Determine the
counter reading after a sampling interval of : [6]
(i) 0.5 second
(ii) 0.1 second
(iii) 10 milliseconds.
[3862]-176
S.E. (Instrumentation) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
APPLIED ELECTRONICS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) How a field effect transistor will be used as a analog
switch ? Explain with circuit diagram. [8]
(b) Outputs of three analog sensors are to be multiplexed. Let
the output be 1 V, 2 V, 3 V. Draw the circuit using IC CD
4051. Which address lines will you select these inputs ? Elaborate
your answer. [8]
Or
2. (a) List different types of analog to digital converters. Which
is best among all as far as accuracy is considered ?
Why ? [8]
(b) With neat circuit diagram explain how the fastest analog to
digital converter works. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-176 2
3. (a) What is the need of digital to analog converters ? How are
they classified ? [8]
(b) How can a typical DAC be constructed using operational
amplifier ? Explain. [8]
Or
4. (a) Is output of a DAC voltage or current ? What is monotonacity
of a DAC ? What will happen if a DAC is not
monotonous ? What is usual input voltage range applied to
DACs ? [8]
(b) How to find resolution of a DAC ? How is it an important
characteristics ? [8]
5. (a) Assume that a silicon controlled rectifier is connected in series
with a resistive load R
L
. Assume that AC input voltage is
applied across this circuit. Explain how it will work if
firing pulse is applied at 30 degrees, 90 degrees with
respect to start of input pulse. Draw required input output
waveforms. [9]
(b) Where are devices like SCR, DIAC, TRIAC used ? Explain
any one aplication of each in detail. [9]
[3862]-176 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) What is snubber circuit ? Elaborate your answer with
circuits. [9]
(b) What are the differences between MOSFET and
IGBT ? [9]
SECTION II
7. (a) List different types of batteries. List at least four applications
of batteries. [8]
(b) What is AH of a battery ? What is its importance ?
Explain. [8]
Or
8. (a) Which are different battery charging techniques ? Explain any
one. [8]
(b) Write a short note on solar cells. [8]
9. (a) What are different types of voltage to current converters ?
Explain any one in detail. [8]
(b) How does a typical voltage controlled oscillator work ?
Explain. [8]
Or
10. (a) Design a circuit in which zero to 100 milli volt is to be converted
into zero to 5 volts. [8]
(b) Write a short note on phase-locked loop. [8]
[3862]-176 4
11. (a) What is the need of modulation ? List the types of modulation.
Do you know the typical frequency at which FM channel is
usually set on a radio set ? Is FM channel concerned with
signal or carrier frequency ? [10]
(b) How are signals represented using ASK and FSK ? Explain
with a typical sequence. [8]
Or
12. (a) List different types of signal isolators. What is MCT2E ? How
is it used ? [9]
(b) Explain Time Division Multiplexing. [9]
P.T.O.
[3862]-177
S.E. (Instru.) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
TRANSDUCERS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (A) List different blocks of signal conditioning system and explain
any two. [6]
(B) Enlist the different methods to measure resistance. Justify
Wheatstone bridge is preferred for resistive sensor at a first
stage of signal conditioning circuit. [6]
(C) Explain Radiation pyrometer with a neat diagram. [6]
[3862]-177 2
Or
2. (A) Discuss with neat circuit diagram how LM35 can be used in
Thermocouple signal conditioning circuits for cold junction
compensation. [8]
(B) Temperature of a plating operation must be measured for
control temperature within the range of 500C to 600C.
Develop a measuring system with J type thermocouple that
scales that temp. into 0 to 5 V. Assume ref. junction temperature
is 0C.
At T
1
= 500C V
th1
= 27.39 mV
At T
2
= 600C V
th1
= 33.11 mV. [10]
3. (A) With neat block diagram discuss the conversion of strain in
to frequency signal. [8]
(B) Explain charge amplifier in detail. [8]
Or
4. (A) Explain different design and excitation considerations for strain
gauge signal conditioning in detail. [8]
(B) Explain working principle of Speed pick-up along with signal
conditioning blocks. [8]
[3862]-177 3 P.T.O.
5. (A) Explain absolute encoder and its disadvantages over incremental
encoder. [8]
(B) Explain optical proximity sensors in detail. [8]
Or
6. (A) Explain Stroboscope with a neat diagram. [8]
(B) With neat sketch discuss the signal conditioning for optical
sensors to have voltage as output. [8]
SECTION II
7. (A) Explain level measurement using Load Cell along with suitable
signal conditioning blocks and necessary assumption. [8]
(B) Explain advantages of Nuclear level gauges over other level
gauges. [8]
Or
8. For certain level measurement system electromechanical level gauge
is used to measure level. The output of sensor is 0 to 10 kohm
for the level of 0 to 10 meter. Design suitable signal conditioning
circuit for having output 4 to 20 mA. [16]
9. (A) Explain working of electromagnetic flow meter along with excitation
and construction consideration. [8]
[3862]-177 4
(B) Explain working principle of DP cell along with necessary signal
conditioning blocks. [8]
Or
10. (A) Explain working principle of Turbine flow meter. What is
nature of output signal ? How can it be converted into
current ? [8]
(B) Give excitation considerations for electromagnetic flow
meter. [4]
(C) Explain working principle of ultrasonic flow meter with a neat
diagram. [4]
(i) Piezoelectric Microphone
(ii) Conductivity Meter.
Or
(i) Glass electrode
(ii) Piezoelectric vibration sensor.
[3862]-178
S.E (Instrumentation & Control)
PHOTONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION
(2008 Course)
SECTION I
1. (a) Draw electromagnetic spectrum of light and show different ranges
of visible, Infrared regions and state advantages of it. [8]
(b) Describe wavelength in meter and . Light is having frequency
range of 5.4 10
13
Hz. [4]
(c) Explain Snells law. [4]
Or
2. (a) Explain interaction of light with matter and various properties
of light by using diagram. [12]
(b) Refractive index of plasma tube is 1.4. Calculate the Brewsters
angle to get dominant laser beam. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-178 2
3. (a) Define the following terms (any three) : [8]
(i) Rerated MSCP
(ii) Metastable state
(iii) Illuminance
(iv) Irradiance.
(b) Explain units used for calculation of point light source in
photometry and radiometry. [8]
Or
4. (a) Explain principle and working of gas discharge lamp with suitable
diagram. Enlist the advantages and applications. [8]
(b) Explain principle of types of spectra for line, band and continues
light source by giving its examples. [8]
5. (a) Explain principle and working of semiconductor laser with the
help of neat diagram and its application. [9]
(b) What do you understand by a term radiation pattern of light
emitting diode ? Suggest experimental set up and procedure
to draw it. [9]
Or
6. (a) Explain basic steps required for generations of laser beam.
What are different properties of laser ? State advantages and
drawbacks of laser. [9]
(b) Explain working of light emitting diode. Draw the LED
[3862]-178 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) What are the types of thermal detector and quantum detector
used in optical system ? Explain working principle of both
detectors with suitable examples. [12]
(b) Explain Bolometer with suitable diagram. [4]
Or
8. (a) Differentiate between PIN and Avalanche photodiode with
diagram. [8]
(b) Explain in detail working of photomultiplier tube. [8]
9. (a) What is the role of grating in optics ? Explain in
detail. [8]
(b) Differentiate the following : [8]
(i) Dispersion prism and reflection prism
(ii) Absorption filter and interference filter.
Or
10. Write short notes on (any four) : [16]
(i) Lenses
(ii) Beam splitter
(iii) Polarizer
(iv) Prism
(v) Grating
(vi) Mirrors
[3862]-178 4
11. Explain working principle of the following with suitable diagram : [18]
(i) Astronomical telescope
(ii) Abbes refractometer.
Or
12. Describe the following (any three) : [18]
(i) Microscope
(ii) Monocromator
(iii) Photographic lenses
(iv) Optical projection system
(v) Cameras.
P.T.O.
[3862]-179
S.E. (Instrumentation & Control) (Second Sem.)
EXAMINATION, 2010
DRIVES AND CONTROL
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain with the help of a neat diagram the constructional
details of DC generator. [8]
(b) Derive the EMF equation for DC generator. [8]
Or
2. (a) Explain in detail the significance of back EMF. [8]
[3862]-179 2
(b) A 4 pole lap connected 220 V shunt motor has 600 armature
conductors. It takes 21 A on full load. The flux/pole is
0.05 Wb. The armature and field resistance are 200 W and
0.1 W respectively. Contact drop per brush is 1 Volt. Calculate
the speed of the motor. [8]
3. (a) Derive the EMF equation of the alternator. [8]
(b) A 3-phase four-pole alternator has a stator winding with
9 conductors per slot. The armature has total 36 slots.
What will be the value of induced EMF when alternator is
driven at 1800 rpm with 0.04 Wb/pole flux. Assume full
pitch coil. [8]
Or
4. (a) Explain the principle of working and production of rotating
magnetic field in case of induction motor. [8]
(b) Explain in detail with neat diagram the necessity of a starter
for induction motors. [8]
5. (a) Explain in detail construction of stepper motor. Give the types
of stepper motor. [8]
(b) With the help of neat diagrams explain the characteristics of
various stepper motors. [10]
[3862]-179 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) What do you mean by servomotors ? Give its classification.
State the salient features of A.C. servomotors. [10]
(b) Explain the types of DC servomotors in detail. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain in detail the construction of SCR and also the necessity
of gate triggering in SCR. [8]
(b) With the help of characteristics, explain the different modes
of operation of the thyristor. [8]
Or
8. (a) Explain in detail the construction and operation of
MOSFETs. [8]
(b) Draw and explain the characteristics of TRIAC and DIAC. [8]
9. (a) Explain the principle of chopper operation. [8]
(b) Draw the different types of chopper circuits. [8]
Or
10. (a) With the help of circuit diagram explain the working of single-
phase half-bridge inverter. [8]
(b) Explain the working principle of full wave controlled
rectifier. [8]
[3862]-179 4
11. (a) Give the methods by which speed of the induction motors can
be varied. Explain any one in detail. [10]
(b) Write a short note on close loop control of induction motor. [8]
Or
(1) Variable Frequency Drive
(2) Slip power recovery system
(3) Chopper controlled DC drives.
P.T.O.
[3862]-182
S.E. (Printing) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
STRENGTH OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(iv) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts and
electronic pocket calculator is allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) Define and explain the following terms :
(i) Factor of safety
(ii) Modulus of rigidity
(iii) Bulk Modulus
(iv) Poissons Ratio. [8]
[3862]-182 2
(b) A steel rod of 3 cm diameter is enclosed centrally in a
hollow copper tube of external diameter 5 cm and internal
diameter 4 cm. The composite bar is then subjected to
axial pull of 45000 N. If the length of each bar is 15 cm,
determine :
(i) The stress in the rod and the tube
(ii) Load carried by each bar.
Take E for Steel = 2.1 10
5
N/mm
2
and E for copper =
1.1 10
5
N/mm
2
. [8]
Or
2. (a) Draw stress strain diagram for ductile materials. [8]
(b) A steel rod and two copper rods together supports a
load of 370 kN load. The cross-sectional area of steel rod
is 2500 mm
2
and each of copper rod is 1600 mm
2
. Find the
stress in the rods. Take E for Steel = 2 10
5
N/mm
2
and
E for copper = 1 10
5
N/mm
2
. Length of Cu rod = 15 cm
and length of steel rod = 25 cm. [8]
[3862]-182 3 P.T.O.
3. A beam AB of 8 m span is hinged at each end. It carries a uniformly
distributed load of 2 kN per metre, on the left half of the beam.
A point load of 25 kN act vertically downward at a distance of
6 m from left end. In addition the beam is also subjected to couples
of 20 kN-m in counter-clockwise direction at left hand support and
30 kN-m in clockwise direction at right hand support. Determine
the reactions at ends and draw shear force and Bending Moment
diagram indicating all the values. [18]
Or
4. A beam 10 m long and simply supported at each end, has a udl
of 1000 N/m extending from left end upto the centre of the beam.
There is also an anticlockwise couple of 15 kN-m at a distance
of 2.5 m from right end. Draw the shear force and bending moment
diagrams indicating all the values. [18]
5. (a) With usual notations prove that :

M E
.
I Y R
s
= =
[8]
[3862]-182 4
(b) A cast iron beam of I-section is shown in Fig. 1. The beam
is simply supported on a span of 5 m. If the tensile stress
is not to exceed 20 N/mm
2
, find the safe uniformly load
the beam can carry. Find also the maximum compressive
stress. [8]
80 mm
169.34 mm
90.66 mm
A
20 mm
200 mm
40 mm
20 mm
N
3
2
1
160 mm
Fig. 1
[3862]-182 5 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Prove with usual notations :

A
F .
I
y
z
b
=
[8]
(b) A beam of cross-section of an isosceles triangle is
subjected to a shear force of 30 kN at a section where base
width = 150 mm and height = 450 mm. Determine :
(i) Horizontal shear stress at the neutral axis.
(ii) The distance from the top of the beam where shear stress
is maximum.
(iii) Value of maximum shear stress. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive with usual notations Torsion formula. [8]
(b) A solid circular shaft and a hollow circular shaft whose inside
diameter is
3
4

of the outside diameter, are of the same
material, of equal lengths and are required to transmit a given
torque. Comparetheweightsofthesetwoshaftsifthemaximum
shear stress developed in the two shafts are equal. [8]
[3862]-182 6
Or
8. (a) Derive an expression for crippling load when both the ends
of the column are hinged. [8]
(b) A simply supported beam of length 4 metres is subjected to
a uniformly distributed load of 30 kN/m over the whole span
and deflects 15 mm at the centre. Determine the crippling
loads when this beam is used as a column with the following
conditions :
(i) one end fixed and other end hinged
(ii) both the ends pin jointed. [8]
9. (a) ExplaintheprocedureforMohrscirclefordeterminingprincipal
planes and principal stresses. [8]
(b) An unknown weight falls through a height of 10 mm on
a collar rigidly attached to the lower end of a vertical
bar 500 cm long and 600 mm
2
in section. If the
maximum extension of the rod is to be 2 mm, what is
the corresponding stress and magnitude of the unknown
weight ? Take E = 2 10
5
N/mm
2
. [8]
[3862]-182 7 P.T.O.
Or
10. (a) Explain theories of failure. [8]
(b) A weight of 10 kN falls by 30 mm on a collar rigidly attached
to a vertical bar 4 m long and 1000 mm
2
in section. Find
the instantaneous expansion of bar. Take E = 210 GPa. Derive
the formula you use. [8]
11. (a) Deriveanexpressionforslopeanddeflectionofabeamsubjected
to uniform Bending Moment. [8]
(b) A beam of length 8 m is simply supported at its ends.
It carries a uniformly distributed load of 40 kN/m as shown
in Fig. 2. Determine the deflection of the beam at its
mid points and also the position of maximum deflection. Take
E = 2 10
5
N/mm
2
and I = 4.3 10
8
mm
4
. [10]
40 kN/m
A
C
D
B
R
A
R
B
1 m 4 m 3 m
Fig. 2
[3862]-182 8
Or
12. (a) What is Macaulays method ? Find an expression for deflection
at any section of a simply supported beam with eccentric point
load using Macaulays method. [8]
(b) A beam of length 6 m is simply supported at its ends and
carries two point load of 48 kN and 40 kN at a dist. of
1 m and 3 m resp. from the left support. Find by Macaulays
method :
(i) Deflection under each load
(ii) Maximum deflection
(iii) The point at which max. deflection occurs.
Take E = 2 10
5
N/mm
2
and I = 85 10
6
mm
4
. [10]
[3862]-184
PRINTING DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer Q. 1. or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4 and Q. 5 or
Q. 6 from Section I and Q. 7 or Q. 8 Q. 9 or Q. 10
and Q. 11 or Q. 12, from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. Perform the following conversions stepwise : [18]
(a) (123.63)
10
to hexadecimal
(b) (32.25)
8
to Decimal
(c) (110011.11)
2
to Decimal
(d) (2497.50)
10
to Octal
(e) (2ADD)
16
to Octal
(f) (25.7A)
16
to Binary.
P.T.O.
[3862]-184 2
Or
2. (a) Design and draw a circuit for converting BCD code to Excess 3
code. Draw necessary truth table, K-map and simplified circuit
for the same. [10]
(i) Bar code and its applications in the field of Printing
Technology.
(ii) ASCII code [8]
3. (a) Simplify using Boolean algebra and realize the simplified equation
using Basic gates : [8]
(i) (A + B) (A + B)
(ii) (AB BC) AC +
(b) The functionality of a hand held machine is expressed
as :
(A, B, C, D) = (0, 2, 5, 6, 7, 13) + (8, 10, 15) f m d
Minimize using K-map and draw the simplified diagram. [8]
Or
4. (a) For the given Boolean expression : [8]
(i)
A B + AB + AC
Implement using NAND logic.
(ii) (A + B) (A + B + C)
Implement using NOR logic.
(b) Compare TTL, CMOS and ECL logic families on the basis of
the following : [8]
(i) Propagation delay
(ii) Noise margin
(iii) Power dissipation
For a portable handheld machine design which of the logic
family would be a best choice.
[3862]-184 3 P.T.O.
5. (a) Design a full adder using 2 half adders. Draw block diagram
to achieve addition of two eight bit numbers. [8]
(b) Using 2 s complement method perform the following
subtraction : [8]
(i) (42)
10
(68)
10
(ii) (25)
10
(16)
10
Or
6. (a) Covert the following decimal numbers to BCD and add
them : [8]
(i) (5337)
10
+ (7538)
10
(ii) (2355)
10
+ (2365)
10
(b) A printing machine has a digital section that consists of
combinational circuit with a 4 bit binary input and generates
outputs such that : [8]
(i) Output A0 = 1 if sum of all digits is 1 and carry = 0
(ii) Output A1 = 1 if sum of all bits is 0 and carry = 1
(iii) Output A2 = 1 if sum of all digits is 1 and carry = 1 and
(iv) Given that the circuit generates an output as sum = 1
and carry = 1, when all the four inputs are 1.
Design the digital section to achieve above condition.
SECTION II
7. (a) Draw and explain Master-Slave JK flip-flop with the help of
truth table. [8]
(b) Design and explain mod 6 counter. Draw a truth table and
timing diagrams for the same. [10]
[3862]-184 4
Or
8. (a) Explain 3 modes of operations of shift register IC 7495 using
diagrams. [8]
(b) Design and explain T type flip-flop. [6]
(c) Explain any one application of counter in printing. [4]
9. (a) What is the need of DAC ? Explain the working of any one
type of DAC with a neat diagram. [8]
(b) State the various types of displays. Explain seven segment
LED display and state any two application areas for the
same. [8]
Or
10. (a) What are PLDs ? State the types and advantages of PLDs.
Draw and explain any one type of PLD. [8]
(b) What are memories ? State and explain various types of
memories. [8]
11. (a) Compare and contrast between Digital camera and Digital
Scanner. [8]
(b) Write short notes on (any two) : [8]
(i) Joystick
(ii) Floppy Disk
(iii) Keyboard
Or
(a) Printer classification and application areas
(b) Operation of mouse
(c) Input-Output devices of a computer
(d) Serial and Parallel ports
(e) CDs
P.T.O.
[3862]-185
TECHNOLOGY OF PRINTING MATERIALS (Theory)
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) All questions are compulsory.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (A) Explain the specific properties of metals when selected as an
image carrier in various printing processes. [8]
(B) Describe the various types of Polyethylene with their
properties. [8]
Or
(A) Explain the specific properties of metals when selected as an
ink transfer mechanisms in various printing processes. [8]
(B) Explain various types of Polypropylene with their properties. [8]
[3862]-185 2
2. (A) Explain the theory of adhesion with suitable examples. [8]
(B) Explain the procedure of preparing the screen by Direct-Indirect
photographic method. [8]
Or
(A) Explain the procedure of preparing the screen by Chromoline
photographic method. [8]
(B) Explain the role of various ingredients of fountain solution used
in the lithography. [8]
3. (A) Explain vehicles used in printing ink with properties. [9]
(B) Explain the classification of pigments used in printing ink. [9]
Or
(A) Explain any two methods by which printed ink dry on
substrate. [9]
(B) Explain the term Rheology of printing inks. [9]
SECTION II
4. (A) Explain the importane of determining the dispersion of pigment
in the vehicle while manufacturing the ink. [8]
(B) Describe any two procedures of determining top and bottom
side of paper. [8]
[3862]-185 3 P.T.O.
Or
(A) Explain the difference between subjective and objective methods
of testing. [8]
(B) Describe any two procedures of determining machine and cross
direction of paper. [8]
5. Explain any two in detail : [16]
(i) Explain the term Paper per capita consumption.
(ii) State the importance of paper products and export potential
of India for paper products.
(iii) State importance of fillers in paper and explain the properties
to be achieved in paper.
(iv) Name the different finishes obtained on the surface of paper
and explain MG finish paper.
Or
(A) Comment on any two : [8]
(i) Soft wood and Hard wood
(ii) Chemical pulp
(iii) Mechanical and Ground wood pulp.
(B) Explain with the help of graph, importance of beating influencing
the quality of paper. [8]
[3862]-185 4
6. (A) Draw a diagram of Multivat cylinder mould machine and state
the importance in duplex and triplex board. [10]
(B) Write the advantage of Uniflow machine in the production of
duplex board. [8]
Or
(A) Explain in detail the importance of moisture content in paper
for the printing industry. [10]
(B) Comment on any two : [8]
(i) Thickness of paper
(ii) Acidity (pH) of paper
(iii) Brightness of paper
(iv) Coated paper
(v) Recycled paper.
[3862]-186
S.E. (Printing) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND UTILIZATION
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain with neat diagrams characteristics of d.c. motors. [8]
(b) A lap wound d.c. shunt generator having 80 slots with
10 conductors per slot generates at no load an e.m.f. of 400 V,
when running at 1000 rpm. At what speed should it be rotated
to generate a voltage of 220 V on open circuit ? [8]
Or
2. (a) Explain three point starter in d.c. shunt motor in detail with
its necessity. [8]
(b) A 25 kW, 250 V d.c. shunt generator has armature and field
resistance of 0.06 and 100 respectively. Determine the
total armature power developed when working :
(i) As generator delivering 25 kW output and
(ii) As motor taking 25 kW input. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-186 2
3. (a) Derive equations of power and torque for three-phase induction
motor. [8]
(b) The rotor resistance and standstill reactance of a 3-ph induction
motor are respectively 0.015 and 0.09 per phase
(i) What is p.f. of motor at start ?
(ii) What is p.f. at a slip of 4% ?
(iii) If the number of poles is 4, the supply frequency is
50 Hz and the standstill e.m.f. per rotor phase is
110 V, find out the full load torque. Take full load slip
as 4%. [8]
Or
4. (a) Explain with neat diagram construction and working of shaded
pole induction motor. [8]
(b) The power input to the rotor of a 400 V, 50 Hz, 6-pole
3-ph induction motor 75 kW. The rotor e.m.f. is observed to
make 100 complete alternations per minute. Calculate (i) slip
(ii) Rotor speed (iii) Rotor copper losses per phase (iv) Mechanical
power developed and (v) the rotor resistance per phase if the
rotor current is 60 A. [8]
5. (a) Explain in detail of selection of motors depending on load
(b) Explain a.c. servomotor in detail with applications. [10]
Or
6. (a) Explain advantages of electrical drive. What do you mean by
individual and group drive. [8]
(b) Explain special features of synchronous motors. [10]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain in detail various types of Electric encoders, Photo cells,
Micro switches, Proximity switches. [8]
[3862]-186 3 P.T.O.
(b) A balanced star connected load is supplied from a symmetrical
3-phase, 440 V, 50 Hz supply system. The current in each
phase is 20 A and lags behind its phase voltage by an
angle 40.
Calculate :
(i) Phase voltage
(ii) Load parameters
(iii) Total power and
(iv) Readings of two wattmeters,
connected in the load circuit to measure the total power. [8]
Or
8. (a) Explain with neat diagram for reactive power measurement
using two wattmeter method. [8]
(b) Power input to a 3-phase 440 V, 37.3 kW induction motor
whose efficiency and power factor are respectively 88% and
0.82 is to be measured by two wattmeter method. Find the
readings of both the wattmeters and the full load line current
drawn by the motor. [8]
9. (a) Explain any two methods of temperature control of induction
furnaces. [8]
(b) A 20 kW, 1-, 220 V resistance oven uses a circular nichrome
wire for its heating element. If the wire temperature is not
to exceed 1100C and the temperature of the charge to be
400C. Calculate the size and length of the wire required. Assume
radiating efficiency = 0.6, emissivity = 0.9 and specific resistivity
of wire material is 1.09 10
6
m. [8]
[3862]-186 4
Or
10. (a) Explain with neat diagram of resistance heating with its working
principle. [8]
(b) A piece of an insulating material is to be heated by dielectric
heating. The size of the piece is 12 cm 12 cm 3 cm.
A frequency of 20 MHz is used and the power absorbed is
450 W. If the material has a relative permittivity of 5 and
a power factor of 0.05. Calculate the voltage necessary for
heating and current that flows in the material.
If the voltage were limited to 1700 V, what will be the frequency
to get the same loss ? [8]
11. (a) Explain the safety procedures and maintenance procedures
followed by printing industry. [8]
(b) A light source having an intensity of 400 C
p
in all directions
is fitted with a reflector so that it directs 80% of its light
along a beam having a divergence of 15. Determine the average
illumination produced on a surface normal to the beam direction
at a distance of 8 meters. [10]
Or
12. (a) Explain Inverse Square law and Lamberts Cosine law with
requirements of good lighting scheme. [8]
(b) A 500 W lamp having M.S.C.P. of 800 is suspended 3 m above
the working plane.
Calculate :
(i) Illumination directly below the lamp at the working plane
(ii) Lamp efficiency
(iii) Illumination at a point 2.4 m array on the horizontal plane
from vertically below the lamp. [10]
[3862]-189
S.E (Printing and Graphic Communication)
MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER
TECHNIQUES IN PRINTING
(2008 Course)
N.B. : (i) Q. No. 1 or Q. No. 2, Q. No. 3 or Q. No. 4, Q. No. 5
or Q. No. 6 from Section I and Q. No. 7 or Q. No. 8,
Q. No. 9 or Q. No. 10, Q. No. 11 or Q. No. 12 from
Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What are different registers available in 8085 microprocessor ?
Explain in detail the typical use of each register. [8]
(b) Explain the following pins of 8085 : [8]
TRAP ALE
RST 7.5 INTR
SID RESET
S0 and S1
P.T.O.
[3862]-189 2
Or
2. (a) Draw and explain the block diagram of 8085 in detail. [10]
(b) State and explain different buses available in 8085
microprocessor. [6]
3. (a) Explain unconditional jump and different conditional jump
instructions in 8085. [10]
(b) Explain various addressing modes of 8085 with proper
example. [8]
Or
4. (a) Explain what operation will take place when the following
instructions are executed : [10]
(i) LHLD
(ii) MOV A, B
(iii) MVI B, 92H
(iv) ADI 59H
(v) DCR B
(b) What is stack memory ? What is the difference between stack
memory and conventional memory ? Explain the use of stack
memory in microprocessor. [8]
5. (a) Draw pin diagram of 8051 microcontroller and explain different
pins in detail. [10]
(b) Explain TMOD (Timer/Counter-mode control register) and
TCON(Timer/Counter-control /Status register) in 8051
microcontroller. [6]
[3862]-189 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Explain serial port control (SCON) register in 8051
(b) Explain program status word (PSW) in 8051 microcontroller. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain different addressing modes in 8051 microcontroller. [10]
(b) Explain the following instructions in 8051 : [6]
(i) ADD A, @ Rn
(ii) MOV A, data
(iii) MOV A, Rn
Or
8. (a) Explain any 4 logical operation instructions in 8051
(i) RS 232
(ii) IEEE 488
9. (a) Explain control word in 8255 programmable peripheral interface.
Explain mode 0 in 8255. [10]
(b) Draw and explain block diagram of 8253 programmable interval
timer (PIT). [8]
[3862]-189 4
Or
10. (a) Draw and explain pin diagram of 8251 programmable commu-
nication interface (USART). [10]
(b) Explain different priority modes in 8259 Programmable interrupt
controller. [8]
11. (a) Explain concept of PLC. [8]
(b) Explain stepper motor interfacing with 8085 microprocessor. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain application of PLC in the field of printing in detail. [8]
(b) Explain any one application of microprocessor 8085 in the field
of printing. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-190
S.E. (Printing) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
THEORY OF PRINTING MACHINES
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Define and explain the following :
(1) Kinematic Chain
(2) Inversion
(3) Degrees of freedom
(4) Flexible link
(5) Rigid link
(6) Machine. [6]
(b) Explain the inversion of Quadric cycle crank chain with neat
sketches. [10]
[3862]-190 2
Or
2. (a) Explain Ratchet and pawl arrangement with a neat sketch. [6]
(b) Explain the inversion of Double slider crank chain. [10]
3. Draw the velocity and acceleration for the mechanism shown in
the Fig. 1. Determine the velocity and acceleration of ram E
for the given position, if Crank OA rotates uniformly at
150 rpm.
OA = 150 mm, AB = 550 mm, BE = 350 mm, AC = 450 mm,
DC = 500 mm. [16]
Fig. 1
E
B
C
O
60
A
500 mm
D
5
5
0

m
m
2
0
0

m
m
[3862]-190 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. As shown in the Fig. 2, the crank OA makes 150 rpm. Find for
the given configuration.
The velocity and acceleration of piston P and the angular acceleration
of links ABC and CP.
OA = 150 mm, AB = 375 mm, AC = 400 mm, BC = 62.5 mm,
BQ = 200 mm, CP = 450 mm, QO = 62.5 mm. [16]
Fig. 2
5. The Fig. 3 shows a crank and slotted lever quick return
mechanism, in which the distance between the fixed centres O and
4
0
0
O
90
A
Q
62.5
C
B
P
[3862]-190 4
C is 210 mm. The driving crank CP is 105 mm long and it rotates
clockwise at 90 rpm. The length of the slotted link OD is
420 mm and the length of the link DE is 165 mm. The line
of stroke of ram E is horizontal and 205 mm above the fixed
centre C. At the instant when angle OCP is 110. Find the velocity
and acceleration of ram E. [18]
Fig. 3
D
P(Q)
110
C
O
Ram E
2
1
0
2
1
0
[3862]-190 5 P.T.O.
Or
6. The Fig. 4 shows an oscillating cylinder mechanism. The crank
OB rotates at speed of 300 rpm in anticlockwise direction. For
the position shown, determine the angular velocity and angular
acceleration of cylinder and velocity, acceleration of point A on
piston. Show Coriolis component of acceleration clearly.
OB = 150 mm, OC = 600 mm, AB = 400 mm. [18]
Fig. 4
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain the working of multiplate clutch with the help of neat
sketch and also state its application. [8]
(b) Derive the expression for torque transmitting capacity of a
single plate clutch with uniform wear and uniform pressure
theory. [8]
O
B
A
(
D
)
C
60
[3862]-190 6
Or
8. (a) Differentiate between hydrostatic and hydrodynamic
lubrication. [8]
(b) Explain the working of centrifugal clutch with neat sketch.
Also state its applications. [8]
9. (a) Explain with a neat sketch self energizing of brakes. [6]
(b) The rope of a winch crab supports a dead weight of
4500 kg mass and is wound round a barrel of 420 mm
diameter. A brake drum of 560 mm diameter is keyed to the
barrel shaft. A differential band brake act on the drum with
its two ends attached to pins on opposite sides of the fulcrum
of the block lever at 25 mm and 125 mm respectively. The
band embraces 70% of the circumference of the drum. The
coefficient of friction is 0.28. Find the least force required
to be applied at the end of the brake lever 1 m from the
fulcrum. [10]
[3862]-190 7 P.T.O.
Or
10. (a) Explain Pivoted block brake and double block brake. [6]
(b) A band and block brake having 14 blocks each of which subtends
an angle of 15 degrees at the centre is applied to a drum
of 1 m effective diameter. The drum and the flywheel mounted
on the same shaft weigh 20 kN and combined radius of gyration
is 500 mm. The two ends of the band are attached to pins
on opposite side of the brake lever at a distance of 30 mm
and 120 mm from the fulcrum. If the force of 200 N is applied
at a distance of 750 mm from the fulcrum find,
(i) Maximum braking torque
(ii) Angular retardation of the drum
(iii) Time taken by system to come to rest from the rated
speed of 360 rpm. The coefficient of friction between
the block and the drum is 0.25. [10]
[3862]-190 8
11. (a) Derive an expression for centrifugal tension for flat belt. [8]
(i) Crowning of pulleys
(ii) Slip and creep referred to belt drive. [10]
Or
12. (a) Derive an expression for limiting tension ratio for V belt
drive. [8]
(i) Law of belting
(ii) Initial tension in belt. [10]
[3862]-191
S.E. (Chem.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
CHEMISTRYI
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(iv) Useoflogarithmictables,sliderule,Molliercharts,electronic
SECTION I
1. (a) What are the postulates of molecular orbital theory ? Explain
the paramagnetic behaviour of O
2
molecule. [6]
(b) Sketch the shapes of the M.Os formed by the overlap of atomic
orbitals. [6]
(c) Classify the following compounds as aromatic and non-
aromatic : [4]
(i)
P.T.O.
[3862]-191 2
(ii)
(iii)
Fe
(iv)
N
Or
2. (a) What are the conditions necessary for delocalization ? Explain
the delocalization in benzene. [6]
(b) Give reasons :
(i) Guanidine is a strong base
(ii) Phenol is acidic in nature
(iii) Oxalic acid is stronger than formic acid. [6]
[3862]-191 3 P.T.O.
(c) Draw the orbital picture and show the relative order of stability
of free radicals and carbanions. [4]
3. (a) Give an comparative account for S
N
1 and S
N
2 reactions. [6]
(b) Explain why NO
2
group is deactivating and m-directing. [4]
(c) Predict the product : [6]
(i) CH
3
Br + CH
3
NH
2

(ii)
Cl
2 4
Fuming H SO
Heat

(iii) + C
15
H
13
OH
3
anhyd
AlCl

(iv) CH
3
COCl 2
NaNH
(v) CH
3
CH = CH
2
+ HI
(vi) (CH
3
)
3
CCl
Base
Polar Solvent
[3862]-191 4
Or
4. (a) Discuss the mechanism of Beckmanns rearrangement. [4]
(b) What is sulphonation ? Give the mechanism for sulphonation
of benzene. [6]
(c) Identify A and B in the following reactions :
(i) 6CH
3
CH=CH
2
+ B
2
H
6
A 2 2
6H O
B
(ii)
OH N N
+
A
(iii) CH
3
OCH
2
CH
3
Methoxide
A + B
(iv) C
6
H
5
CHO + BrCH
2
COOC
2
H
5
+
2
( ) Zn, ether
( ) H , H O
i
ii

A
(v) + CH
3
COCl
3
anhyd
AlCl

A + B
[3862]-191 5 P.T.O.
(vi) 2
Fe, Cl
A + B. [6]
5. (a) Whatareconductometrictitrations?Describebrieflythedifferent
types of conductometric titrations. [6]
(b) Discusstheinterferencesandlimitationsinflamephotometry. [4]
(c) Give reasons :
(i) The equivalent conductance of an aqueous solution of a
weak electrolyte increases on dilution but the specific
conductance decreases.
(ii) The equivalent conductance of a strong electrolyte changes
with its concentration. [6]
(d) Electrolytic specific conductance of 0.25 mol L
1
solution of
KCl at 25C is 2.56 10
2
ohm
1
cm
1
. Calculate its molar
conductance. [2]
Or
6. (a) What are ion-selective electrodes ? Describe the working and
construction of a glass electrode as a solid-state membrane
electrode. [4]
[3862]-191 6
(b) State and explain Kohlrauschs law. The ionic conductance
0
H
+
and
0
Cl
are 349.8 and 196.7 cm
2
ohm
1
equiu
1
respectively.
At 25C of water = 5.7 10
8
ohm
1
cm
1
. Calculate the
ionic product of water. Given
0
= . [6]
(c) What is the principle of flame photometry ? Describe the premix
or laminar flow burner. [4]
(d) Calculate the electrode potential of titration mixture when 90
ml of Ce
+4
is added during titration of 100 ml of 0.1 N Fe
+2
ion solution taken in flask against 0.1 N Ce
+4
ion solution
added from burette. [4]
(Given : E
0
1
= 0.785 volt, E
0
2
= 1.45 volt)
Fe
+2
Fe
+3
+ e
(E
0
1
= 0.785 volt)
Ce
+4
+ e
Ce
+3
(E
0
2
= 1.45 volt)
SECTION II
7. (a) Obtain rate equation for first order kinetics and give its
(b) Define the rate of chemical reaction. Explain the experimental
techniques for the rate determination. [6]
(c) For the decomposition of acetone dicarboxylic acid rate constant
is 2.46 10
5
at 273 K and 1.63 10
3
at 303 K. Calculate
the energy of activation of the reaction. [4]
Or
8. (a) Whatissteadystateapproximation?Howisitusefulinderiving
rate law for a photochemical reaction ? [6]
(b) Showthatinfirstorderreaction,timerequiredfor75%completion
is double the time required for 50% reaction completion. [6]
[3862]-191 7 P.T.O.
(c) The reaction 2HBr H
2
+ Br
2
is second order with rate
constant 1.2 10
5
liter per mole per sec. at 600 K. How
long will it take to decompose 40% if HBr is kept at 50 kPa
at 500 K in closed vessel. [4]
9. (a) Explain the principle, technique and applications of column
chromatography. [6]
(b) What is fuel cell ? Explain construction and working of polymer
electrolyte membrane fuel cell. [6]
(c) Define :
(i) Charge-discharge cycles
(ii) Energy density
(iii) Specific energy
(iv) Power density. [4]
Or
10. (a) Write a note on lithium batteries with various compositions. [6]
(b) What is gas chromatography ? Give its instrumentation. [6]
(c) State the applications of HPLC. [4]
11. (a) Give any one synthetic method and uses of the following
dyes :
(i) Phenolphthalein
(ii) Crystal violet. [6]
(b) Discuss the aromatic character of pyrrole by giving its orbital
and resonance structure. [6]
[3862]-191 8
(c) Write the chemical reactions for the following :
(i) Reductionofquinolinewithplatinumcatalystinthepresence
of CH
3
COOH.
(ii) Action of sodamide on pyridine.
(iii) Catalytic reduction of furan in presence of Nickel. [6]
Or
12. (a) Howaredyesclassifiedaccordingtotheirchemicalconstitution ?
Give specific example of each. [6]
(b) Write a note on Skraup synthesis of quinoline. [6]
(c) Complete the reaction : [6]
(i) + (CH
3
CO)
2
O
3
BF /0C
(ii)
N
+ CH
3
I
(iii)
N
+ CHCl
3
+ KOH
H
[3862]-193
S.E. (Chemical) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING MATERIALS
(2008 COURSE)
Section II
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Write the classification of Engineering Materials. [3]
(i) Malleability
(ii) Ductility
(iii) Hardness
(iv) Toughness.
(c) Explain Necking in brief. [5]
P.T.O.
[3862]-193 2
Or
2. (a) Define Poissons ratio and its applications. [3]
(b) Draw stress-strain curve showing clastic and plastic limit of
metal. [4]
(c) Define factor of safety and give its applications. [6]
(d) Define the term Resilience. [3]
3. What are the different types of Hardness testing methods ? Explain
any two methods in detail. [16]
Or
4. (a) Write a short note on Brinell Hardness Test. [6]
(b) Explain Impact test in detail. [10]
5. (a) Draw Iron-Iron carbide equilibrium diagram. [6]
(b) Explain various phases observed in Iron-Iron carbide equilibrium
diagram. [6]
(c) Explain different reaction involved in Iron-Iron carbide equi-
librium diagram. [6]
Or
(i) Insulations
(ii) Refractories
(iii) Types of steel.
(b) Explain the Rolling and Rivetting process in detail. [6]
[3862]-193 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) Give and explain any four types of corrosion. [12]
(b) Write a short note on Dry corrosion. [4]
Or
8. (a) Explain the different methods of prevention of corrosion. [10]
(b) What is an oxide film ? Explain its formation and growth
mechanism. [6]
9. Explain the following : [16]
(i) Vulcanization of rubber
(ii) Nylon-6
(iii) Applications of polymers
(iv) Stress relaxation.
Or
10. (a) Define polymerization. Explain addition and condensation
polymerization. [10]
(b) Define natural and synthetic polymers. [6]
11. (a) Write a short note on Vitrification process. [6]
(b) Define ceramic materials. Write applications of ceramic
materials. [6]
[3862]-193 4
(c) What are the different mechanical properties of ceramic.? [6]
Or
12. Write short notes on (any three) : [18]
(i) Glass and its types
(ii) Refractories
(iii) Applications of ceramic material
(iv) Cement
(v) Clays
(vi) Borosilicates.
[3862]-194
S.E. (Chemical) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
CHEMICAL PROCESS CALCULATIONS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) The flow rate of water through is pipe is reported as 15 cubic
feet per minute. Taking density of water as 1.0 gm/cm
3
, calculate
the mass flow rate in kg/sec. [4]
(b) The potential energy of a body at a height of 15 m is
2.0 kJ. If the body is moving at a velocity of 50 m/sec, what
is its kinetic energy ? [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-194 2
(c) The gas mixture has the following composition by volume :
Hydrogen 35.2%, Methane 14.8%, Ethylene 12.8%, Carbon dioxide
1.5%, Carbon monoxide 33.9% and Nitrogen 1.8%. Find the
molar volume of this gas mixture at 273 K and
101.3 kPa. [6]
Or
2. (a) A portland cement sample contained 20% SiO
2
by weight derived
from two silicate compounds, SiO
2
.2CaO and SiO
2
.3CaO that
are present in the cement in the mole ratio 3 : 4. Determine
the percent by weight of each silicate compound in the
cement. [8]
(b) An aqueous solution of K
2
CO
3
contains 50% K
2
CO
3
. The density
of solution is 1530 kg/m
3
. Determine : [8]
(i) Mole % of K
2
CO
3
in the solution
(ii) Molarity
(iii) Molality and
(iv) Normality of the solution.
3. (a) Acetone is recovered from acetone-air mixture containing 25%
acetone by volume, by scrubbing with water. Assume that air
is insoluble in water, determine the % of acetone, that is absorbed
in water if the gas mixture leaving the scrubber analyzes 5%
acetone. [6]
[3862]-194 3 P.T.O.
(b) The average molar mass of a flue gas sample is calculated
by two different engineers. One engineer use the correct molar
mass of 28 for N
2
and determines the average molar mass
to be 30.08, the other engineer, using an incorrect value of
14, calculate the average molar mass to be 18.74.
(i) Calculate the volume % of N
2
in the flue gases.
(ii) If the remaining components of the flue gases are CO
2
and O
2
, calculate the volume percentage of each of
them. [10]
Or
4. 1000 kg of mixed acid of composition 40% H
2
SO
4
, 45% HNO
3
and
15% H
2
O is to be produced by strengthening waste acid of composition
30% H
2
SO
4
, 36% HNO
3
and 34% H
2
O by weight. Concentrated sulphuric
acid of strength 95% and concentrated nitric acid containing 80%
are available for this purpose. How many kilograms of waste acid
and concentrated acids are to be mixed together ? [16]
5. A gas mixture consisting of 65% N
2
, 35% SO
3
by volume is admitted
to an absorption column at a rate of 4500 kg/hr. It is contacted
with a stream of 50% H
2
SO
4
flowing countercurrent to the gas
stream at the rate of 5000 kg/hr. The gases leave at 101.3 kPa.
Water lost with the exit gases exerts a partial pressure of 25 kPa.
If the concentrated acid leaving the bottom of the column contained
75% H
2
SO
4
, what % of entering SO
3
is absorbed and converted
to acid. [18]
[3862]-194 4
Or
6. A mixture of pure carbon dioxide and hydrogen is passed over a
nickel catalyst. The temperature of the catalyst bed is 588 K and
the ractor pressure is 2 MPa g. The analysis of the gases leaving
the reactor showed CO 57.1%, H
2
41.1%, CH
4
1.68% and CO 0.12%
(by volume) on a dry basis. The reactions taking place in the reactor
are :
CO
2
+ 4H
2
= CH
4
+ 2H
2
O
and
CO
2
+ H
2
= CO + H
2
O.
Find :
(a) the conversion of CO
2
per pass
(b) yield of CH
4
in terms of CO
2
reacted and
(c) the composition of the feed. [18]
SECTION II
7. (a) Pure methane is heated from 30C to 250C at atmospheric
pressure. Calculate heat added per kg of methane : [6]
C
p
= 19.249 + (52.113 10
3
)T + (11.973 10
6
T
2
)
kJ/kmol K.
[3862]-194 5 P.T.O.
(b) Calculate the energy required to dissociate one kilogram of
sodium bicarbonate at 298 K. [6]
2 NaHCO
3(s)
= Na
2
CO
3(s)
+ CO
2(g)
+ H
2
O
(g)
.
Given data : Std. Heat of formation at 298 K :
Component H
f
kJ/mol
(1) Na
2
CO
3(s)
1130.68
(2) NaHCO
3(s)
950.81
(3) H
2
O
(g)
241.82
(4) CO
2(g)
393.51
(c) Define :
(i) Heat of Reaction and
(ii) Adiabatic Reaction Temperature. [4]
Or
8. A pilot plant reactor was charged with 50 kg of naphthalene and
200 kg of sulphuric acid (98% by weight). The reaction was carried
out for 3 hrs and the reaction goes to completion. The product
distribution was found to be 18.6% mono-sulphonate naphthalene (MSN)
and 81.4% di-sulphonate naphthalene (DSN).
(i) Calculate the quantities of MSN and DSN naphthalene in
product.
(ii) Complete analysis of product. [16]
9. (a) A saturated mixture of CO
2
-water vapour comes out from the
straight cooler at 130 kPa, 40C before it is compressed. Find
the absolute humidity in the mixture. The vapour pressure
of water at 40C is 7.375 kPa. [8]
[3862]-194 6
(i) Dry Bulb temperature
(ii) Wet Bulb temperature
(iii) Relative humidity
(iv) Absolute humidity
(v) Dew point.
Or
10. (a) A solution of ethyl alcohol containing 8.6% alcohol is fed at
the rate of 1000 kg/h to a continuous distillation column. The
product (distillate) is a solution containing 95.5% alcohol. The
waste solution from the column carries 0.1% of alcohol. All
percentages are by mass. Calculate the mass flow rates of
top and bottom products in kg/h and the percentage loss of
alcohol. [10]
(b) A dryer is fed with wet solid to reduce the moisture content
from 80% to 15%. The product leaving the dryer is sent to
oven to reduce the moisture content to 2%. If 1000 kg of
wet solid is fed to the dryer, find out the weight of the products
leaving the dryer and oven. Also determine the amount of
water removed in dryer and in oven. [8]
11. Explain briefly : [16]
(a) Types and calorific values of fuels
(b) Tests for proximate analysis
(c) Calorific vaues of fuels
(d) Adiabatic flame temperature.
[3862]-194 7 P.T.O.
Or
12. A gas mixture consisting of 80% ethane and 20% oxygen is burned
in an engine with 100% excess air. 80% of the ethene goes to CO
2
,
10% to CO and 10% remains unburned.
Calculate the composition of the exhaust gases on :
(b) Wet basis and
(c) Dry basis. [16]
Data :
Atomic weight K = 39, Si = 28, Ca = 40, Na = 23, S = 32.
[3862]-195
S.E. (Chemical) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
CHEMISTRY-II
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.
(ii) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic
(iii) All questions are compulsory.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is an adsorption isotherm ? Explain the Freundlich
isotherm. [6]
(b) What are the types of catalysis ? Explain the heterogenous
catalysis with suitable examples. [6]
(c) Describe the adsorption and catalytic properties of Zeolites. [4]
Or
2. (a) Give the mechanisms of metal coordination compound catalysed
reactions [6]
(i) Methanol carbonylation
(ii) Photolysis of water. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-195 2
(b) Explain the terms :
(i) Activation energy
(ii) Enzyme catalysis. [4]
3. (a) Explain the primary, secondary and tertiary structures of
proteins. [6]
(b) What is a zwitter ion ? Describe the isolectric point. [6]
(c) Draw the open chain and ring structure of glucose. [4]
Or
4. (a) How does glucose react with :
(i) HNO
3
(ii) Acetic anhydride
(iii) Phenyl hydrazin. [6]
(b) Write a note on mutarotation. [6]
(c) What are polysaccharides ? Explain the properties of starch. [4]
5. (a) Give the principle and instrumentation involved in IR
spectroscopy. [6]
(b) State Lambert and Beer laws and derive the combined law
equation. [6]
[3862]-195 3 P.T.O.
(c) Calculate U.V. absorption maxima for the following : [6]
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
CH
3
CH
3
(iv)
O
[3862]-195 4
Or
6. (a) How will you distinguish the following pairs by UV spectroscopy : [6]
(i)
OH
and
O
(ii)
and
(iii)
and
CH
2
C
O
H
CH
2
C
O
(b) Deduce the structures of the following by IR spectroscopy : [6]
(i) C
4
H
8
O (1720 cm
1
)
(ii) C
3
H
5
N (2200 cm
1
)
CH
3
[3862]-195 5 P.T.O.
(c) (i) Discuss the transitions involved in UV spectroscopy. [4]
(ii) Explain Aniline shows hypsochromic shift in acidic medium. [2]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain crystal field splitting energy with respect to
octahedral complexes and calculate CFSE for [Fe(H
2
O)
6
]
2+
and
[Fe(CN)
6
]
4
. [6]
(b) (i) Using IUPAC nomenclature name the following :
(a) K
3
[Al(C
2
O
4
)
3
]
(b) [Cr(H
2
O)
6
]Cl
3
(c) [Cu(NH
3
)
4
]SO
4
. [3]
(ii) Write a note on chelates. [3]
(c) Give postulates of V.B.T. [4]
Or
8. (a) What are the elements of first transition series ? Explain the
following properties of 1st transition series :
(i) Colour
(ii) Catalytic property. [6]
(b) Find EAN in the following complexes :
(i) [Ni(NH
3
)
6
]
+
(ii) [Fe(CN)
6
]
4
(iii) [Cr(NH
3
)
6
]
2+
. [6]
(c) Give applications of CFT. [4]
[3862]-195 6
9. (a) Give the applications of biotechnology for :
(i) Bioenergy
(ii) Antibiotics. [6]
(b) Give the traditional and greener routes for synthesis of
(i) Ibuprofen
(ii) Indigodye
(iii) Adipic acid. [6]
(c) Give the scope and importance of biotechnology. [4]
Or
10. (a) State principles involved in green chemistry and explain any
three of them in detail. [6]
(b) Write a note on membrane bioreactor. [6]
(c) Write a note on bioenergy. [4]
11. (a) Define BOD. Deduce an expression for the first stage BOD. [6]
(b) What is meant by hazardous waste ? Discuss physical and
chemical treatment of hazardous wastes. [6]
(c) Write notes on the following :
(i) Reverse osmosis
(ii) Electrodialysis. [6]
[3862]-195 7 P.T.O.
Or
12. (a) Draw general layout of municipal waste water treatment plant
and explain preliminary treatment, primary treatment, secondary
treatment and tertiary treatment. [6]
(b) Discuss treatments for dairy industry waste water and paper
mill waste water in detail. [6]
(c) What way the dye industry waste water is peculiar ? Suggest
treatment methods for the same. [6]
[3862]-196
HEAT TRANSFER
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain in detail Modes of Heat Transfer. [6]
(b) Explain Dimensional Analysis in detail. [6]
(c) Calculate temperature at an interior point of the wall at a
distance 15 cm from inner surface of wall. The temperature
of the inner and outer surface are 200C and 80C respectively.
The thickness of the wall is 0.5 m. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-196 2
Or
2. (a) State and explain the following : [9]
(i) Fouriers law
(ii) Newtons law of cooling
(iii) Stefan Boltzmanns law.
(b) Give the physical significance of the following : [9]
(i) Reynolds Number
(ii) Prandtl Number
(iii) Nusselt Number.
3. (a) Derive the heat flow equation for steady state heat conduction
through composite plane wall. [8]
(b) A hollow cylinder of 20 mm inner diameter and 30 mm outer
diameter is maintained at 350K (outer surface temp.) and
420K (inner surface temp.). Determine the heat loss per unit
length and also determine the temperature at a distance of
3 mm from outer surface towards the centre. (Thermal conductivity
of material is 50 W/mK). [8]
Or
4. (a) Derive the heat flow equation for steady state heat conduction
through composite (co-axial) cylinder ? [8]
[3862]-196 3 P.T.O.
(b) A hollow sphere of 24 mm inner diameter and 36 mm outer
diameter is subjected to constant heat flow of 2.12 kW. In
inner surface temperature is 390K, find the temperature of
outer surface and temperature at a distance of 16 mm from
the centre of the sphere. Thermal conductivity of the material
is 85 W/mK. [8]
5. (a) Distinguish between Natural Convection and Forced
Convection. [8]
(b) Air at 27C and 1 atm. flow over a flat plate at a velocity
of 2 m/sec. The viscosity of air at 27C is 1.85 10
5
kg/m.sec. Assume unit depth. If the plate is maintained at
60C, calculate the heat transferred per unit time in the first
0.4 m of the plate. Properties of air are :
(i) Kinematic viscosity = 17.36 10
6
m
2
/sec
(ii) Thermal conductivity = 0.0275 W/mK
(iii) Prandtl number = 0.7
(iv) C
p
= 1.006 kJ/kgK. [8]
Or
6. (a) Distinguish between heat transfer coefficient and overall heat
transfer coefficient. [8]
[3862]-196 4
(b) Air at 300C and atmospheric pressure is heated as it flows
through a tube with a diameter of 25 mm at a velocity of
12 m/sec. Calculate the heat transfer rate per unit length of
tube if a constant heat flux condition is maintained at the
wall which is at 32C above the air temperature, over entire
length of the tube. Calculate the rise in bulk temperature over
a 3.3 m length of the tube. Properties of air are :
(i) Dynamic viscosity = 29.7 10
6
kg/m.sec
(ii) Thermal conductivity = 0.0461 W/mK
(iii) Prandtl number = 0.674
(iv) C
p
= 1.047 kJ/kgK
(v) Density = 0.615 kg/m
3
. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain the following : [10]
(i) Electromagnetic spectrum
(ii) Black body
(iii) Emissive power
(iv) Opaque body
(v) Emissivity.
[3862]-196 5 P.T.O.
(b) It is observed that the value of the radiation emitted by the
sun is maximum at a wavelength of 0.58 microns. Estimate
the temperature of surface of sun and emissive power. Consider
sun to be a black body. [8]
Or
8. (a) A 50 mm internal diameter iron pipe at 423K passes through
a room in which the surroundings are at temperature of 300K.
If the emissivity of the pipe metal is 0.8, what is the net
interchange of radiation energy per meter length of pipe ?
The outside diameter of pipe is 60 mm. [9]
(b) Explain the following : [9]
(i) Specular and Diffuse Reflection
(ii) Radiation Shields
(iii) Stefan Boltzmanns law.
9. (a) What are heat exchangers ? Give the detailed classification. [8]
(b) In an oil cooler 60 gm/sec. of hot oil enters a thin metal
pipe of diameter 25 mm an equal mass of cooling water flows
through the annular space between the pipe and a large concentric
pipe, the oil and water moving in opposite directions. The
[3862]-196 6
oil enters at 420K and is to be cooled to 320K. If water
enters at 290K, what length of pipe is required ? Take heat
transfer coefficient of 1.6 kW/m
2
K on the oil side and
3.6 kW/m
2
K on water side. Specific heat of oil is 2 kJ/kg K
and that of water is 4.18 kJ/kgK. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain Log mean temperature difference for co-current and
counter current flow heat exchanger. [8]
(b) 20 kg/sec. of water at 360K entering a heat exchanger is
to be cooled to 340K by using cold water at 300K flowing
at rate of 25 kg/sec. If the overall heat transfer coefficient
is 1500 W/m
2
K. C
p
for water is 4187 J/kgK. Calculate heat
transfer area required in :
(i) Co-current flow concentric pipe heat exchanger and
(ii) Counter current flow concentric pipe heat exchanger. [8]
11. (a) What is Evaporation ? Explain capacity, economy and types
of evaporators. [8]
(b) 1000 kg/hr. of a dilute solution of sodium hydroxide containing
10% NaOH is to be concentrated to 40% NaOH by weight
in a single effect evaporator. The feed is available at 25C.
Boiling point of the solution may be considered as 100C. Specific
[3862]-196 7 P.T.O.
heat of dilute solution is 4180 J/kgK. Latent heat of vaporization
of water is 2239 kJ/kg. Saturated steam corresponding to 1.8
bar pressure and 117C is available for heating purpose. Latent
heat of condensation of steam is 2212 kJ/kg. If the overall
heat transfer coefficient for the system is 850 W/m
2
K,
calculate :
(i) The quantity of water evaporated;
(ii) Steam consumed and steam economy;
(iii) Surface area of the evaporator. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain multiple effect evaporator with different feed
arrangements. [8]
(b) Explain vacuum evaporation and boiling point elevation. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-197
S.E. (Chemical) (II Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(ii) Draw neat sketches wherever necessary.
(iii) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, calculator
and steam table is permitted.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is a standard and what is a code ? How does one find
out whether there is a standard for a product ? [6]
(b) A metal bar 50 mm 50 mm in section is subjected to an
axial compressive load of 500 kN. If the contraction of a
200 mm gauge length was found to be 0.5 mm and the increase
in thickness is 0.04 mm, find the values of Youngs modulus
and Poissons ratio for the bar material. [6]
(c) State and explain the Hookes law. [4]
[3862]-197 2
Or
2. (a) What are design factors and design procedures used in machine
design ? [6]
(b) Define stress, strain and elasticity. Derive a relation between
stress and strain of an elastic body. [4]
(c) A load of 5 kN is to be raised with the help of a steel wire.
Find the minimum diameter of the steel wire, if the stress
is not to exceed 100 MPa. [6]
3. (a) A solid steel shaft 100 mm in diameter transmits 136 kW
at 150 rpm. Calculate the torque on the shaft and the angle
of twist in a length of 600 mm. Take C = 80 GPa. [6]
(b) A solid steel shaft 100 mm in diameter is subjected to a bending
moment M and a twisting moment T. The maximum principal
stress produced in the shaft is 120 MPa. If the maximum
bending stress due to M is equal to the maximum shear stress
due to T, find the values of M and T. [12]
Or
4. (a) State the hypothesis for the following theories of failure :
(1) Maximum Normal Stress Theory of Failure, and
(2) Maximum Normal Shear Theory of Failure. [8]
[3862]-197 3 P.T.O.
(b) A horizontal steel girder having uniform cross-section is
14 m long and is simply supported at its ends. It carries
two concentrated loads as shown in the figure below. Draw
Shear Force diagram and Bending Moment diagram. [10]
5. (a) Explain various types of keys. [4]
(b) Find the diameter of a solid shaft to transmit 20 kW at
200 rpm. The ultimate shear stress for the steel may be taken
as 360 MPa and a factor of safety as 4. [6]
(c) A steel shaft 35 mm in diameter is subjected to a torque
of 500 kN-m. If the polar moment of inertia of the shaft,
J = 150 10
3
mm
4
, then how much torsional shear would
be produced in the shaft. Is shaft safe, if allowable shear
stress = 100 MPa ? [6]
12 kN
8 kN
3 m
A
6.5 m
4.5 m
C D
B
[3862]-197 4
Or
6. (a) Explain, with sketches, Muff and Flange couplings. [6]
(b) Design a cast iron protective type flange coupling to connect
two shafts in order to transmit 15 kW at 900 rpm. The service
factor is 1.35. The following permissible stresses may be
used :
Shear stress for shaft, key and bolt materials = 40 MPa
Crushing stress for bolt and key = 80 MPa
Shear stress for cast iron = 8 MPa. [10]
SECTION II
7. (a) Compare flat belt with V-belt. [6]
(b) A belt 100 mm wide and 10 mm thick is transmitting power
at 1000 m/min. The driving tension is 1.5 times the tension
on slack side. If the safe permissible stress on belt section
is 1.6 MPa, calculate the maximum power that can be
transmitted at this speed. Assume the density of leather as
1200 kg/m
3
. [10]
[3862]-197 5 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) Give the classification of bearings. [4]
(b) A ball bearing is subjected to a radial load of 2250 N and
an axial load of 1250 N. The values of X and Y factors are
0.56 and 1.6 respectively. The shaft is rotating at 720 rpm
and the life of bearing should be 3500 hrs. Calculate the dynamic
load capacity of the bearing. [12]
9. (a) Explain the constructional details and give the applications of
cotter joint. [6]
(b) Describe with sketches the various types of pipe joints commonly
used. [6]
(c) What do you understand by the term Strength of a welded
joint ? Give the relation for the same. [4]
Or
10. (a) Find out the dimensions of a flanged joint for a cast iron
pipe 250 mm diameter to carry a pressure of 0.7 N/mm
2
.
For cast iron :
Allowable tensile stress s
t
= 14 N/mm
2
and
Corrosion allowance = 9 mm. [8]
[3862]-197 6
(b) Explain the various types of welded joints. Give the advantages
and disadvantages of welded joints. [4]
(c) What are various methods of joining pipes for water distribution
systems ? [4]
11. (a) Estimate the optimum pipe diameter for a water flow rate
of 10 kg/sec. [6]
(b) Give the classification of valves. [6]
(c) With neat sketch explain the construction and working of
globe valve. [6]
Or
12. (a) Give the classification of pumps and their selection criterion. [6]
(b) Water flows through 200 mm diameter, 60 m long pipe with
a velocity of 2.5 m/sec. Find head lost due to friction. [6]
(c) A centrifugal pump having an impeller of 300 mm diameter
can deliver water at the rate of 40 m
3
/hr at 10 m height.
If this pump is replaced by another pump, having 400 mm
impeller diameter, water would be the change in flow rate
and head. [6]
[3862]-198
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICSI
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) A particular substance undergoes a mechanically reversible process,
expanding from an initial state of 20 bar to a final state of
8 bar. The path for the process is described by the equation :
0.036
P 4,
V
t
= -
where P is in bar, V
t
is in m
3
. If DU
t
for the change of state
is 1400 J, determine W, Q and DH
t
. [10]
P.T.O.
[3862]-198 2
(b) An insulated and non-conducting container filled with 10 kg of
water at 20C is fitted with a stirrer. The stirrer is made to
turn by gravity acting on a weight of mass 25 kg. The weight
falls slowly through a distance of 10 m in driving the stirrer.
Assuming that all work done on the weight is transferred to
the water and that the local acceleration of gravity is 9.8 m/s
2
,
determine : [8]
(i) The amount of work done on the water.
(ii) the internal energy change of the water.
(iii) The final temperature of water.
(iv) The amount of heat that must be removed from the water
to return it to its initial temperature.
Or
2. (a) Liquid water at 100C and 1 bar has an internal energy (on
an arbitrary scale) of 419 kJ/kg and a specific volume of 1.044
cm
3
/gm. [8]
(i) What is its enthalpy ?
(ii) The water is brought to the vapor state at 200C and 800
kPa, where its enthalpy is 2838.6 kJ/kg and its specific volume
is 260.79 cm
3
/gm. Calculate DU and DH for the process.
[3862]-198 3 P.T.O.
(b) One kilogram of air is heated reversibly at constant pressure
from an initial state of 300 K and 1 bar until its volume triples.
Calculate W, Q, DU and DH for the process. Assume that air
obeys the relation : [10]
3
PV bar.cm
83.14
T mol.K
= , C
p
= 29 J/mol.K.
3. (a) Twenty kilogram of air is compressed from 1 bar, 300 K to
5 bar in a single stage compressor. The process is polytropic
with n = 1.25. The specific heat of air at constant pressure
is : [10]
C
p
= 27.4528 + 6.1839 10
3
T 8.9932 10
7
T
2
kJ
kmol.K

.
Determine :
(i) Work done by compressor per cycle.
(ii) The amount of heat transferred to the surrounding.
(b) Derive an expression for work done for the reversible adiabatic
process. [6]
Or
4. (a) Calculate the compressibility factor and molar volume for methanol
vapour at 500 K and 10 bar by using : [8]
(i) Truncated form of virial equation
[3862]-198 4
(ii) Redlich-Kwong equation.
Experimental values of virial coefficients are B =
2.19 10
4
m
3
/mol, C = 1.73 10
8
m
6
/mol
2
. The critical
temperature and pressure of methanol are 512.6 K and 81 bar.
(b) A mass of 0.5 kg of gaseous ammonia is contained in a
0.03 m
3
vessel immersed in a constant temperature bath at
338.15 K. Calculate the pressure of the gas by each of the
following : [8]
(i) The ideal gas equation
(ii) A generalized correlation.
5. (a) Pure CO is mixed with 100% excess air and completely burned
at constant pressure. The reactants are originally at 400 K.
Determine the heat added or removed if the products leave at
600 K. The standard heat of reaction 298 K is 283.028 kJ per
mol CO burned. The mean specific heats applicable in the
temperature range of this problem are 29.10, 29.70, 29.10 and
41.45 J/mol.K respectively for CO, O
2
, N
2
and CO
2
. [10]
(b) Wrtie notes on : [6]
(i) Hess law of constant heat summation
(ii) Heat of formation and its utility.
[3862]-198 5 P.T.O.
Or
6. Methanol is synthesized according to the following reaction : [16]
CO(g) + 2H
2
(g)

CH
3
OH(g)
The standard heats of formation at 298 K are 110.125 kJ/mol for
CO and 200.660 kJ/mol for methanol. The specific heats
J
mol.K

are :
C
p
(CH
3
OH) = 19.382 + 101.564 10
3
T 28.683 10
6
T
2
C
p
(CO) = 28.068 + 4.631 10
3
T 2.5773 10
4
T
2
C
p
(H
2
) = 27.012 + 3.509 10
3
T + 6.9006 10
4
T
2
(a) Calculate the standard heat of reaction at 1073 K.
(b) Express the heat of reaction as a function of temperature.
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive the following relation for the efficiency of Carnot
engine : [8]
H L
H
T T
.
T
-
h =
Why is efficiency of Carnot engine maximum ?
[3862]-198 6
(b) A nuclear power plant generates 750 MW, the reactor
temperature is 588.15 K and a river with water temperature
of 293.15 K is available : [8]
(i) What is the maximum possible thermal efficiency of the plant
and what is the maximum rate at which heat must be discarded
to river ?
(ii) If the actual thermal efficiency of the plant is 60% of the
maximum, at what rate must heat be discarded to the river
and what is the temperature rise of the river if it has a
flow rate of 165 m
3
/s.
Or
8. (a) Explain the concept of entropy for irreversible thermodynamic
process. Show that the total entropy change is positive. [6]
(b) Two compartments each of 1 m
3
capacity are connected by a
valve and insulated from the surroundings and from each other.
One compartment contains saturated steam at 683.6 kPa and
the other contains steam at the same temperature but at a
pressure of 101.3 kPa. The valve is opened and the pressure
is allowed to equalize. Determine the change in entropy of the
system consisting of the two vessels. Comment on the
irreversibility of the process. [10]
[3862]-198 7 P.T.O.
The thermodynamic properties of steam are :
Pressure (kPa) H (kJ/kg) S (kJ/kg) V (m
3
/kg) U (kJ/kg
683.6(T = 437.2 K) 2761 6.7133 278.9 10
3
2570.4
101.3(T = 437.6 K) 2804 7.6712 1976.2 2603.3
9. (a) State the defining equations for U, H, G and A. Using principles
of 1st and 2nd law of thermodynamics derive the following property
relations : [8]
(i) dU = TdS PdV
(ii) dH = TdS + VdP
(iii) dG = VdP SdT
(iv) dA = PdV SdT
(b) Explain residual properties. Derive the following fundamental
residual property relation for 1 mol of a substance for closed
thermodynamic system : [8]
R
R R
2
G P T
V H .
RT T RT
d d d
d
= -
Or
10. (a) Using the thermodynamic property relations derive the Maxwell
relations. [10]
(b) Derive Clausius-Clapeyron equation for vapour liquid two-phase
system. [6]
[3862]-198 8
11. (a) Explain absorption refrigeration cycle in detail with the help of
sketch and relevant equations involved. [8]
(b) A Carnot engine is coupled to a Carnot refrigerator, so that
all the work produced by the engine is used by the refrigerator
in extraction of heat from a heat reservoir at 0C at the rate
of 35 kW. The source of energy for the Carnot engine is a heat
reservoir at 25C. If both devices discard heat to the surrounding
at 25C, how much heat does the engine absorb from its heat
source reservoir ?
If the actual coefficient of performance of the refrigerator
COP
actual
= 0.6 COP
Carnot
and if the thermal efficiency of the
engine is h
actual
= 0.6h
Carnot
, how much heat does the engine
absorb from its heat source reservoir. [10]
Or
12. (a) Why is liquefaction of gas needed ? Explain the Linde process
for gas liquefaction. [8]
(b) A vapour compression cycle using ammonia as refrigerant is
employed in an ice manufacturing plant. Cooling water at
288 K enters the condensor at a rate of 0.25 kg/sec and leaves
at 300 K. Ammonia at 294 K condenses at a rate of
0.50 kg/minute. Enthalpy of liquid ammonia at 294 K is
281.5 kJ/kg. The compressor efficiency is 90%.
Saturated ammonia vapour at 258 K and the enthalpy of
1426 kJ/kg enters the compressor. What is the power requirement
of the compressor and refrigeration capacity in tons ? [10]
[3862]-199
MECHANICAL OPERATIONS
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer three questions from Section-I and three questions
from Section-II
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) A material is crushed in a blake jaw crusher and the average
size of particles is reduced from 5 cm to 1.3 cm, with the
consumption of energy at the rate of 37 W hr/metric ton.
What will be the consumption of energy necessary to crush
the same material of average size 8 cm to an average
size of 3 cm ? The mechanical efficiency remaining
unchanged.
(i) Using Rittingers law
(ii) Using Kicks law [16]
P.T.O.
[3862]-199 2
(b) Give the advantages of Wet Grinding. [2]
Or
2. (a) Explain open circuit and close circuit grinding with its flow
sheet. [6]
(b) Explain the importance of screening operation in chemical
industry. [4]
(c) Explain different factors influence on the size of the product
in Ball mill. [8]
3. (a) State advantages and limitations of pneumatic conveyor. [6]
(b) Describe with a sketch the working of belt conveyor and list
advantages and disadvantages with typical applications. [8]
(c) Why is it necessary to clean the belt ? [2]
Or
4. (a) Describe with neat sketch construction of Screw Conveyor. List
advantages, disadvantages and industrial applications. [8]
(b) Explain close loop pneumatic conveying system with its flow
sheet. [8]
5. (a) Explain the necessity of mixing in chemical industries. [6]
(i) Sigma Mixer
(ii) Mixing Index [8]
(c) Explain the importance of baffles in agitated vessels. [2]
[3862]-199 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Describe the types of mixers of pastes and plastic
mass. [8]
(b) With the help of neat sketch distinguish between axial flow
and radial flow impellers. [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) What are the various factors which affect the rate of filtration ?
Derive an expression to calculate the rate of filtration. [10]
(b) Describe with a neat sketch the working of Rotary drum
filter. [6]
Or
8. (a) State factors to be considered while selecting filtration equipment
and enlist characteristics of filter media. [8]
(b) Compare pressure filter and vacuum filter. [4]
(c) Explain the operating cycle of centrifuge filter. [4]
9. (a) Describe with neat sketches the aggregate and particulate
fluidization. Give typical examples of both. [8]
(b) Describe with neat sketch the sedimentation operation. Also
sketch typical commercial equipment. [8]
[3862]-199 4
Or
10. (a) Define Fluidization. Sate the application of fluidization
technique. [8]
(b) Distinguish between Free settling and Hindered settling. [4]
(c) Explain spouted Bed. [4]
11. (a) Explain capacity and effectiveness of screen. [4]
(b) Explain Jigging separation technique with neat diagram. [6]
(c) Describe with neat sketches operation of Batch centrifuge and
Continuous centrifuge. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain froth floatation with neat diagram. [6]
(b) Write short notes on (any three) :
(i) Scrubbers
(ii) Gravity settling tank
(iii) Fabric Filters
(iv) ESP. [12]
P.T.O.
[3862]-200
S.E. (Chem./Petrole./Polymer/Biotech./Printing)
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
(v) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, electronic pocket
SECTION I
1. (a) Solve the following (any three) : [12]
(1)
2
3
2
2 2 sec
x
d y dy
y e x
dx
dx
-
+ + =
[3862]-200 2
(2)
( )
2 2 3
D 4D + 4 cos2
x
y e x x - = + +
(3)
2
2
0
d y dy
x x
dx
dx
+ + =
(4)
2
2
sec tan
d y
y x x
dx
+ =
(method of variation of parameters)
(5)
( ) ( )
2 2
D 1 sin 1 .
x
y x x x e - = + +
(b) Solve :
2 3 sin
dx
x y t
dt
- + =
2 3 cos
dy
x y t
dt
+ - =
and obtain x and y if x = 1/4 and y = 1/20 at t = 0. [5]
Or
2. (a) Solve the following (any three) : [12]
(1) ( ) ( ) ( )
2
2
2
1 1 2sin log 1
d y dy
x x y x
dx
dx
+ + + + = +

(2)
2
2
3 2
x
e
d y dy
y e
dx
dx
+ + =
(method of variation of parameters)
(3)
2
2 2
2
5 6 sin2 4
x x
d y dy
y e x x e
dx
dx
-
+ + = +
(4) ( )
2
1
D 3D + 2 cos
x
y
e

- =

(5)
2
2
cosh cos .
d y
y x x
dx
- =
[3862]-200 3 P.T.O.
(b) Solve :

( ) ( )
2 2
.
dx dy dz
z x y z x y
x y
= =
+ -
+
[5]
3. (a) The D.E. satisfied by a beam uniformly loaded with one
end fixed and second subjected to a tensile force P is
given by :
2
2
2
W
EI P
2
d y
y x
dx
- = -
.
Show that the elastic curve for the beam under conditions
y = 0, 0
dy
dx
= when x = 0 is given by :
2
2 2 2
W 2
2P
nx nx
e e
y x
n n n
-

= - - -

where
2
P
EI = .
n
[8]
(b) Solve :
2
2
v v
k
t
x

=

if
(i) v as t
(ii)
0 x
v
x
=
= 0 " t
(iii) v(l, t) = 0 " t
(iv) v(x, 0) = v
0
for 0 < x < l. [8]
[3862]-200 4
Or
4. (a) In a certain chemical reaction, the temperature u and v satisfy
the equations :
sin
du
v x
dx
+ =
cos
dv
u x
dx
+ =
given that when x = 0, then u = 1 and v = 0. Find the
values of u and v. [8]
(b) Aninfinitelylongplaneuniformplateisboundedbytwoparallel
edges in the y-direction and an end at right angles to them.
Thebreadthofplateis p.Thisendismaintainedattemperature
u
0
at all points and other edge at zero temperature.
Find the steady state temperature function u(x, y). [8]
5. (a) Use Fourier transform to solve :
2
2
u u
t
x

=

0 < x < , t > 0
where u(x, t) satisfies the conditions :
(i)
0
0 0
x
u
t
x
=

= >

(ii)
( )
0 1
, 0
0 1
x x
u x
x
< <
=

>
(iii) |u(x, t)| < M. [7]

[3862]-200 5 P.T.O.
(b) Solve the integral equation :
( )
0
1 0 1
sin 2 1 2.
0 2
f x x dx
l <
l = l <
[5]
(c) Find the Fourier sine and cosine transforms of the following
function :

( )
0 1
2 1 2.
0 2
x x
f x x x
x

= -
>
[5]
Or
6. (a) Find the Fourier sine transform of
ax
e
x
-
and hence evaluate :

1
0
tan sin .
x
x dx
a
-
[6]
(b) Using the Fourier integral representation show that :
2
0
sin 0
sin sin
2
.
1
0
x x
x
d
x
p
pl l
l =

- l

> p
[6]
(c) Using inverse Fourier sine transform, find f(x) if :

( )
2
F .
1
s
l
l =
+ l
[5]
[3862]-200 6
SECTION II
7. (a) Find Laplace transform (any three) : [12]
(i)
4
0
1 cos2
t
t
t
e dt
t
-
(ii)
cos t
t
(iii) f(t) = cos
1
3
(2p 3t), t >
2
3
p
= 0, 0 < t <
2
3
p
(iv) f(t) = sin wt, 0 < t <
p
w
= 0,
p
w
< t <
2p
w
,
Given f(t) =
2
. f t
p
+

w
(b) Find Laplace transform of
( )
erf t and hence evaluate :

( )
0
.
t
e erf t dt
-
[4]
Or
8. (a) Find inverse Laplace transform (any three) : [12]
(i)
( )
( )
2
5 3
1 2 5
s
s s s
+
+ + +
[3862]-200 7 P.T.O.
(ii)
2
2
4
log
9
s
s
+
+
(iii)
2 3
s
e
s
- p
+
(iv)
1 1
sin .
s s

(b) Use convolution theorem to find :

( )
1
2
2 2
L .
s
s a
-

+

[4]
9. (a) Find the directional derivative of f = 4xz
3
3x
2
y
2
z at the
point (2, 1, 1) along the line equally inclined with co-ordinate
axes. [6]
(b) Show that the vector field :
( ) ( ) ( )
2 2 2
F x yz i y zx j z xy k = - + - + -
is irrotational. Find the scalar point function f such that
F
= f. [6]
(c) Evaluate
C
F . dr
for :
( ) ( ) F 2 3 y i xz j yz x k = + + + -
along the curve x
2
= 4y, 3x
3
= 8z from x = 0 to x = 2. [6]
[3862]-200 8
Or
10. (a) Use Stokes theorem to evaluate :
F .
s
h ds
over the surface of cylinder x

2
+ y
2
= 4 bounded by
z = 9, and open at z = 0, where :
( )
( )
( )
2
F 2 3 2 4 x y z i x y z j x y z k = - + + + - + - + . [6]
(b) Evaluate :
( )
3 3 3
.
s
x i y j z k ds + +
over the surface of sphere x

2
+ y
2
+ z
2
= 16 by using Gausss
divergence theorem. [6]
(c) Establish the vector identities : [6]
(i) ( )
( )
( )
,
f r
f r r r xi yj zk
r
= = + +
(ii)
( )
3
. a r r a r a
r r
r

= +

(iii) . 0.
n
a r
r

=

[3862]-200 9 P.T.O.
11. (a) Solve the differential equation by using Laplace transform
method :
( )
2
2
4 ,
d y
y f t
dt
+ =
where
( )
1, 0 1
0, 1
t
f t
t
< <
=

>
with y(0) = 0, y(0) = 1. [6]

(b) If the velocity potential of a fluid motion is given by
f = log(xyz), find the equations of streamlines. [5]
(c) The transfer function of a second order system (with x < 1)
is given by :
( )
( )
( )
2
Y 6
G .
X
1.8 1
s
s
s
s s
= =
+ +
Find over shoot, decay ratio and period of oscillation. [5]
Or
12. (a) A liquid is in equilibrium under the action of field force
F
per unit mass is :
( ) ( ) ( )
{ }
F . y z i z x j x y k = l + + + + +
Find the pressure at any point of the field. [5]
[3862]-200 10
(b) Solve by using Laplace transform method :
( ) ( )
0
2 sin ,
t
dy
y t y t dt t
dt
+ + =
with y(0) = 1. [6]

(c) Two non-interacting tanks are connected in series. The time
constants are T
2
= 1 and T
1
= 0.5 and R
2
= 1. Find the
response using transfer function. [5]
[3862]-201
S.E. (Polymer/Petroleum/Petrochem)
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRYI
(2008 PATTERN)
answer-books.
(iv) Useoflogarithmictables,sliderule,Molliercharts,electronic
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain the aromaticity of : [6]
(i) Pyrrol
(ii) Azulene
(iii) Annulene
(b) Explain the formation of carbonium ion by : [6]
(i) Heterolytic fission
(ii) Protonation
(c) Explain why guanidine is a strong base. [4]
Or
2. (a) Explain the phenomenon of resonance with suitable
example. [6]
(b) Define and give two examples of : [6]
(i) Electrophile
(ii) Nucleophile
(iii) Free-radical
(c) Explain why propynoic acid is stronger than propenoic
acid. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-201 2
3. (a) Explain Friedel-Crafts alkylation and Friedel-Crafts acylation
of benzene. [6]
(b) Explain Markovnikovs rule with suitable example. Also explain
the anti-Markovnikovs addition. [6]
(c) Explain Hofmanns rule with suitable example. [4]
Or
4. (a) Explain Favorskii rearrangement with suitable exmaple. [6]
(b) Predict the product (any 3) [6]
(i) 2CH
3
C
O
O
Electrolysis
(ii) CH
3
C
O
H
Warm dil. NaOH
(iii)
CH
3
C
OH
H HO
2 4
CH
3
CH OH
2
(iv)
CH
3
HNO
3
H HO
2 4
(c) Explain dimerization of isobutylene. [4]
5. (a) Explain the following terms with suitable examples ? [6]
(i) Dihedral angle
(ii) Racemic mixture
(iii) Meso isomer
(b) Predict product : [6]
(i) Quinoline NaNH
2
(ii) Pyridine Na + Absolute alcohol
(iii) Acetylene + HCN Red hot tube
(iv) Furan + HNO
3
Acetic anhydride
[3862]-201 3 P.T.O.
(c) Explain the use of 1, 4 diketone in synthesis of five membered
heterocycles. [6]
Or
(i) Pyrrole is more reactive than furan
(ii) Electrophilic substitution takes place at position 5 and 8
in quinoline.
(b) Explainthetermdiastereoisomerswithreferencetothecompound
2, 3 dichloro pentane. [6]
(c) ExplainTwochairformsofmethylcyclohexanearenotequivalent
but that of cyclohexane are equivalent. [6]
SECTION II
(PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY)
7. (a) Derive van der Walls equation of state. [6]
(b) Starting with Kinetic Gas equation deduce :
(i) Grahams Law
(ii) Charles Law
(iii) Avogadros Law [6]
(c) The boiling point of ethyl alcohol is 351.8 kelvin and its latent
heat of vaporization is 39371.44 Joules/mole.
Calculate its vapor pressure at 400 kelvin. Given R = 8.314
J/kelvin mole [4]
Or
8. (a) Write a short note on vapour pressure of a liquid. How
is it measured ? How is it related to the boiling point of
a liquid ? [6]
(b) What is meant by critical constants of a fluid ? How will
you measure critical constants experimentally ? [6]
(c) (i) The RMS velocity of oxygen is 460 meters/second.
Calculate the RMS velocity of CO
2
under the same
conditions.
(ii) Calculate the molar heat vaporization of Toluene
using Troutons rule. Given : Boiling point of Toluene
is 110C and Trouton s constant for Toluene is
100 Joules/mole Kelvin. [4]
[3862]-201 4
9. (a) Explain in brief : [6]
(i) Low temperature Fuel cells
(ii) Medium temperature fuel cells
(iii) High temperature fuel cells
(b) Write a short note on Lithium ion rechargeable cell. [6]
(c) What is the need for storage of electrical energy ? [4]
Or
10. (a) Write a short note on Sodium Sulphur rechargeable
battery [6]
(b) ExplainthefollowingtermsEnergydensity,powerdensity,number
of charge discharge cycles, battery capacity (Ampere hours)
with reference to Galvanic cells. [6]
(c) What do you understand by polarization of a battery (galvanic
cell) ? How can it be minimized ? [4]
11. (a) Whatarecolloids?Discussinbrieffourtechniquesforpreparation
of colloids. [7]
(b) Discuss in brief any three characteristic properties of colloidal
solutionssuchas:Tyndalleffect,dialysis,electrophoresis,electro-
osmosis and Brownian motion. [7]
(c) Compare lyophilic and lyophobic colloids. [4]
Or
12. (a) Give thermodynamic derivation for molal elevation constant
K
b
. [7]
(b) (i) State and explain Raoults law. Under what conditions is
it applicable ?
(ii) Show that the relative lowering of vapour pressure of a
solution of non-volatile solute is equal to the mole fraction
of the solute. [7]
(c) A0.2molarsolutionofaluminiumchloridegaveosmoticpressure
of 7.8 atmospheres.
Calculate the degree of dissociation for AlCl
3
.
Given : R = 0.0821 litre atmosphere/mole. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-202
S.E. (Poly./Petro.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
ENGINEERING MATERIALS SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
(iv) Use of scientific electronic calculator is allowed.
(v) Figures to the right indicate full marks.
SECTION I
1. (a) What are the factors affecting the rate of diffusion in
solid materials ? A 0.1 cm thick iron plate is heated to
800C, one side of the plate is in contact with carburizing
atmosphere. The diffusion coefficient at 800C temperature is
8.17 10
7
cm
2
/s and concentration gradient is 8.04 10
20
atoms/cm
2
. Calculate net diffusion flux. [6]
[3862]-202 2
(b) What is edge dislocation ? Explain in brief Burgers vector
and Tangent vector in the edge dislocation. [6]
(c) How entanglements of large polymer chains limit self-diffusion
in polymeric materials ? [4]
Or
2. (i) What are the non-destructive tests ? Explain any one N.D.T.
with sketch. [6]
(ii) What are crystalline materials ? Draw and explain the properties
of FCC, HCP and BCT structures. [6]
(iii) How is the critical resolved shear stress responsible to produce
a Slip in a single crystal ? [4]
3. (a) Explain the following with sketch (any two) : [8]
(i) Grain size measurement with ASTM number.
(ii) Role of grain boundaries in plastic deformation.
(iii) Optical microscope for observations of metallic materials.
(b) Draw and explain microstructures of the following (any
two) : [8]
(i) A composite of alumina fibers in a matrix of Al-Li alloy
(cross-section).
(ii) Cartridge brass specimen.
(iii) Normalized dead mild steel.
[3862]-202 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) Differentiate between the trans-grannular and inter-grannular
microstructures. [6]
(b) Suggest the suitable heat-treatment for increasing the hardness
of a medium carbon steel component. Draw and explain micro-
structure of hardened steel specimen. [6]
(c) Explain why a rubber band behaves like a window glass below
0C temperature. [4]
5. (a) What is toughness of a material ? A cylindrical brass specimen
is having an original diameter of 12 mm. Its tensile strength
is 440 MPa and yield strength is 240 MPa. When a stress
of 140 MPa is applied it has shown 0.15% elongation. Determine
its stiffness and the maximum load that can be sustained by
the specimen. [6]
(b) What is the difference in Vickers and Brinell Hardness
test ? In a non-standard Brinell test a specimen is tested
for hardness with load 31.25 kgs; diameter of the ball indentor
is 2.5 mm and that of the impression is 0.55 mm. What will
be its hardness value ? [6]
[3862]-202 4
(c) On which factors the electrical conductivity of a material
depends ? The resistance of a metal rod with conductivity
3.4 10
8
(W-cm)
1
and length 10 meters is measured to be
0.09 W. Calculate the cross-sectional area of the rod. What
voltage is required to produce a current of 3.5 Amp. in this
rod ? [6]
Or
6. (i) What are the factors on which the magnitude of dielectric
polarization depends ? A dielectric material is placed in an
external electric field; the number of charge centers displaced
per unit volume are 1.54 10
28
charges/m
3
. The electronic
charge is 1.61 10
19
C/charge and the displacement between
the poles observed 1.62 10
17
m. Calculate magnitude of
polarization. [6]
(ii) What is magnetic susceptibility ? Calculate the magnetic field
strength required to create an induction equal to that of the
earth in a sodium sample. The magnetic susceptibility of Na
is 16 10
6
; Magnetic induction of the earth is 6 10
5
tesla. Permeability of a vacuum 4p 10
7
tesla-m/Amp. [6]
[3862]-202 5 P.T.O.
(iii) What is a linear coefficient of thermal expansion of a
material ? Draw a graphical presentation of linear coefficient
of thermal expansion as a function of temperature for different
materials. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive an equation for modulus of elasticity when unidirectional
fiber composite subjected to a load in transverse direction with
respect to the fiber alignment. [5]
(b) A continuous and aligned glass fiber reinforced composite is
having cross-sectional area 250 mm
2
and stress applied in the
longitudinal direction is 50 MPa. It is having 40% volume of
glass fiber and 60% volume of polyster resin matrix. Determine
the magnitude of the load carried by fiber and matrix phases.
Also comment on the strain values of both phases. (Assume
E
f
= 69 GPa and E
m
= 3.4 GPa.) [6]
(c) Explain the requirements of properties of a matrix material
in a composite. [5]
[3862]-202 6
Or
8. (i) Why some Critical fiber length is necessary when fragmented
fibers are used in a composite ? Calculate critical fiber
length of a glass fiber used in discontinuous fiber reinforced
composite. The shear yield strength of matrix is 12 MPa. The
U.T.S. of the fiber is 2.4 10
3
MPa and fiber diameter is
30 microns. [7]
(ii) Suggest the suitable composite for the following applications
and justify your selection (any three) : [9]
(a) Bulletproof vest
(b) Rocket nozzle
(c) Hard-steel cutting tool
(d) Automobile tyre.
9. Explain the following (any four) : [16]
(i) Silicate materials, which are under water for a long time show
static fatigue.
(ii) Stainless steel surgical instruments show frequent failure,
if they are dried in high temperature oven after every
wash.
[3862]-202 7 P.T.O.
(iii) Measurements of current density show that for many metals
the corrosion rate decreases with time.
(iv) Stabilizers are added in polyethylene out-door use components.
(v) Plain carbon steel plates are oftenly fastened together with
nickel rivets.
Or
10. Write short notes on the following (any four) : [16]
(a) Cathodic protection
(b) Pit and crevice corrosion
(c) Alteration of bond structures by atmospheric gases
(d) Pilling Bedworth ratio
(e) Radiation damage.
11. Explain the following materials processing with neat diagrams
(any three) : [18]
(i) Slip casting for ceramics
(ii) Compression moulding for polymer products
(iii) Types of chills in metal castings
(iv) Close die forging for automotive component.
[3862]-202 8
Or
12. Compare the following processes (any three) : [18]
(a) Extrusion and wire drawing
(b) Silicon doping and ion implantation
(c) Filament winding and pultrusion
(d) Melt spinning and solution spinning.
[3862]-203
S.E (Petrochemical, Petroleum and Polymer)
CHEMICAL PROCESS CALCULATIONS
(2008 Course)
answer-books.
(iv) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier Charts, electronic
pocket calculator is allowed.
(vi) Use of steam tables wherever necessary.
SECTION I
1. (a) 10 kg of liquid A of specific gravity 1.2 is mixed with 3 kg
of liquid B of specific gravity 0.8. Assuming that there is no
volume change on mixing, what is the specific gravity of the
mixture ? [4]
(b) An analysis of the vent gases from the chlorinator in a plant
for making chlorinated rubber showed 60% by volume HCL,
30% by volume Cl
2
and the rest CCL
4
. Determine the following :
(i) the precent composition by weight
P.T.O.
[3862]-203 2
(ii) the average molecular weight of the gas
(iii) the density at standard conditions in kg/m
3 [8]
(c) What is equation of states ? Express any two equations of
states defining each term involved. [4]
Or
2. (a) 15 kg each of nitrogen and hydrogen are mixed together at
300 kPa and 298 K. Determine the partial pressure of nitrogen,
the pure component volume of nitrogen, the specific volume
of the mixture. [6]
(b) Calculate the volume occupied by one mole of oxygen at 300 K
and 100 bar using :
(i) the ideal gas law
(ii) the van der Waals equation.
Take a = 0.1378 Nm
4
/mol
2
and b = 3.18* 10
5
m
3
/mol. [6]
(c) Define
0
API gravity. Give the classification of crude oil based
on
0
API. [4]
3. (a) Explain with neat block diagram the principle, overall
mass balance and component balance of the following unit
operations : 12
(i) Distillation
(ii) Absorption
(iii) Extraction
[3862]-203 3 P.T.O.
(b) A process stream contains 4% (wt) salt and the rest water.
This is prepared by passing a part of pure water stream through
a saturator containing the salt. The solution leaving the saturator
containing 20% salt is mixed the pure water bypassed to get
the process stream. What fraction of the pure water available
is to be bypassed through the saturator ? [6]
Or
4. (a) Explain with neat Block diagram the Bypass, Recycle and Purging
operation. Define combined feed ratio, Mixed feed ratio and
Purge ratio. [9]
(b) An aqueous solution of methanol containing 30% (wt) methanol
is to be separated into a distillate product containing 95%
methanol and the bottom product containing 3% methanol. For
treating 100 kg of feed with a reflux ratio of 2.5 on a weight basis.
Calculate : [9]
(i) amount of distillate and bottoms product
(ii) the amount of vapor condensed in the condenser per kg
of distillate
(iii) the amount of vapor condensed in the condenser per kg
of feed.
5. (a) A gas mixture consisting of 80% ethane and 20% oxygen is
burned in an engine with 250% excess air. 80% of the ethane
goes to CO
2
, 15% to CO and 5% remains unburned. Calculate
the composition of the exhaust gases on : [8]
[3862]-203 4
(i) a wet basis
(ii) a dry basis.
(b) A synthesis gas analyzing 6% CO
2
, 0.5% O
2
, 40% CO, 50%
H
2
and the rest N
2
is burned with 70% excess air. What
is the composition of flue gas ? [8]
Or
6. A 1 : 3 nitrogen hydrogen mixture is fed to a converter resulting
in 20% conversion to ammonia. After the complete separation of
ammonia unconverted gases are recycled to the converter. The initial
reaction mixture contains 0.2% argon by volume. If the limit of
argon in the reactor is 5% by volume of N
2
-H
2
mixture in the
reactor.
Estimate the following : [16]
(i) the fraction of recycle that is purged
(ii) the moles of ammonia produced per 100 moles of feed
(iii) the overall conversion of ammonia.
SECTION II
7. (a) Define the following and give their utility : [8]
(i) Antoine equation
(ii) Clapeyron equation
(iii) Raoults Law
(iv) Dew point temperature
[3862]-203 5 P.T.O.
(b) At 300 K, the vapor pressures of two pure liquids A and
B are respectively 80 kPa and 50 kPa. the concentration of
A in the vapor in equilibrium with a solution of A and B
is found to be 35% (mol).
Determine the composition of the liquid and the total pressure
of the vapor. [4]
(c) Give the Bubble point temperature calculation flow chart. [4]
Or
8. The Vapor pressure of benzene (A) and chlorobenzene (B) are given
below :
T(K) P
A
S
(kPA) P
B
S
(kPA)
352.8 101.3 18.2
363.2 135.1 27.7
373.2 178.7 39.06
383.2 232.5 53.7
393.2 298.0 72.3
405.3 395.3 101.3
Assume that benzene and chlorobenzene form an ideal solution.
Prepare the T-x-y diagram for the system at 101.3 kPa. Using
the T-x-y diagram, determine the bubble point and dew point
of an equimolar mixture of benzene and chlorobenzene at 101.3
kPa. [16]
[3862]-203 6
9. (a) One kilogram of ice at 0C is heated so that it is completely
converted to steam at 150C and 101.3 kPa. What is the enthalpy
change accompanying the process. The heat of fusion of water
at given 0C and 101.3 kPa is 335 kJ/kg. The heat capacity
equation of liquid water is :
C
p
= 18.296 + 47.212*10
2
T-133.88*10
5
T
2
+ 1314.2
*10
9
T
3
and heat capacity of water vapor at 101.3 kPa is
given by :
C
p
= 30.475 + 9.652 * 10
3
T + 1.189 * 10
6
T
2
where Cp is in kJ/kmol K and T is in K.
Use steam table wherever necessary. [10]
(b) A gas mixture contains species A (MW = 30) 15%, species
B(MW = 45) 45% and species C (MW = 80) 40% by weight.
Calculate the quantity of heat necessary to heat one kilomole
of the mixture from 300 K to 2700 K. The constants for molar
heat capacity Cp = a + bT + cT
2
(kJ/kmol K) and T is in
K, are given as : [8]
Species a b c*10
3
A 25 0.05 0.01
B 30 0.009 0.05
C 21 0.08 0.001
[3862]-203 7 P.T.O.
Or
10. (a) A steam jacketed vessel is charged with 200 kg of a feed
material (heat capacity 3.5 kJ/kg K) at 295 K to heat it to
373 K. The heating is done by complete condensation of saturated
steam at 40 bar ( = 1714 kJ/kg) in the jacket. The rate
of heat loss from the vessel is estimated to be at a rate
of 1.5 kJ/s. Determine the mass of steam needed if the charge
was heated for one hour. [10]
(b) With respect to the Humidification operation, define the
following : [8]
(i) absolute humidity
(ii) Molal humidity
(iii) Percent humidity
(iv) Humid volume
(v) Wet bulb temperature
(vi) Adiabatic saturation temperature
(vii) Humid heat
(viii) Dry bulb temperature.
11. (a) In a sulfuric acid plant, sulfur dioxide is obtained by the roasting
of iron pyrites containing 75% FeS
2
and 25% gangue. Iron
sulphide reacts with oxygen according to the reaction :
4 FeS
2
+ 11 O
2
2 Fe
2
O
3
+ 8SO
2
[3862]-203 8
The cinder formed on the combustion analyzes 3% FeS
2
.
Determine the standard heat of reaction per kilogram of
ore, given the following standard heat of formation values at
298 K : [12]
FeS
2
(s) = 178.02 kJ/mol; Fe
2
O
3
(s) = 822.71 kJ/mol and
SO
2
(g) = 296.9 kJ/mol
(b) State Hesss Law and Kirchhoffs equation. [4]
Or
12. Hydrogen gas is burned in an adiabatic reactor with 1.5 times the
theoretical quantity of air, both air and hydrogen being at 298 K
initially. What will be the temperature of the reaction products ?
The standard heat of formation of gaseous water is 241.826 kJ/
mol. The heat capacities Cp = a + bT + cT
2
in kJ/kmol K of the
gases are given below : [16]
Component a ,b*10
3
,c*10
6
O
2
25.611 13.260 4.2077
N
2
27.034 5.815 0.2889
Water vapor 30.475 9.652 1.189
[3862]-204
S.E. (Poly/Petro/P.Chem) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MOMENTUM TRANSFER
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer Q. No. 1 or Q. No. 2, Q. No. 3 or Q. No. 4
Q. No. 5 or Q. No. 6 from Section I and Q. No. 7 or
Q. No. 8, Q. No. 9 or Q. No. 10, Q. No. 11 or
Q. No. 12 from Section II.
answer-books.
(vi) Assume suitable data if necessary.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain viscosity index and its importance in lubrication mechanics.
What are multigrade oils ? Why are they used ? [4+2]
(b) Convert a pressure of 2000 Pa into :
(i) head of mercury absolute
P.T.O.
[3862]-204 2
(ii) head of water gauge
(iii) GPa gauge
(iv) MPa absolute.
Consider standard atmospheric pressure. [8]
(c) Explain bulk modulus of elasticity and its importance in
compressibility. [4]
Or
2. (a) Explain concepts of absolute pressure and gauge pressure
graphically. Show standard pressure, +ve and suction pressures
correctly on it. [6]
(b) The velocity distribution on a rectangular plate of dimensions
5m 3m on one side is given by :
u = 3y
2
6y + 10.
Determine the drag force on one side of the plate if the viscosity
of fluid is 200 cs. The R.D. of fluid is 0.6. [6]
(c) A mercury manometer showed a deflection of 6 cms when connected
to two points in a pipeline carrying water. Determine the pressure
difference in kPa. If the manometer is now replaced by oil of
sp. gr. 0.8, find the manometric deflection for the same pressure
difference. Which manometer is suitable ? Why ? [6]
[3862]-204 3 P.T.O.
3. (a) List any 6 types of fluid flows and explain any two in detail
with examples. [3+5]
(b) For a velocity field determined by :
V = (3x
2
6) i + (2y
2
3) j + (3z
2
t) k
Determine :
(i) Velocity at (1, 1, 1) at t = 2 seconds. [2]
(ii) Acceleration at (1, 2, 1) at t = 1 second. [3]
(iii) Rotation at (2, 1, 1) at t = 3 seconds. [3]
Or
4. (a) State Law of Conservation of Mass. When does it fail ?
Derive its mathematical expression for steady flow along a
streamline. [1+1+6]
(b) For = 8xy determine and hence the velocity at the point
(2, 3) vectorially and in magnitude. [8]
5. (a) Explain with examples 4 different corrections to the Bernoulli
equation and why they are necessary. Which forces are considered
in the Bernoulli equation ? [6+2]
(b) Draw a neat labelled sketch of the Venturimeter explaining function
of each part. Derive the formula for obtaining Q through
it. [5+3]
[3862]-204 4
Or
6. (a) Compare and contrast between the Venturimeter and Orificemeter.
State the formula for obtaining Q in each. [6+2]
(b) Draw diagram of Pitot tube and explain its principle
and working. [2+1+1]
(c) Explain how flowmeters are calibrated with an example. [4]
SECTION II
7. (a) For a steady flow of oil of R.D. 0.8 and viscosity 2500 CP
flowing through a pipe of 250 mm diameter with an axial velocity
of 20 cm/sec, determine :
(i) Flow rate in lps
(ii) Energy gradient over 10 m length
(iii) Power required to maintain the flow
(iv) Drag force over 10 m length
(v) Velocity at 35 mm from boundary
(vi) Friction factor. [12]
(b) Draw Moody diagram and explain how f varies with laminar
and turbulent flows. What is its use ? [5+1]
Or
8. (a) Starting from first principles derive for laminar flow through
pipes :
(i) Expression for maximum shear stress. [3]
(ii) Expression for maximum velocity. [3]
(iii) Hagen-Poiseuille equation. [6]
[3862]-204 5 P.T.O.
(b) Draw H.S.B. and H.R.B. and explain their importance in the
turbulent flow. [6]
9. (a) Define boundary layer and explain different boundary layer
thicknesses with their importance. [8]
(b) Explain boundary layer separation with neat sketches and show
how it contributes to drag. Explain types of drag. [6+2]
Or
10. (a) Explain the role of boundary layer in heat transfer with sketches. [4]
(b) Explain two-phase flow with neat sketches. [4]
(c) Compare between pumps and blowers on any four
points. [4]
(d) Explain the importance of boundary layer studies in the turbulent
flow. [4]
11. (a) The pressure drop in a pipe flow P depends upon the pipe
length L, the flow velocity V, the pipe diameter D, the fluid
viscosity , the fluid density , surface roughness and the
friction factor f. Determine relevant terms after performing
dimensional analysis. [8]
(b) Explain the role of NPSH in cavitation studies. [4]
(c) Explain priming and its importance in centrifugal
pumps. [4]
[3862]-204 6
Or
12. (a) Explain how repeating variables are selected with an
example. [4]
(b) Explain the role of D.A. in experimental work with an example. [4]
(c) Check whether the following equations are dimensionally
homogeneous : [4]
(i)
D =
(ii)
2
5
LQ
12.1D
f
f
h =
(d) Draw operating characteristics for centrifugal pump and explain
their use to the end user, with an example. [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-205
S.E. (Polymer/Petroleum/Petrochemical) (First Semester)
EXAMINATION, 2010
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
(2008 COURSE)
Q. No. 4, Q. No. 5 or Q. No. 6 from Section I
and Q. No. 7 or Q. No. 8, Q. No. 9 or Q. No. 10,
answer-books.
(vi) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) A homogeneous cable of length L and uniform cross-section
is suspended from one end :
(i) Denoting by r, the density of the cable material and
by E its modulus of elasticity, determine the elongation
of the cable dut to its own weight.
[3862]-205 2
(ii) Assuming now the cable to be horizontal, determine the
force that should be applied to each end of the cable
to obtain the same elongation as in part (i). [10]
(b) A steel specimen 16 mm in diameter stretches by 0.06 mm
over a gauge length of 60 mm under an axial load of 40 kN.
Calculate the strain energy stored in the specimen. If the load
at the elastic limit for the specimen is 60 kN, calculate the
elongation at elastic limit and the proof resilience. [8]
Or
2. (a) A rigid bar AD is supported by two steel wires of 1.5 mm
diameter (E = 200 GPa) and a pin at A as in Fig. 1 knowing
that the wires were initially taught, determine :
(i) additional tension in each wire when a 1 kN load P
is applied at D.
(ii) the corresponding deflection of point D. [10]
Fig. 1
300 mm 300 mm 300 mm
250 mm
450 mm
A
B C
D
P = 1 kN
E
F
[3862]-205 3 P.T.O.
(b) A collar at the end of a vertical steel rod 25 mm in diameter,
checks the fall of a weight of 2.5 kN which falls through a
height of 4 mm before it strikes the collar. Find the shortest
length of the rod which will bear the impact if the stress
is not to exceed 125 N/mm
2
. E = 210 GPa. [8]
3. (a) Derive the expression for principal stresses and position of
principal plane with usual notations. [8]
(b) Compare the weights of equal lengths of hollow and solid shaft
to resist the same torsional moment for same maximum shear
stress. Assume internal diameter 0.75 times the external diameter
for hollow shaft. [8]
Or
4. (a) Find out principal stresses, principal planes and maximum shear
stress for the Fig. 2. Use Mohrs circle method. [8]
Fig. 2
15 MPa
15 MPa
9 MPa
9 MPa
35 MPa 35 MPa
[3862]-205 4
(b) A solid circular shaft transmits 75 kW at 200 rpm. Calculate
the shaft diameter, if the twist in the shaft is not to exceed
1 in 2 meters length of shaft and shear stress is limited
to 50 MPa. Take C = 100 GPa. [8]
5. (a) Write the basic difference between thin and thick shells. Also
write the assumption for Lames theory for thick shell. [6]
(b) A cylindrical shell 3 m long which is closed at the ends has
an internal diameter of 1 m and a wall thickness of 15 mm.
Calculate the circumferential and longitudinal stresses induced
and also change in dimensions of the shell if it is subjected
to an internal pressure of 1.5 MPa. Take E = 200 GPa and
m = 0.3. [10]
Or
6. (a) Derive the formulae for circumferential, longitudinal and maximum
shear stress. Also write co-relation between them. [8]
(b) A thick walled closed-end cylinder is made of an Aluminium
alloy with E = 72 GPa and m = 0.33, has inside diameter
of 200 mm and outside diameter of 800 mm. The cylinder
is subjected to internal fluid pressure of 150 MPa. Determine
the principal stresses and maximum shear stress at a point
on the inside surface of the cylinder. [8]
[3862]-205 5 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) Derive the flexural formula. [8]
(b) Draw S.F.D. and B.M.D. for the beam AB supported and loaded
as shown in Fig. 3. [9]
Fig. 3
Or
8. (a) The beam is loaded as shown in Fig. 4. The cross-section of
the beam is as shown in Fig. 4. Draw bending stress
diagram. [9]
Fig. 4
10 kN
20 kN-m
5 kN/m
2 m 2 m 2 m
3 m
A
B
C D
E
A
B
2 m
2 m
50 kN
250 mm
150 mm
50
mm
40
mm
[3862]-205 6
(b) Draw S.F.D. and B.M.D. for the beam shown in Fig. 5. [8]
Fig. 5
9. (a) Derive the expression for shear stress. [8]
(b) Show that for mild steel columns, Eulers formula is applicable
only when the slenderness ratio is greater than 80, if both
the ends are hinged. Take crippling stress and modulus of
elasticity as 330 MPa and 214 MPa. [8]
Or
10. (a) The cross-section of C.I. beam is a T section with the
following dimensions Flange of T : 150 mm 50 mm, we
of T : 50 mm 150 mm. The beam is of 6 m span and
simply supported at ends. UDL of 35 kN/m is acting throughout
the span. Draw shear stress distribution diagram. [8]
(b) A cast iron hollow column having 80 mm external diameter
and 60 mm internal diameter is 2 m long with both ends
fixed. Using Rankines formula, find the crippling load. Assume
f
y
= 600 MPa and Rankines constant = (1/1600). [8]
3 m
2 m
3 m
15 kN/m
10 kN/m
A
B C
D
[3862]-205 7 P.T.O.
11. (a) At a certain section of a shaft of 80 mm external diameter,
there is a bending moment of 35 kN-m and twisting moment
of 50 kN-m. Determine the principal stresses. [8]
(b) A simply supported beam of uniform section and span L is
loaded with two equal loads W at point (L/4) from each end.
Show that the central deflection is (11 WL
3
/384EI). [9]
Or
12. (a) What is core of a section ? Derive and show the core of
the rectangular section. [8]
(b) Determine the maximum stress in the bolts for the bracket
shown in Fig. 6. [9]
All dimensions are in mm.
Fig. 6
100 kN
80 mm
120 mm
30
50
30
50
[3862]-206
S.E (Polymer/Petroleum and Petrochemical) (Second Semester)
EXAMINATION, 2010
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRYII
(2008 Course)
N.B. :(i) Answer three questions from section I and three questions
from Section II
answer-books.
(v) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier Charts, electronic
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain the following reactions of glucose : [6]
(i) Osazone formation
(ii) Reduction
(iii) Ester formation
(b) Define enzyme. Explain four factors affecting enzyme
activity. [6]
(c) Draw the structure of the following carbohydrates : [4]
(i) Amylose
(ii) Cellobiose
P.T.O.
[3862]-206 2
Or
2. (a) Write a note on classification of amino acids. [6]
(b) Explain secondary structure of protein. [6]
(c) Explain the following terms : [4]
(i) Monosaccharides
(ii) Oligosaccharides
3. (a) Give synthesis of carboxylic acids : [6]
(i) By oxidation of olefins
(ii) By oxidation of aldehydes
(iii) By using Grignard reagent.
(b) How will you prepare aldehydes by oxidation of primary alcohols
and by reduction of acid chlorides ? [6]
(c) Explain the use of Friedel-Craft reaction in the synthesis of
ketones. [4]
Or
4. (a) Explain synthesis of amides starting from : [6]
(i) Acid chloride
(ii) Acid anhydride
(iii) Nitriles
(b) Explain Clemmensen reduction and Wolff-Kishner reduction. [6]
(c) Explain Gabriel synthesis for the preparation of primary
amines. [4]
[3862]-206 3 P.T.O.
5. (a) Find the
max
for the following dienes : [6]
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b) Explain : [6]
(i) How does the ring size affect the IR frequency of carbonyl
compound ?
(ii) TMS is used as standard reference for the measurement
of chemical shift.
(c) Define : [6]
(i) Chromophore
(ii) Bathochromic shift
(iii) Hypsochromic shift
(iv) Chemical shift
Or
6. (a) (i) State and explain Beer-Lamberts law.
[3862]-206 4
(ii) Molecular formula of an organic compound is C
3
H
6
O. It
shows
max
= 2720 and 1730 cm
1
. Suggest the probable
structure. [6]
(b) Explain with reason, how many signals are expected in NMR
spectra of the following compounds : [6]
(i) Dimethyl ether
(ii) Ethanol
(iii) 1,4 dimethyl benzene
(c) How is the structure of an organic compound determined by
using its UV-Visible, IR and
1
HNMR spectroscopy ? [6]
SECTION II
Atomic Numbers : Ti = 22, V = 23, Cr = 24, Mn = 25, Fe = 26,
Co = 27, Ni = 28, Cu = 29.
7. (a) What is an orbital ? What are quantum numbers ? Give their
significance. [6]
(b) With the help of molecular orbital diagram explain magnetic
properties of O
2
molecule and calculate its bond order. [6]
(c) Explain bonding in C
2
H
2
molecule on the basis of VBT
theory. [4]
Or
8. (a) What is resonance ? Draw resonance structures for
1
3
NO

and
2
3
CO

ions. [6]
[3862]-206 5 P.T.O.
(b) With the help of molecular orbital diagram explain magnetic
properties of dinitrogen molecule and calculate its bond
order. [6]
(c) Discuss in brief the valance shell electron pair repulsion
theory. [4]
9. (a) Calculate the crystal field stabilization energy for [Fe(H
2
O)
6
]
2+
and [Fe(CN)
6
]
4
and predict which one of them is more
stable. [6]
(b) [Ni(CO)
4
] is tetrahedral and diamagnetic but [Cu(NH
3
)
4
]
2+
is
square planar and paramagnetic, explain using VBT. [6]
(c) Calculate effective atomic number for [Co(NH
3
)
6
]
3+
and
Fe(CO)
5
. [4]
Or
10. (a) Explain variable oxidation states shown by first transition
series. [6]
(b) Explain colour and catalytic properties shown by transition metal
complexes. [6]
(c) Define and explain ligands and co-ordination number. [4]
11. (a) What is chromatography ? Enlist and explain various principles
involved in chromatographic separations. [7]
[3862]-206 6
(b) Write a short note on Thermo-gravimetric analysis. [7]
(c) Write a short informative note on Atomic absorption
spectroscopy. [4]
Or
12. (a) Write a short note on Gas chromatography. [7]
(b) Explain the variation of Atomic radii with atomic number in
a period and in a group. [4]
(c) Explain column chromatography and give its merits. [7]
[3862]-207
S.E. (Petroleum/Petrochemical/Polymer
Engineering) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
HEAT TRANSFER
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(ii) Draw neat diagrams wherever necessary.
(iii) Numbers to the right indicate full marks.
(v) Use of logarithmic table, electronic pocket calculators is
allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain the following : [16]
(i) Fouriers law of heat conduction
(ii) Newtons law of cooling
(iii) Stefan-Boltzmann law of Radiation
(iv) Thermal resistance.
(b) An Aluminium plate 50 mm thick whose one face is maintained
at 250C and other face at 50C. Thermal conductivity
K
(Al)
= 225 W/mC. Calculate the rate of the heat transfer
per unit area through the given plate. [2]
P.T.O.
[3862]-207 2
Or
2. (a) Derive the necessary expression for the heat conduction through
a composite wall made up of three layers of different materials.
Explain the term Thermal Contact Resistance. [14]
(b) Write a note on critical thickness of insulation. [4]
3. (a) Discuss in detail the Kirchhoffs law and Wiens displacement
law. [10]
(b) Write a note on Black Body, White Body, Opaque Body. [6]
Or
4. (a) Derive and discuss in detail the necessary expression for the
heat exchange between non-black parallel bodies. [10]
(b) Write a note on Radiation shields. [6]
5. (a) A hot plate 1 m 1.5 m is maintained at 300C, air at
20 C blows over the plate. If the convective heat transfer coefficient
is 20 W/m
2
C, calculate the rate of heat transfer. [4]
(b) Write a note on heat transfer by Natural Convection. Differentiate
between Natural Convection Vs. Force Convection. [12]
Or
6. (a) Discuss any five dimensionless numbers used in heat transfer
studies. [10]
(b) Elaborate on Dittus-Boelter equation. [6]
[3862]-207 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) Discuss the different types of heat exchangers with neat
diagrams. [12]
(b) Define the terms : Heat Exchanger Effectiveness and Number
of Transfer Units. [6]
Or
8. (a) Write a note on Overall heat transfer coefficient. [8]
(b) Write a note on NTU method to calculate the effectiveness
for the parallel flow heat exchanger. [10]
9. (a) Write a note on film and drop-wise condensation. [10]
(b) Define the term boiling and condensation and applications of
boiling process. [6]
Or
10. (a) Discuss the different boiling regimes with neat diagram. [10]
(b) Discuss the effects of the presence of non-condensable gases
on condensation. [6]
11. (a) With neat diagram discuss the single effect Evaporators. [6]
(b) Discuss in detail Multiple Effect Evaporators. [10]
[3862]-207 4
Or
12. (a) Discuss in detail with neat diagrams the following : [10]
(i) Short tube evaporator
(ii) Long tube vertical evaporator.
(b) Discuss the terms : Material and enthalpy balances for single
effect evaporator. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-208
S.E. (Poly/Petro/Petrochem) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
PARTICULATE TECHNOLOGY
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Discuss the following : [8]
(1) Single particle
(2) Sphericity
(3) Ferets diameter
(4) Mass mean diameter.
[3862]-208 2
(b) DefineAgglomeration.Listdifferentmechanismofagglomeration.
Explain any two mechanisms with example. [8]
Or
2. (a) What is degree of mixing in case of solid mixing ? [2]
(b) List the different type of conveyor used in transportation of
solid. Explain Belt conveyor with neat sketch. [8]
(c) Calculatethesurfacevolumediameterforthefollowingparticulate
material : [6]
Size range (mm) Mass of Particle
in range (gm)
704 +352 25
352 +176 37.5
176 +88 62.5
88 +44 75
PAN 50
3. (a) Derive the relationship between critical speed of ball mill with
radius of ball mill and radius of ball. [6]
(b) A certain set of crushing roll has roll of 100 cm diameter
by 38 cm width face. They are set so that crushing surfaces
are 1.25 cm apart at narrowest point. The manufacturer
[3862]-208 3 P.T.O.
recommends that they may be run at 50 to 100 rpm. They
crush a rock having specific gravity 2.35 and angle of nip 30.
What are maximum permissible size of feed and maximum
actual capacity in Ton per hour, if the actual capacity is 12%
of theoretical ? [8]
(c) What would be diameter of set of rolls to take feed of size
equivalent to 38 mm sphere to crush to 12.7 mm, if coefficient
of friction is 0.35 ? [4]
Or
4. (a) Explain with neat sketch construction and working of Gyratory
crusher. [8]
(b) A material is crushed in black jaw crusher and the average
sizeofparticleisreducedfrom5cmto1.3cmwithconsumption
of 37
(watts) (hours)
metic ton
. What will be the consumption of energy
necessary to crush the same material of average size 8 cm
to 3 cm ? You may assume that mechanical efficiency remains
unchanged using :
(1) Rittinger law
(2) Kicks law. [8]
(c) Differentiate between Crusher and Grinder. [2]
[3862]-208 4
5. (a) Define sedimentation. State and explain the factor affecting
sedimentation. [8]
(b) Explainwithneatsketchconstructionandworkingofcontinuous
thickener. [8]
Or
6. (a) Discuss in brief Kynch theory of sedimentation. [8]
(b) A slurry of solid concentration 200 kg/cm
3
is fed to sludge
thickener with a circular basin at rate of 360 m
3
/hr. The result
of batch settling test are as follows :
Solid Concentration Settling Velocity
(kg/cm
3
) (mm/s)
400 35
500 22
600 15
700 10
800 7
900 5
1000 4
1100 3
Determine the minimum area and diameter of thickener.
Also calculate the underflow volumetric flow rate, if a value
of 1250 kg/m
3
for underflow conc. was selected. [8]
[3862]-208 5 P.T.O.
SECTION II
(1) Fluidisation
(2) Minimum fluidisation velocity
(3) Froude Number.
(b) Draw neat sketch of spouted bed and explain principle and
working of spouted bed. [8]
(c) What is centrifugal fluidisation ? [2]
Or
8. (a) A tube of 0.05 m
2
cross-sectional area is packed with spherical
particle upto height of 0.25 m. The porosity of bed is 0.35.
It is desired to fluidized particle with water (r = 1000 kg/m
3
,
viscosity = 10
3
Pa.s). Determine minimum fluidisation
velocity by Ergun equation. Dia. of particle = 0.01 m, Density
of particle = 2600 kg/m
3
. [8]
(b) A 0.5 m high bed made up of 1 mm diameter of glass sphere
(r = 2500 kg/m
3
) is to be fluidised by water (r = 1000
kg/m
3
). If at the point of incipient fluidization bed voidage
40%, calculate pressure drop cross bed. [4]
[3862]-208 6
(c) Air flow through a packed bed of powdery material of 1 cm
depth at superfacial gas velocity of 1 cm/sec. A manometer
connected to unit register a pressure drop of 1 cm of water.
The bed has porosity 0.4. Estimate particle size of the power
(r
air
= 1.23 kg/m
3
, viscosity of air = 1.8 10
5
kg/ms). [4]
9. (a) A plate and frame press filtering slurry gave a total 25 m
3
of filtrate in 30 minutes and 35 m
3
in 60 min when filtration
was stopped. Estimate the washing time in minutes if 10 m
3
of wash water is used. The resist of cloth can be neglected,
constant pressure is used throughout. [8]
(b) A rotary drum filter, operating at 0.03 Hz filter
0.0075m
3
/sec. operating under the same vacuum and neglecting
the resistance of filter cloth at what speed must filter be
operated to give filtration rate of 0.0160 m
3
/sec. [4]
(c) A leaf filter, filtering a slurry, gave a total of 8 m
3
filter
rate in 30 min. Filtration was continued till 11.3 m
3
of filtrate
was collected. Estimate washing time in minutes if 11.3 m
3
of water is used. Resistance of cloth is neglected and constant
pressure is used throughout. [6]
[3862]-208 7 P.T.O.
Or
10. (a) Discuss with neat sketch working of vacuum leaf filter. [8]
(b) Derive relationship between thickness of cake and volume of
filtrate. [6]
(c) Explain in brief preliminary treatment of slurry before
filtration. [4]
11. (a) What are mechanical classifiers ? List mechanical classifiers
and explain construction and working of Bowl classifier. [8]
(b) Explain the principle, construction and working of Gravity
settling tank. [6]
(c) Draw neat and label sketch of electrostatic separator. [2]
Or
12. (a) Discuss the construction and working and principle of cyclone
separator. [8]
(b) Write a short note on Liquid Washing. [6]
(c) Draw neat and label sketch of Inertia or Momentum
Separators. [2]
[3862]-209
S.E. (Polymer/Petroleum/Petrochemical Engineering (II Sem.)
EXAMINATION, 2010
ELEMENTS OF SOCIAL SCIENCES
(2008 COURSE)
from Section-II
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain Law of Demand with its assumptions and exceptions. [8]
(b) State and explain various kinds of markets. [8]
Or
(a) Economic problem arises due to scarcity. Comment. [8]
(b) Discuss the scope and nature of Engineering Economics. [8]
2. (a) Explain the features of mixed economy. [8]
(b) What is money ? Explain the functions of money. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-209 2
Or
(a) State the different factors of production and explain in
brief. [8]
(b) Discuss the role of Government of India for the development
of modern economy. [8]
(i) Specialization
(ii) Foreign Trade Policy of India
(iii) Rationing of Prices.
Or
Explain the following :
(a) LPG model of economic development in India. [9]
(b) Objectives of 5 year plans for economic development. [9]
SECTION II
4. (a) What is a family ? What are its different types ? Explain
the features of modern family. [8]
(b) Trace the history of civilizations in brief. [8]
Or
(a) Discuss the impact of Globalization on Indian society. [8]
(b) India is a land of Unity in Cultural Diversity. Comment. [8]
[3862]-209 3 P.T.O.
5. (a) Discuss the problem of religious fundamentalism in brief. [8]
(b) Explain the distinctive features of Indian Philosophy. [8]
Or
(a) Sustainable consumption is important for sustainable
development. Discuss. [8]
(b) IT revolution has changed the Indian society. Comment. [8]
(i) Caste System in India
(ii) Crimes and Punishments
(iii) Census of India.
Or
(i) Social Reforms and Reformers
(ii) Ecology and Environment
(iii) Teachings of Swami Vivekananda.
[3862]-211
S.E (I.T. & Comp.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
DISCRETE STRUCTURES
(2008 Course)
N.B. : (i) Attempt from Section I Q. 1 or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4,
Q. 5 or Q. 6. Attempt from Section II Q. 7 or Q. 8,
Q. 9 or Q. 10, Q. 11 or Q. 12.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Prove by induction for n 0 [6]
1
2
1
1 ....
1
n
n
a
a a a
a
+
+ + + + =
.
(b) In a survey of 60 people it was found that : [6]
25 read Business India
26 read India Today
26 read Times of India
11 read both Business India and India Today
P.T.O.
[3862]-211 2
9 read both Business India and Times of India
8 read both India Today and Times of India
8 read none of these.
(i) How many read all three ?
(ii) How many read exactly one ?
(c) Prove that [( ) ( ) ( )] ( ) p q r s p r q s is a
tautology. [4]
Or
2. (a) Let P and Q be 2 multisets.
P = {a, a, a, c, d, d} and Q = {a, a, b, c, c}. Find : [4]
(i) P Q
(ii) P Q
(iii) P Q
(iv) P + Q
(b) P(x) : x is even. [6]
Q (x) : x is a prime number.
R (x, y) : x + y is even.
(1) Using above write an English sentence for each of the
symbolic statement given below :
(i) x (~ Q (x))
(ii) y (~ P(y))
(iii) ~ (x (P(x) Q (x)))
[3862]-211 3 P.T.O.
(2) Using the information given above write the following English
sentences in symbolic form :
(i) The sum of any two integers is an odd integer
(ii) Every integer is even or prime
(iii) Every integer is an odd integer.
(c) Find the CNF and DNF for the following : [4]
(i) (p q) (q p)
(ii) ((p (p q)) q)
(d) Define power set.
List all elements of the set p(A) XA where A = {a, b, c}. [2]
3. (a) Show that (I,
,
) is a commutative ring with identity. Where
+ and are defined as : [6]
A
b = a + b 1 and a
b = a + b ab.
(b) Let Z
n
denote the set of Integers as {1, ...., n1}.
Construct the multiplication table for
with n = 6. Is
(Z
n
,
) [6]
Where is a binary operation on Z
n
such that a b =
remainder of ab divided by n. Is Z
n
an abelian group ?
(c) Let G be a group of real nos under addition and
G
be the
group of +ve real nos under multiplication. Let f : G
G
be defined as f(x) = e
x
. Show that f is an isomorphism. [4]
[3862]-211 4
Or
4. (a) Define : [4]
(i) Subgroup
(ii) Cyclic Group
(iii) Integral domain
(iv) Field
(b) Prove the following results for the group G : [6]
(i) The identity element is unique.
(ii) Each a in G has a unique inverse a
1
.
(iii) ab = ac implies b = c.
(c) Consider the (3, 6) encoding function e : [6]
e(001) = 000000
e(001) = 000110
e(010) = 010010
e(011) = 010100
e(100) = 100101
e(101) = 100011
e(110) = 110111
e(111) = 110001
Show that e is a group code.
5. (a) Let A = B be the set of real nos. [6]
f : A B given by f(x) = 2x
3
1
[3862]-211 5 P.T.O.
g : B A given by g(y) =
1 1
3
2 2
y +
Show that f is a bijection between A and B and g is bijection
between B and A.
(b) For each of these relations on set A = {1, 2, 3, 4} decide
whether it is reflexive, symmetric, transitive or antisymmetric.
(one relation may satisfy more than one properties). [6]
R
1
= {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (4, 4)}
R
2
= {(1, 1), (1, 2), (2, 2), (2, 1), (3, 3), (4, 4)}
R
3
= {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4), (3, 1), (3, 4)}
(c) Determine whether the poset represented by each of the Hasse
diagram are lattices. Justify your answer. [6]
Or
6. (a) Find the solution to the recurrence relation
a
n
= 6 a
n1
11 a
n2
+ 6a
n3
with initial condition a
0
= 2, a
1
= 5 and a
2
= 15. [6]
h
[3862]-211 6
(b) A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} and R and S be equivalent relations on
A whose matrices are given below. Compute the matrix of
smallest relation containing R & S. [6]
R
1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 0 0
M 1 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 1

=

s
1 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1 0
M 0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 1

=

(c) Define with examples : [6]
(i) Poset
(ii) Lattice
(iii) Complemented Lattice.
SECTION II
7. (a) Which of the following graphs have a Euler circuit or path
or Hamiltonian cycle ? Write the path or circuit : [6]

[3862]-211 7 P.T.O.
(b) Determine whether graphs G and H are isomorphic or not.
(c) Find the shortest path from a to z in the following
graph. [6]
d
[3862]-211 8
Or
8. (a) State and prove Eulers formula for a connected planar graph
of order n, size e and with f faces. [6]
(b) Define the following with suitable example : [6]
(i) Cut set
(ii) Factors of graph
(iii) Weighted graph.
(c) Identify whether the graphs given are planar or not. Draw
planar representation if possible : [6]
A
[3862]-211 9 P.T.O.
9. (a) A binary tree has 10 nodes. The inorder and preorder
traversals of the trees are as shown below. Construct the binary
tree. [6]
Inorder : ABCEDFJGIH
Preorder : JCBADEFIGH
(b) Convert the following tree into binary tree. [4]
(c) Using Prims algorithm construct minimal spanning tree starting
at vertex a. [6]
g
[3862]-211 10
Or
10. (a) Find the maximum flow in the transport network given
below : [6]
(b) Construct the expression tree for the following expression.
(3 (2( 11 (9 4)))) (2 + (3 + (4 + 7))). [4]
Also evaluate the expression.
(c) Using Kruskals algorithm construct minimal spanning tree. [6]
[3862]-211 11 P.T.O.
11. (a) A single card is drawn from an ordinary deck of 52 cards.
Find the probability p that : [3]
(i) the card is a face card
(ii) the card is face card and heart
(iii) the card is face card or heart.
(b) How many seven letter words can be formed using the letters
of the word BENZENE ? [3]
(c) Two dice are tossed once. Find the probability of getting an
even number on first or a total of 8. [4]
(d) If repetitions are not permitted, how many four digit numbers
can be formed from digits 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, and 5. [6]
Or
12. (a) How many ways can the letters in the word MISSISSIPPI
be arranged ? What if Ps are to be separated ? [4]
(b) Show that :
C (2n, 2) = 2C(n, 2) + n
2
.
[6]
(c) A pair of fair dice is thrown. Find the probability p that the
sum is 10 or greater if : [3]
(i) 5 appears on first die
(ii) 5 appears on at least one die.
[3862]-211 12
(d) A coin is tossed 3 times. Find the probability that there will
appear : [3]
(i) Three heads
(ii) Exactly 2 heads
(iii) No heads.
[3862]-211
S.E (I.T. & Comp.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
DISCRETE STRUCTURES
(2008 Course)
N.B. : (i) Attempt from Section I Q. 1 or Q. 2, Q. 3 or Q. 4,
Q. 5 or Q. 6. Attempt from Section II Q. 7 or Q. 8,
Q. 9 or Q. 10, Q. 11 or Q. 12.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Prove by induction for n 0 [6]
1
2
1
1 ....
1
n
n
a
a a a
a
+
+ + + + =
.
(b) In a survey of 60 people it was found that : [6]
25 read Business India
26 read India Today
26 read Times of India
11 read both Business India and India Today
P.T.O.
[3862]-211 2
9 read both Business India and Times of India
8 read both India Today and Times of India
8 read none of these.
(i) How many read all three ?
(ii) How many read exactly one ?
(c) Prove that [( ) ( ) ( )] ( ) p q r s p r q s is a
tautology. [4]
Or
2. (a) Let P and Q be 2 multisets.
P = {a, a, a, c, d, d} and Q = {a, a, b, c, c}. Find : [4]
(i) P Q
(ii) P Q
(iii) P Q
(iv) P + Q
(b) P(x) : x is even. [6]
Q (x) : x is a prime number.
R (x, y) : x + y is even.
(1) Using above write an English sentence for each of the
symbolic statement given below :
(i) x (~ Q (x))
(ii) y (~ P(y))
(iii) ~ (x (P(x) Q (x)))
[3862]-211 3 P.T.O.
(2) Using the information given above write the following English
sentences in symbolic form :
(i) The sum of any two integers is an odd integer
(ii) Every integer is even or prime
(iii) Every integer is an odd integer.
(c) Find the CNF and DNF for the following : [4]
(i) (p q) (q p)
(ii) ((p (p q)) q)
(d) Define power set.
List all elements of the set p(A) XA where A = {a, b, c}. [2]
3. (a) Show that (I,
,
) is a commutative ring with identity. Where
+ and are defined as : [6]
A
b = a + b 1 and a
b = a + b ab.
(b) Let Z
n
denote the set of Integers as {1, ...., n1}.
Construct the multiplication table for
with n = 6. Is
(Z
n
,
) [6]
Where is a binary operation on Z
n
such that a b =
remainder of ab divided by n. Is Z
n
an abelian group ?
(c) Let G be a group of real nos under addition and
G
be the
group of +ve real nos under multiplication. Let f : G
G
be defined as f(x) = e
x
. Show that f is an isomorphism. [4]
[3862]-211 4
Or
4. (a) Define : [4]
(i) Subgroup
(ii) Cyclic Group
(iii) Integral domain
(iv) Field
(b) Prove the following results for the group G : [6]
(i) The identity element is unique.
(ii) Each a in G has a unique inverse a
1
.
(iii) ab = ac implies b = c.
(c) Consider the (3, 6) encoding function e : [6]
e(001) = 000000
e(001) = 000110
e(010) = 010010
e(011) = 010100
e(100) = 100101
e(101) = 100011
e(110) = 110111
e(111) = 110001
Show that e is a group code.
5. (a) Let A = B be the set of real nos. [6]
f : A B given by f(x) = 2x
3
1
[3862]-211 5 P.T.O.
g : B A given by g(y) =
1 1
3
2 2
y +
Show that f is a bijection between A and B and g is bijection
between B and A.
(b) For each of these relations on set A = {1, 2, 3, 4} decide
whether it is reflexive, symmetric, transitive or antisymmetric.
(one relation may satisfy more than one properties). [6]
R
1
= {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (4, 4)}
R
2
= {(1, 1), (1, 2), (2, 2), (2, 1), (3, 3), (4, 4)}
R
3
= {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4), (3, 1), (3, 4)}
(c) Determine whether the poset represented by each of the Hasse
diagram are lattices. Justify your answer. [6]
Or
6. (a) Find the solution to the recurrence relation
a
n
= 6 a
n1
11 a
n2
+ 6a
n3
with initial condition a
0
= 2, a
1
= 5 and a
2
= 15. [6]
h
[3862]-211 6
(b) A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} and R and S be equivalent relations on
A whose matrices are given below. Compute the matrix of
smallest relation containing R & S. [6]
R
1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 0 0
M 1 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 1

=

s
1 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1 0
M 0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 1

=

(c) Define with examples : [6]
(i) Poset
(ii) Lattice
(iii) Complemented Lattice.
SECTION II
7. (a) Which of the following graphs have a Euler circuit or path
or Hamiltonian cycle ? Write the path or circuit : [6]

[3862]-211 7 P.T.O.
(b) Determine whether graphs G and H are isomorphic or not.
(c) Find the shortest path from a to z in the following
graph. [6]
d
[3862]-211 8
Or
8. (a) State and prove Eulers formula for a connected planar graph
of order n, size e and with f faces. [6]
(b) Define the following with suitable example : [6]
(i) Cut set
(ii) Factors of graph
(iii) Weighted graph.
(c) Identify whether the graphs given are planar or not. Draw
planar representation if possible : [6]
A
[3862]-211 9 P.T.O.
9. (a) A binary tree has 10 nodes. The inorder and preorder
traversals of the trees are as shown below. Construct the binary
tree. [6]
Inorder : ABCEDFJGIH
Preorder : JCBADEFIGH
(b) Convert the following tree into binary tree. [4]
(c) Using Prims algorithm construct minimal spanning tree starting
at vertex a. [6]
g
[3862]-211 10
Or
10. (a) Find the maximum flow in the transport network given
below : [6]
(b) Construct the expression tree for the following expression.
(3 (2( 11 (9 4)))) (2 + (3 + (4 + 7))). [4]
Also evaluate the expression.
(c) Using Kruskals algorithm construct minimal spanning tree. [6]
[3862]-211 11 P.T.O.
11. (a) A single card is drawn from an ordinary deck of 52 cards.
Find the probability p that : [3]
(i) the card is a face card
(ii) the card is face card and heart
(iii) the card is face card or heart.
(b) How many seven letter words can be formed using the letters
of the word BENZENE ? [3]
(c) Two dice are tossed once. Find the probability of getting an
even number on first or a total of 8. [4]
(d) If repetitions are not permitted, how many four digit numbers
can be formed from digits 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, and 5. [6]
Or
12. (a) How many ways can the letters in the word MISSISSIPPI
be arranged ? What if Ps are to be separated ? [4]
(b) Show that :
C (2n, 2) = 2C(n, 2) + n
2
.
[6]
(c) A pair of fair dice is thrown. Find the probability p that the
sum is 10 or greater if : [3]
(i) 5 appears on first die
(ii) 5 appears on at least one die.
[3862]-211 12
(d) A coin is tossed 3 times. Find the probability that there will
appear : [3]
(i) Three heads
(ii) Exactly 2 heads
(iii) No heads.
[3862]-212
S.E. (Computer Engg.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
PROGRAMMING AND PROBLEM SOLVING
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Consider any one problem and solve that problem using six steps
of problem solving. Explain each step in detail. [8]
(b) State and explain any four difficulties with problem solving. [4]
(c) Compare an algorithmic solutions and heuristic solution. Support
your answer with suitable example. [4]
Or
2. (a) The railway ticket reservation system (single counter) is to be
computerized. Prepare solution to this problem using the following
tools :
(i) IPO chart
(ii) Problem analysis chart
(iii) Interactivity chart. [8]
(b) Write a pseudo code algorithm to solve the problem given in
Q. 2 (a). [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-212 2
(c) What is the order of processing of the following equations ?
R = P < Q AND S * T OR U > V + W C/3
R = A + (((B C)/D) + E ^ F + (G H) * I) ^ (J K) [4]
3. (a) Write an algorithm to calculate and print result of your exam.
(Semester I). Identify the modules (functions) and the
parameters to find the solution to this problem. Create a data
dictionary for the parameters you have identified. [8]
(b) Draw and explain coupling diagram for problem given in
Q. 3 (a). [4]
(c) Take three integers and find the minimum integer among three.
Create a decision table to solve this problem. [4]
Or
4. (a) Design an algorithm to calculate the salary of an employee using
the following problem solving strategies :
(i) Sequential logic
(ii) Decision logic
(iii) Iterative logic
(iv) Selection.
To calculate the salary consider designation, no. of days worked,
wages per day, basic salary, allowances, and deductions. Calculate
salary according to the designation of an employee. [8]
(b) What are the different parameters passing methods ? Explain
each method with suitable example. [4]
(c) Explain the concept of local variables and global variables with
suitable example. [4]
5. (a) How one can develop efficient computer solutions to problem? [4]
(b) Design and explain an algorithm to find the sum of the digits
of an integer number. [6]
[3862]-212 3 P.T.O.
(c) Design an algorithm for exchanging values of two variables. Explain
one application in detail in which we use this algorithm. [8]
Or
6. (a) State and explain the rules for designing modules while finding
solution to a problem. [4]
(b) Design and explain an algorithm for finding the multiplication
of set of numbers. [6]
(c) Design an algorithm to calculate a result of N students of
a class and find number of students passed in grades distinction,
first class, higher second class, second class, pass class. Also
find count value of failed students.
(For result consider the subjects of S.E. Computer SemesterI) [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Design an algorithm to find the maximum absolute
difference between adjacent pairs of element in an array of
N elements. [6]
(b) Write an algorithm to find the frequency of each vowel in a
line of text. [6]
(c) Devise and write a pseudo algorithm to remove duplicate elements
from two-dimensional array. [6]
Or
8. (a) Design an algorithm to find the maximum number occurs and
how many times it occurs in an array of N elements. Only
one pass should be made. [6]
(b) Write a pseudo algorithm to find the sum of rows, sum
of columns, and sum of major diagonal of a square matrix
(N N). [6]
(c) Design an algorithm to search an integer number from an array
of N elements. Use binary search. [6]
[3862]-212 4
9. (a) Write a pseudo algorithm for text length adjustment. Explain
it. [4]
(b) Write and explain an algorithm for left and right justification
for text. [6]
(c) Write and explain an algorithm that will search a string in
a text. [6]
Or
10. (a) Take two ordered sets of numbers A and B. Design an algorithm
to determine whether or not the set A is contained within
the set B. [4]
(b) Design and explain an algorithm that will search a line of text
for particular substring. [6]
(c) Write and explain an algorithm to count the number of times
a particular word occurs in a text. [6]
11. (a) Explain the following features of an object oriented programming
with suitable examples : [8]
(i) Polymorphism
(ii) Encapsulation.
(b) Write a C++ program to implement the concept of inheritance
with suitable examples. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain with example :
(i) Visibility modifiers of C++
(ii) Constructor
(iii) Destructor. [8]
(b) Compare procedural language and object oriented language
for solving problems. What are their advantages and
disadvantages ? [8]
[3862]-213
S.E. (Comp. Engg.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
(Common to Computer and I.T.)
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC DESIGN
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer Q. No. 1 or 2, Q. No. 3 or 4, Q. No. 5 or 6 from
Section I and Q. No. 7 or 8, Q. No. 9 or 10, Q. No. 11 or 12
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Design and explain in detail 4-bit input grey code to 7-segment
BCD code conversion technique. For this design use K-map
reduction and MSI circuit for each segment of display. [16]
(b) Enlist various code conversion methods. [2]
Or
2. (a) Express the following numbers in binary format. Write step
by step solution. [12]
(i) (7762)
octal
P.T.O.
[3862]-213 2
(ii) (432A)
hex
(iii) (2946)
decimal
(iv) (1101.11)
decimal.
(b) What will max. 4-digit equivalent Hex number for 4-digit max.
Decimal number ? Also perform the following substraction : [6]
(7048)
Decimal
(07A8)
Hex.
3. (a) Solve the following using Kmap reduction technique. Also draw
MSI circuit for output. [12]
(i) Z = f(A, B, C, D) = (1, 2, 3, 9, 10, 12, 15)
(ii) Z = f(A, B, C, D) = (0, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 11, 13).
(b) Explain for IC 74LSXX various characteristics in brief. [4]
Or
4. (a) Draw and explain the design of 3-I/P TTL NAND gate circuit.
Also explain various I/P, O/P states and corresponding transistor
(ON/OFF) states. [12]
(b) Explain working of 2-input CMOS-NOR gate. [4]
5. (a) Explain the working of cascaded mode magnitude comparator
IC 7485. [8]
(b) Draw and explain 4-bit BCD adder using IC 7483. Also explain
with reference to your design addition of (9 + 5)
BCD
and
(7 + 2)
BCD
. [8]
[3862]-213 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Explain decoder (1 : 8) as full adder and full substractor. Show
your design. [8]
(b) Design 28 : 1 mux using 8 : 1 mux (with enable inputs). Explain
truth table of your design in short. [Hint : you can use separate
mux for enable of respective IC's] [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Draw a 4-bit synchronous counter. Also explain timing diagram
for the same. [10]
(b) What is the advantage of M-S flip-flop ? Explain working of
MS J-K flip-flop in detail. [8]
Or
8. (a) What is advantage of MOD counter ? Explain working of
MOD-17 and MOD-24 counter with detail diagram using
IC-7490. [8]
(b) Explain ring counter with design having initial state
01011, from initial state explain all possible states in that
ring. [10]
9. (a) What is VHDL ? Explain entity-architecture declaration for
2-bit NOR and AND gate. [8]
(b) What is ASM chart ? Design ASM chart for 4-bit grey code
sequence with up-down conditions. [8]
[3862]-213 4
Or
10. A sequential ring counter with present state 01011. The circuit also
have an input Z. If Z = 0, circuit shows next-output (right shift)
else for Z = 1, it shows initial state. Draw an ASM chart and
state stable for this circuit to generate the output using mux controller
method. [16]
11. (a) Explain difference between FPGA and CPLD logic. [8]
(b) Explain machine cycle of an addition operation of a micro-
processor. Use two 8-bit numbers to explain the same. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain in brief the function of Address bus, Data bus and
control bus for a basic microprocessor. [8]
(b) Explain in brief design model of PLA for any code conversion
example. [8]
[3862]-213
S.E. (Comp. Engg.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
(Common to Computer and I.T.)
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC DESIGN
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answer Q. No. 1 or 2, Q. No. 3 or 4, Q. No. 5 or 6 from
Section I and Q. No. 7 or 8, Q. No. 9 or 10, Q. No. 11 or 12
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Design and explain in detail 4-bit input grey code to 7-segment
BCD code conversion technique. For this design use K-map
reduction and MSI circuit for each segment of display. [16]
(b) Enlist various code conversion methods. [2]
Or
2. (a) Express the following numbers in binary format. Write step
by step solution. [12]
(i) (7762)
octal
P.T.O.
[3862]-213 2
(ii) (432A)
hex
(iii) (2946)
decimal
(iv) (1101.11)
decimal.
(b) What will max. 4-digit equivalent Hex number for 4-digit max.
Decimal number ? Also perform the following substraction : [6]
(7048)
Decimal
(07A8)
Hex.
3. (a) Solve the following using Kmap reduction technique. Also draw
MSI circuit for output. [12]
(i) Z = f(A, B, C, D) = (1, 2, 3, 9, 10, 12, 15)
(ii) Z = f(A, B, C, D) = (0, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 11, 13).
(b) Explain for IC 74LSXX various characteristics in brief. [4]
Or
4. (a) Draw and explain the design of 3-I/P TTL NAND gate circuit.
Also explain various I/P, O/P states and corresponding transistor
(ON/OFF) states. [12]
(b) Explain working of 2-input CMOS-NOR gate. [4]
5. (a) Explain the working of cascaded mode magnitude comparator
IC 7485. [8]
(b) Draw and explain 4-bit BCD adder using IC 7483. Also explain
with reference to your design addition of (9 + 5)
BCD
and
(7 + 2)
BCD
. [8]
[3862]-213 3 P.T.O.
Or
6. (a) Explain decoder (1 : 8) as full adder and full substractor. Show
your design. [8]
(b) Design 28 : 1 mux using 8 : 1 mux (with enable inputs). Explain
truth table of your design in short. [Hint : you can use separate
mux for enable of respective IC's] [8]
SECTION II
7. (a) Draw a 4-bit synchronous counter. Also explain timing diagram
for the same. [10]
(b) What is the advantage of M-S flip-flop ? Explain working of
MS J-K flip-flop in detail. [8]
Or
8. (a) What is advantage of MOD counter ? Explain working of
MOD-17 and MOD-24 counter with detail diagram using
IC-7490. [8]
(b) Explain ring counter with design having initial state
01011, from initial state explain all possible states in that
ring. [10]
9. (a) What is VHDL ? Explain entity-architecture declaration for
2-bit NOR and AND gate. [8]
(b) What is ASM chart ? Design ASM chart for 4-bit grey code
sequence with up-down conditions. [8]
[3862]-213 4
Or
10. A sequential ring counter with present state 01011. The circuit also
have an input Z. If Z = 0, circuit shows next-output (right shift)
else for Z = 1, it shows initial state. Draw an ASM chart and
state stable for this circuit to generate the output using mux controller
method. [16]
11. (a) Explain difference between FPGA and CPLD logic. [8]
(b) Explain machine cycle of an addition operation of a micro-
processor. Use two 8-bit numbers to explain the same. [8]
Or
12. (a) Explain in brief the function of Address bus, Data bus and
control bus for a basic microprocessor. [8]
(b) Explain in brief design model of PLA for any code conversion
example. [8]
[3862]-214
S.E. (Computer Engineering) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is call by value and call by reference ? Explain with one
example for each. [8]
(b) Write a C program to shift elements of an integer array one
location ahead. Element present at last location of array should
be shifted on first location of the array. Write separate functions
for accepting array, shifting array, displaying array etc. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-214 2
Or
2. (a) Explain execution of the following code step by step and show
the final output : [8]
# include < stdio.h >
void display (int);
int main( )
{ int x = 4;
display (x);
return 0;
}
void display (int n)
{ if (n > 0)
display (n 1);
printf (%d, n);
}
(b) Write a C program to implement a structure for automobile
part with data members part number, part name, quantity etc.
Write separate functions for initializing structure, updating
structure, displaying structure etc. [8]
3. (a) Explain in detail the concept of data object, data structures,
linear data structure and non-linear data structure. [8]
(b) What is Asymptotic notation ? Write an algorithm for matrix
multiplication for n n matrix and find out its time complexity
by frequency count. [8]
[3862]-214 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) What is Abstract Data Type (ADT) ? Write an abstract data
type for linked list. [8]
(b) Write an algorithm for Bubble sort. Find time complexity of the
algorithm and express it using asymptotic notation. [8]
5. (a) (i) Show how a two-dimensional array is stored in memory.
Assume that array start at the address 4000. [4]
(ii) Explain how a polynomial is represented using array with
one example. [5]
(b) Write an algorithm for fast transpose of sparse matrix and find
out its time complexity. [9]
Or
6. (a) Write a C program to implement polynomial using array and
perform its multiplication. (Write separate functions for accepting
polynomial, multiplication, display). [10]
(b) (i) What is sparse matrix ? Explain with one example. [4]
(ii) What is address of element arr[4] [3] in the array arr of
size 6 6 and type integer, when arr is represented using
row major and column major representations ? Assume array
arr starts at the address 7000. [4]
SECTION II
7. (a) Sort the following numbers step by step by using Radix
sort : [8]
20, 15, 21, 06, 08, 05, 29, 02, 14, 40.
(b) Write an algorithm for binary search and find out its time
complexity. [8]
[3862]-214 4
Or
8. (a) Explain with one example index sequential search. [8]
(b) Write a C program to implement quicksort. [8]
9. (a) (i) What is static memory allocation and dynamic memory
allocation ? [4]
(ii) Compare doubly linked list and circular linked list. [4]
(b) Write an algorithm to delete and insert a node in doubly linked
list at any position. [8]
Or
10. (a) (i) What is skep list ? Epxlain with one example. [4]
(ii) Draw GLL for the following expression : [4]
(a, b, (c, d, (e, f), g, (h, i), ((j, k)), l), m)
(b) What a C program to implement circular linked list and display
the contents in reverse order. (Write separate functions for create
and display) [8]
11. (a) (i) Define stack and write abstract data type for stack. [5]
(ii) What is multistack ? Explain with one example. [4]
(b) Write a C program to implement circular queue using array
and perform insert and delete operation. [9]
Or
12. (a) (i) Differentiate between linear and circular queue. [2]
(ii) Explain stack overflow and underflow conditions. [4]
(iii) What is priority queue ? Give an application for priority
queue. [3]
(b) Write a C program to reverse the given string using stack.
Find out time complexity of program. [9]
[3862]-215
S.E. (Computer Engineering and IT)) (I Sem.)
EXAMINATION, 2010
HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCE
(2008 COURSE)
N.B. : (i) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is meant by Sociology ? Explain the importance of
sociology. [6]
(b) Differentiate between primary and secondary kin. [4]
(c) Describe in brief the financial powers of Panchayati Raj
Institutions. [6]
(d) Define caste. [2]
Or
2. (a) What is the difference between gender equality and gender
equity ? [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-215 2
(b) Explain the components of secularism in India. [6]
(c) What are the problems in a modern Indian family ? [6]
(d) Define marriage. [2]
3. (a) Explain any two methods of acquiring sociological
knowledge. [6]
(b) Explain the concept of cultural lag. [4]
(c) Describe in brief the National Nutrition Policy. [6]
Or
4. (a) What are the problems faced in the study of human
beings ? [6]
(b) Differentiate between social change and social progress. [4]
(c) Describe in brief the National Social assistance program
(NSAP). [6]
5. (a) What is the impact of precision farming in agricultural
revolution ? [5]
(b) How does IPR laws affect the biotechnology sector
development ? [6]
(c) Explain the three basic elements of Green Revolution. [3]
(d) Give any two shortcomings of Green Revolution. [2]
Or
6. (a) How do you classify the industries on the basis of
ownership ? [5]
(b) Explain the consequences of Non-registration of company. [3]
(c) Explain in detail Public Sector. [8]
[3862]-215 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) What are the steps taken by leading IT industries for the
pollution control ? [4]
(b) Explain in detail effects of Global warming. [4]
(c) What are the factors which contribute to the loss of
Biodiversity ? [5]
(d) Explain the following ecosystems : [3]
(i) Arctic tundra
(ii) Urban ecosystem.
Or
8. (a) With a suitable diagram, explain ecological pyramid. [5]
(b) Explain energy flow models of an ecosystem. [5]
(c) Explain the measures to be taken for protection of
biodiversity. [4]
(d) Define the following population characteristics : [2]
(i) Infant Mortality Rate (IMR)
(ii) Zero-population growth.
9. (a) What are the functions of planning commission ? [8]
(b) Compare the concepts of Microeconomics and Macroeconomics. [6]
(c) Define Inflation. [2]
[3862]-215 4
Or
10. (a) Explain National Population Policy, 2000 (NPP 2000). [8]
(b) Discuss INDIA VISION, 2020. [8]
11. (a) What are the objectives of Budgeting ? [6]
(b) Differentiate between Shares and Debentures. [6]
(c) Define the following terms : [6]
(i) Marginal Cost
(ii) Fixed Cost
(iii) Variable Cost.
Or
12. Write short notes on (any three) : [18]
(i) Functions of RBI
(ii) Profit and Loss Account
(iii) Break-even analysis
(iv) Indian Banking
(v) World Trade Organization.
[3862]-216
S.E. (Comp.) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MICROPROCESSORS AND INTERFACING TECHNIQUES
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Draw and explain functional block diagram of the 8086 micro-
processor. [8]
(b) Explain with a neat diagram of memory segmentation in the
8086 microprocessor. [8]
Or
2. (a) Draw and explain write cycle timing diagram in maximum mode
of 8086 microprocessor. [8]
(b) Explain the flags register with instruction affecting the flags. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-216 2
(c) Explain the use of the following signals of 8086 micro-
processor : [2]
(i) MN/MX
(ii) DT/R
3. (a) If
(BX) = 0158H Displacement = 1B57H
(DI) = 10ASH (DS) = 2100H
and DS is used as segment register, then calculate EA and PA
for the following addressing modes : [8]
(i) Register addressing mode
(ii) Register indirect, assuming DI
(iii) Based indexed, assuming register BX and DI
(iv) Relative based indexed addressing, asuming BX and DI.
(b) Write an 8086 assembly language program for BCD to seven
segment code conversion. Use XLAT instruction and common
cathode display. Write appropriate comments. [8]
Or
4. (a) Explain the following instructions for 8086 : [8]
(i) CMPS
(ii) MOVSB/MOVSW
(iii) SCAS
(iv) STOS/LODS
[3862]-216 3 P.T.O.
(b) Explain the difference between near and far procedure of 8086
microprocessor. [4]
(c) Explain the stack structure of 8086 in detail. [4]
5. (a) What are the different components of MS-DOS ? With the help
of neat diagram, explain how MS-DOS gets loaded. [10]
(b) What is interrupt vector table of 8086 ? Explain its
structure. [8]
Or
6. (a) Explain the command words/control words of 8259 in
detail. [10]
(b) Write an initialization sequence for 8259 PIC for the following
specifications : [8]
(i) Interrupt type 32
(ii) Edge triggered, single and ICW
4
needed
(iii) Mask interrupts IR1 and IR3
SECTION II
7. (a) Draw a block diagram of 8255 PPI and explain in brief. [8]
(b) Explain BSR and I/O mode word formats of the 8255 PPI. Write
a BSR control word subroutine to set bits PC7 and PC3 and
reset them after 10 msec. Assume that a delay subroutine is
available. Address for control word register = 83H. [8]
Or
8. (a) Compare asynchronous serial communication with synchronous
communication. Draw the command instruction format of 8251
and explain it. [8]
[3862]-216 4
(b) Define the following terms for D/A conversion : [8]
(i) Resolution
(ii) Accuracy
(iii) Monotonicity
(iv) Conversion time.
9. (a) Draw and explain the following 8279 commands : [8]
(i) Keyboard/display mode set command
(ii) Read FIFO/sensor RAM command.
(b) Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8253/54. [8]
Or
10. (a) Give the control word format for 8253/54. Write a program to
initialize counter 2 in mode 0 with a count of C030H. Assume
address for control word register = 0BH, counter 0 = 08H,
counter 1 = 09H and counter 2 = 0AH. [8]
(b) Explain the necessity of 8237 DMA controller. List the features
of 8237 DMA controller. [8]
11. (a) Draw the maximum mode module of 8086 clearly showing address
latches, transreceivers and clock generator. [10]
(b) Explain the data format for 8087 NDP in brief. [8]
Or
12. (a) Draw and explain the architecture of 8087 NDP. [10]
(b) Interface 8255 PPI with 8086 microprocessor in maximum
mode. Draw interfacing diagram and mention address map for
8255. [8]
[3862]-217
DATA STRUCTURES
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) What is binary tree ? How is it different than a basic
tree ? Explain with figures. [5]
(b) Convert the following tree to Binary tree step by
step : [5]
A
B
C
D
E F
G
H I J
P.T.O.
[3862]-217 2
(c) Write a C/C++ function to print given binary tree in BFS
(without using recursion). [8]
Or
2. (a) (i) What is binary search tree ? Draw binary search tree
for the following data : [4]
10, 08, 15, 12, 13, 07, 09, 17, 20, 18, 04, 05.
(ii) What is threaded binary tree ? What are the advantages
of threaded binary tree over normal binary tree ?
Draw an in-order threaded binary tree upto three
levels. [6]
(b) Write a pseudo C function to print given in-order threaded
binary tree. Display the tree in inorder without using extra
data structures. [8]
3. (a) What is graph ? Draw how the following graph can be represented
using linked organization : [8]
A
B C D
E F
[3862]-217 3 P.T.O.
(b) Write an algorithm to print a given graph in DFS. What is
time complexity of your algorithm ? [8]
Or
4. (a) What is minimum spanning tree ? Find out minimum spanning
tree for the given graph step-by-step : [8]
A
C
B
D
F G H
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
5
8
4
3 4
5
6
(b) Write a C/C++ program to find out minimum spanning tree
of a given graph using Prims algorithm. What is time complexity
of your algorithm ? [8]
[3862]-217 4
5. (a) (i) What is height balanced tree ? Explain with one
example. [4]
(ii) Explain static and dynamic tree tables. [4]
(b) Write a Pseudo C algorithm for LL, RR, LR and RL rotations
for AVL tree. [8]
Or
6. (a) What is collision ? What are different collision
resolution techniques ? Explain any two methods in
detail. [8]
(b) Create AVL tree for the following given data : [8]
65, 85, 95, 30, 06, 71, 23, 99, 44, 21.
SECTION II
7. (a) Define Max Heap. Write Pseudo C code for the following operations
on Max Heap : [10]
(i) Insertion of element in Max Heap
(ii) Deletion of an element from Max Heap.
Mention time complexity of each operation.
(b) What is the difference between B tree and B + tree ?
Construct B + tree of order 3 for the following : [8]
F, S, Q, K, C, L, H, T, V, W, M, R.
[3862]-217 5 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) Create Min Heap (Binary) for
10, 12, 1, 14, 6, 5, 8, 15, 3, 9, 7, 4, 11, 13.
After creating Min Heap delete element 8 from Heap and repair
it. Then insert element 20 and show final result. [10]
(b) What is Btree ? Write a Pseudo C algorithm for deleting
a node from Btree. [8]
9. (a) (i) What is file ? Explain types of files. [4]
(ii) Explain different modes of opening files. [4]
(b) Write a C/C++ program to create a file. Insert records in
the file by opening file in append mode. Display all records
and search for a specific record entered by user. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain in detail different file organizations. [6]
(b) Write a C/C++ program to implement direct access file for
employee database and perform insert a record, search a record
and display database. [10]
11. (a) (i) Differentiate between structures and classes. [4]
(ii) What is STL ? What are the components of STL ? [4]
(b) Write a C++ program using STL to perform sorting of given
array of integers using bubble sort technique. [8]
[3862]-217 6
Or
(i) Containers
(ii) Iterations
(iii) Algorithms
(iv) Generic programming.
(b) Write a C++ program using STL to reverse the given array.
Use container template stack. [8]
Total No. of Questions 12] [Total No. of Printed Pages4
[3862]-218
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(ii) In Section I attempt Question Nos. 1 or 2, 3 or 4, 5 or
6 and in Section II Question Nos. 7 or 8, 9 or 10, 11 or
12.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain DDA line algorithm and further explain how it can be
extended to generate a thick line of thickness w. [8]
(b) What is meant by resolution of an image and an images aspect
ratio ? [4]
(c) Find the refresh rate of a 512 512 frame buffer, if the access
time for each pixel is 200 nanoseconds(ns). [4]
P.T.O.
[3862]-218 2
Or
2. (a) Using Bresenhams line agorithm, find out which pixel would
be turned on for the line with end points (4, 4) to (12, 9). [8]
(b) List and explain any two antialiasing methods. [4]
(c) What are the major adverse side effects of Scan Conversions ? [4]
3. (a) Explain Scanline algorithm for polygon filling and explain how
it can be exteneded for hidden line removal. [10]
(b) Describe viewing transformation. [6]
Or
4. (a) Explain Cohen-Sutherland outcode algorithm with example. [10]
(b) Explain two methods for testing whether the point is inside the
polygon or not. [6]
5. (a) Consider the square A(1, 0), B(0, 0), C(0, 1) and D(1, 1). Show
the steps to rotate the given square by 45 degrees clockwise
about point A(1, 0). [10]
(b) Explain the concepts of parallel and perspective projections. [8]
Or
6. (a) What is the need of homogenous coordinates ? Give the
homogenous coordinates for translation, rotation and scaling. [10]
(b) Prove that 2D-rotations about the origin commutes, i.e.
R1R2 = R2R1. [8]
[3862]-218 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) Give the structure of segment table and explain the segment
creation and deletion operation with suitable example. [10]
(b) Brief the basic guideline of animation. [6]
Or
8. (a) What is Animation ? Discuss the different methods of controlling
animations. [8]
(b) Discuss the concept of segmentation used in cricket animation
with suitable example. Assume your animation is having at least
3 to 4 segments in it. [8]
9. (a) Explain Warnock agorithm. Why this algorithm is also called
as area subdivision algorithm ? [8]
(b) List and explain any one two color models. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain binary space partitioning tree used to detect hidden
surfaces. [8]
(b) Describe diffuse illumination and point source illumination.[8]
11. (a) Compare Bezier and B-spline curves. [6]
(b) Why is cubic form chosen for representing curve ? [6]
(c) Discuss the topological and fractal dimensions. [6]
[3862]-218 4
Or
12. Write short notes on any three of the following : [18]
(a) Interpolating algorithm
(b) True curve generation
(c) Hilbertz curve
(d) Fractal surfaces.
[3862]-219
S.E (Computer Engineering) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
(2008 PATTERN)
N.B. : Answer any three questions from Section-I and three questions
from Section-II.
SECTION I
1. (a) With neat diagram explain in detail functional units of computer
system. [8]
(b) Perform division of the following number using restoring and
non-restoring algorithm : [10]
dividend = 1011
divisor = 0011.
Or
2. (a) Multiply the following pair of signed twos complement numbers
using Booths Algorithm : [8]
Multiplicand = 110011
Multiplier = 101100.
(b) Represent the following numbers into single precision and double
precision format : [10]
(i) 309.1875
(ii) 178.1875.
P.T.O.
[3862]-219 2
3. (a) Explain with suitable example how the size of the control words
can be reduced to obtain small store. [8]
(b) Write control sequence for the execution of the following
instruction : [8]
CALL SUB1
Or
4. (a) Give the comparison between : [8]
(i) Hardwired and Micro-programmed control.
(ii) Horizontal and Vertical Microinstructions.
(b) Explain briefly :
(i) Delay-element method [4]
(ii) Explain applications of Micro-Programming. [4]
5. (a) Explain register organization of 8086. [8]
(b) List and explain various ways in which an instruction pipeline
can deal with conditional branch instructions. [8]
Or
6. (a) Discuss in detail instruction formats of INTEL/MOTOROLA
processor. [8]
(b) Explain instruction cycle. How will you represent instruction
cycle with interrupts ? Explain. [8]
[3862]-219 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) What is virtual memory concept ? Explain the role of TLB
in virtual memory organization. [8]
(b) Explain in brief the following secondary storages : [10]
(i) DAT
(ii) RAID
(iii) CDROM
(iv) DVD.
Or
8. (a) Explain chache coherence strategies. [8]
(b) Explain how a memory address is mapped into a cache
memory address using set associative mapped cache. The main
memory is 64 K words, the cache memory has 2048 words
with block size of 128 words. (use 2-way set associative memory
technique). [10]
9. (a) Explain synchronous and asynchronous bus in an input operation
with timing diagram. [8]
(b) Explain programmed I/O and interrupt driven I/O. [8]
Or
10. (a) Explain in detail DMA data transfer modes. [4]
(b) Explain in detail how scheduling and memory management is
done by operating system with its types. [8]
(c) Explain : SCSI. [4]
[3862]-219 4
11. (a) Explain in detail superscalar architecture. [8]
(b) Explain in detail bus arbitration techniques. [8]
Or
12. (a) Draw and explain architecture of a typical RISC processor. [8]
(b) With respect to SPARC processor, explain : [8]
(i) SPARC register set
(ii) instruction set
(iii) instruction format.
P.T.O.
[3862]-220
S.E. (COMP)(Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
(Common to Elect., Instru. & I.T.)
(2008 PATTERN)
N.B. : (i) In Section I, attempt Q. No. 1 or 2, Q. No. 3 or 4,
Q. No. 5 or 6. In Section II, attempt Q. No. 7 or 8,
Q. No. 9 or 10, Q. No. 11 or 12.
answer-books.
(v) Use of non-programmable electronic pocket calculator is
allowed.
SECTION I
(i)
2
2
2 sin
x
d y dy
y xe x
dx
dx
- + =
(ii)
( ) ( )
2 2
D 1 sin 1
x
y x x x e - = + +
[3862]-220 2
(iii)
3
2
6 9
x
e
y y y
x
- + =
(By Variation of Parameters)
(iv)
( )
2 2
D D 1 log x x y x x - + =
(v)
2
2
1
.
1
x
d y dy
dx
dx e
+ =
+
(b) An uncharged condenser of capacity C charged by applying
an e.m.f. of value E sin
LC
t
through the leads of inductance
L and of negligible resistance. The charge Q on the plate of
condenser satisfies the differential equation :
2
2
Q Q E
sin .
LC L LC
d t
dt
+ =
Prove that the charge at any time t is given by
EC
Q = sin cos .
2 LC LC LC
t t t
-

[5]
Or
(i)
3
3
4 sin2
d y dy
x
dx
dx
+ =
(ii)
2
2
3 2
x
e
d y dy
y e
dx
dx
+ + =
[3862]-220 3 P.T.O.
(iii)
2
2
tan
d y
y x
dx
+ =
(By Variation of Parameters)
(iv)
( ) ( ) ( )
4 4 4 4 4 4
2 2
dx dy dz
x y z y z x z x y
= =
- - -
(v)
( )
4 3 2 2
D 2D 3D 4D 4 .
x
y x e - - + + =
(b) Solve : [5]
5 2
dx
x y t
dt
+ - =
2 0.
dy
x y
dt
+ - =
3. (a) If
( )
2 2
1
log ,
2
u x y = +
find v such that f(z) = u + iv is analytic. Determine f(z) in
terms of z. [5]
(b) Evaluate :
2
C
1
2
z
dz
z
+
-

where
(i) C is the circle |z 2| = 1
(ii) C is the circle |z| = 1. [5]
[3862]-220 4
(c) Find the bilinear transformation which maps the
points z = 1, i, 2i on the points w = 2i, 0, 1
respectively. [6]
Or
4. (a) If f(z) is analytic, show that :
( ) ( ) ( )
2 2
4 2 2
2 2
16 . f z f z f z
x y

+ = +

[5]
(b) Evaluate using residue theorem,
( ) ( )
2
3
C
2 2 1
,
1 3
z z
dz
z z
+ +
+ -
where C is the contour |z + 1| = 2. [6]

(c) Show that under the transformation,
,
i z
w
i z
-
=
+
x-axis in z-plane is mapped onto the circle |w| = 1. [5]
5. (a) Find the Fourier transform of :
f(x) = 1 x
2
, |x| 1
= 0 , |x| > 1
Hence evaluate :

3
0
cos sin
cos .
2
x x x x
dx
x
-

[6]
[3862]-220 5 P.T.O.
(b) Prove that the Sine Fourier transform of :
f(x) =
1
x
is .
2
p
[5]
(c) Find z-transform of the following (any two) : [6]
(i) f(k) = 3
k
, k < 0
= 2
k
, k 0
(ii) f(k) =
sin ak
k
, k > 0
(iii) f(k) = ke
ak
, k 0.
Or
6. (a) Find inverse z-transform (any two) : [6]
(i) F(z) =
1 1
4 5
z
z z

- -

, |z| >
1
4
(ii) F(z) =
( ) ( )
10
1 2
z
z z - -
, By Inversion Integral Method
(iii) F(z) =
( ) ( )
1
2 3 z z - -
, |z| < 2
(b) Solve the difference equation,
( ) ( )
1 1
1
2 2
k
f k f k

+ + =

, k 0, f(0) = 0. [5]
[3862]-220 6
(c) Solve the integral equation : [6]
( )
0
sin f x x dx
= 1 , 0 l < 1
= 2 , 1 l < 2
= 0 , l 2
SECTION II
7. (a) Thefirstfourmomentsabouttheworkingmean3.5ofadistribution
are 0.0375, 0.4546, 0.0609 and 0.5074. Calculate the moments
about the mean. Also calculate the coefficients of skewness
and kurtosis. [8]
(b) Calculatethecoefficientofcorrelationbetweenthemarksobtained
by 8 students in Mathematics and Statistics from the following
table. Also find the lines of regression : [9]
Student Maths (x) Statistics (y)
A 25 8
B 30 10
C 32 15
D 35 17
E 37 20
F 40 22
G 42 24
H 45 25
[3862]-220 7 P.T.O.
Or
8. (a) 20% of bolts produced by a machine are defective. Determine
the probability that out of 4 bolts chosen at random :
(i) 1 is defective
(ii) at most 2 bolts are defective. [6]
(b) Atelephoneswitchboardhandles600callsonanaverageduring
rush hour. The board can make a maximum of 20 calls per
minute. Use Poissons distribution to estimate the probability,
the board will be over taxed during any given minute. [5]
(c) In a distribution exactly normal, 7% of the items are under
35and89%areunder63.Findthemeanandstandarddeviation
of the distribution, using the following data.
(Normal variate corresponding to 0.43 is 1.48 and corresponding
to 0.39 is 1.23.) [6]
9. (a) Find the constant a such that the tangent plane to the surface
x
3
2xy + yz = (a + 4) at the point (2, 1, a) will pass
through origin. [6]
[3862]-220 8
(b) If , a b are constant vectors and r and r have their usual
meaning, then show that : [6]
(i)
a b
(ii)
1 1
. 0. a a
r r

+ =

(c) Show that :
2 3
2 3
. . .
d dr d r dr d r
r r
dt dt dt
dt dt

=

[4]
Or
10. (a) If
a
is a constant vector and
F ,
then show that
F
is irrotational and hence find scalar potential
f such that
F
= f. [6]
(b) Find the angle between the surfaces xy
2
+ z
3
+ 3 = 0 and
x log z y
2
+ 4 = 0 at (1, 2, 1). [4]
[3862]-220 9 P.T.O.
(c) If
1
r
and
2
r
are vectors joining the fixed points
P
1
(x
1
, y
1
, z
1
) and P
2
(x
2
, y
2
, z
2
) to the variable point
P(x, y, z), then show that :
(i)
( )
1 2 1 2
. r r r r = +
(ii) ( ) ( )
1 2 1 2
2 . r r r r = - [6]
11. (a) Evaluate :
C
F . , dr
where

F 3 2 y i x j = + and C is the boundary of a rectangle
0 x p; 0 y sin x. [5]
(b) Evaluate :
S
F . S, d
where

F , yz i xz j xy k = + +
andSisthesurfaceofthesphere
x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
= 1, in the positive octant. [5]
(c) Verify Stokes Theorem, for
2

F xy i xy j = +
and C is the
square in XY-plane with vertices (1, 0), (1, 0), (1, 1) and
(1, 1). [7]
[3862]-220 10
Or
12. (a) Evaluate :
( )
C
sin cos sin , z dx x dy y dz - +
where C is boundary of the rectangle 0 x p;

0 y 1, z = 3. [5]
(b) Evaluate :
2 2 2 2 2 2
S
S
,
d
a x b y c z + +
over the closed surface of the ellipsoid

ax
2
+ by
2
+ cz
2
= 1. [7]
(c) If
F
= r
2
, and S is any closed surface containing volume
V, then show that :

S
F . S 6V. d =
[5]
[3862]-221
S.E. (IT) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II
answer- books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain Booths Algorithm to multiply the following pair of twos
signed complements numbers : [10]
A = 110011 (Multiplicand)
B = 101100 (Multiplier).
(b) Explain floating point multiplication with the help of flow chart
as well as algorithm. [8]
Or
2. (a) Perform the following division using restoring division
algorithm : [8]
Dividend = 1001
Divisor = 0101.
P.T.O.
[3862]-221 2
(b) Explain IEEE floating point formats. [5]
(c) Explain the flow chart for floating point addition. [5]
3. (a) Draw and explain architecture of 8086. [8]
(b) Draw and explain read cycle of 8086 with a neat diagram. [8]
Or
4. (a) State the factors in the design of instruction format. Draw
instruction format for intel processors and explain various fields
in it. [8]
(b) State and explain any 4 addressing modes with examples for
INTEL processors. [8]
5. (a) Write the control sequence for the following instruction : [8]
MOV (R3), R1.
(b) Draw and explain micro-programmed control unit. [8]
Or
6. (a) Write a micro-program of micro-instructions for the following
instruction : [8]
ADD (R3), R1.
(b) Compare the following : [8]
(i) Hardwired and micro-programmed control unit
(ii) Horizontal and Vertical micro-Instruction format.
[3862]-221 3 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) Explain Set-Associative mapping technique with example. [8]
(b) A block Set-Associative mapped cache consists of 64 blocks
divided into 4 block sets. The main memory contains 4096
blocks, each consisting of 128 words of 16-bits length : [10]
(i) How many bits are there in main memory ?
(ii) How many bits are there in TAG, BLOCK and WORD
fields ?
Or
(i) EEPROM
(ii) RAID
(iii) SDRAM
(iv) DVD
(v) Magnetic Disk
(vi) Optical Disk.
9. Explain techniques for performing IO and compare them. [16]
Or
10. (a) Explain PCI bus with a neat diagram. [6]
(b) Explain functions and features of 8255 and 8251. [10]
[3862]-221 4
11. (a) Compare closely coupled and loosely coupled Multiprocessor
configurations. Explain loosely coupled multiprocessor configu-
ration. [10]
(b) Explain instruction level pipelining with a diagram. [6]
Or
12. Write short notes on the following (any four) : [16]
(i) NUMA
(ii) UMA
(iii) RISC
(iv) CISC
(v) Cluster
(vi) Superscalar Architecture.
[3862]-222
S.E. (I.T.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
FUNDAMENTALS OF DATA STRUCTURE
(2008 COURSE))
N.B. : (i) Answer to the two Sections should be written in separate
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) (i) Compare while and do_while loop in C. [32]
(ii) Explain enumerated data type with example.
(b) Select correct choice for the output of the following code
segments : [23]
(i) # define M(x) x * x
main( )
{ printf (%d, M(2 + 3)); }
(1) 12
(2) 11
(3) 25
(4) error
P.T.O.
[3862]-222 2
(ii) main( )
{ int x;
x = 4 + 2% 8;
printf (%d, x);
}
(1) 6
(2) 6
(3) 4
(4) None of (1), (2), (3)
(iii) An expression contains relational operators, assignment
operators, and arithmetic operators. In the absence of
parantheses; they will be evaluated in which of the following
order ?
(1) assignment, relational, arithmetic
(2) arithmetic, relational, assignment
(3) relational, arithmetic, assignment
(4) assignment, arithmetic, relational
(c) Write a C program to find HCF and LCM of two nos. [6]
[3862]-222 3 P.T.O.
Or
2. (a) Compare macro and function. [4]
(b) Write different bitwise operators in C and explain their use. [6]
(c) Write output of the following statements : [8]
(i) printf (%d, 3|0);
(ii) printf (% 0 % x, 10, 20);
(iii) printf (%d, 3 > 2 ? 1 : q);
(iv) int x = 10; printf (%d %d, ++x, x );
(v) if (1)
printf (Error);
else
printf (No error);
(vi) printf (%d, 1 < 2 && 3 || q);
(vii) printf (%c, 4[Param]);
(viii) int A[3] [2] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6};
printf (%d, *(*(a + 2) + q));
3. (a) Describe the following declarations : [6]
(i) int *p[5];
(ii) int **q;
[3862]-222 4
(iii) float (*p) (int no);
(iv) int (*q) [3];
(v) int * fun1 (int *x);
(vi) char s[10] [30] [80];
(b) Differentiate between call by value and call by reference
parameter passing methods. [4]
(c) Write a C function to compare two strings. [4]
(d) Compare malloc and calloc functions in C language. [2]
Or
4. (a) Write output of the following C code : [3]
(i) void fun (int val) main( )
{ {
if (val == 0) fun(5);
return; }
else
{
fun(val 1);
printf(%d, val);
}
}
[3862]-222 5 P.T.O.
(ii) void main (void) [3]
{
int A[4] [3] = { {2, 4, 3},
{6, 8, 5},
{3, 5, 1}
};
printf(%d %d %d, *n, n[2] [2], n[3] [2]);
}
(iii) void print (void) main( ) [2]
{ static int x = 1; { print( );
printf (%d, x); print( );
x ++; print( );
} }
(b) Write a C program to accept, display and find topper from a
list of n students, using functions. [8]
5. (a) Classify data structures and give one example of each type. [8]
(b) Analyze time complexity of the following code segments : [8]
(i) for (i = 1; i <= n; i++)
for (j = 1; j <= m; j++)
for(k = 1; k <= p; k++)
x = x + 1;
[3862]-222 6
(ii) i = 1
while (i <= n)
{ x++;
i++;
}
(iii) int process (int no)
{
if (no <= 0)
return (0);
else
return (no + process (no 1));
}
Or
6. (a) What do you mean by frequency count of a statement ? Explain
its importance in analysis of algorithm with suitable examples. [6]
(b) What is space complexity of an algorithm ? Explain its importance
with example. [4]
(c) Write time complexity of the following algorithm using q and
W notations : [2]
void disp (Node * temp)
{
while (temp)
{
temp = temp
link;
}
}
[3862]-222 7 P.T.O.
(d) Explain the following terms with example : [4]
(i) Data object
(ii) Data type
SECTION II
7. (a) Show output of each pass using bubble sort to arrange the following
nos in ascending order. Write pseudo C code for bubble
sort : [10]
10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1
(b) Explain binary search with suitable example. [6]
Or
8. (a) Write output of each pass of merge sort for the following
list : [6]
26, 5, 77, 1, 61, 11, 59, 15, 48, 19
(b) Write pseudo C code of quick sort and write average and worst
case time complexity. [10]
9. (a) Represent sparse matrix using suitable data structure. Write
pseudo C algorithm to find transpose of a sparse matrix
using simple/slow transpose algorithm. Analyze its time
complexity. [10]
[3862]-222 8
(b) Explain sequential memory organization with example. [6]
Or
10. (a) Represent sparse matrix using suitable data structure. Write
pseudo C algorithm for addition of two sparse matrices. Analyze
its time complexity. [12]
(b) Compare array and linked list. [4]
11. (a) Represent the following lists using generalized linked list : [4]
(i) ((a, b), c)
(ii) (a, b, c, (d, e))
(b) Write a C function to reverse a singly linked list by changing
link pointers. [6]
(c) Write a C program to create doubly linked list and print the
list forward and reverse using functions. [8]
Or
12. (a) Write a C function to add two sorted circular linked list of
polynomials to form a third sorted list. Write time
complexity. [12]
(b) Write recursive functions for : [4]
(i) Display SLL forward
(ii) Display SLL reverse
(c) Compare SLL and DLL. [2]
[3862]-223
S.E. (I.T.) (Second Sem.) EXAMINATION, 2010
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section-II
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Consider the line from (0, 0) to (6, 6). Use the simple DDA
algorithm for rasterizing this line. [6]
(b) Explain the difference between raster scan and vector scan
displays. [4]
(c) Draw and explain the following input devices : [8]
(i) Trackball
(ii) Joystick
(iii) Light pen system
(iv) Touch panel
P.T.O.
[3862]-223 2
Or
2. (a) Explain and derive the expression for the decision parameter
in mid-point line drawing algorithm. [8]
(b) Explain display file structure. Why is display file interpreter
used ? Which are the commands used in display file
interpreter ? [6]
(c) Explain Stroke and Star-burst method for character
generation. [4]
3. (a) Scale the polygon with co-ordinates A(2, 5), B(7, 10)
and C(10, 2) by 3 units in x-direction and 4 units in
y-direction. [6]
(b) A point (5, 4) is rotated anticlockwise by an angle of 45. Find
rotation matrix and the resultant point. [6]
(c) Explain the method for testing a pixel inside or outside a
polygon. (even-odd method). [4]
Or
4. (a) Find the transformation matrix that transform the given square
ABCD to half its size with centre still remaining at the same
position. The co-ordinates of the square are : A(1, 1), B(3, 1),
C(3, 3), D(1, 3) and centre at (2, 2). Also find the resultant
co-ordinates of square. [8]
(b) What is homogeneous co-ordinate system ? Explain the need
of homogeneous co-ordinates. [4]
[3862]-223 3 P.T.O.
(c) Translate the polygon with co-ordinates A(2, 3), B(5, 9)
and C(8, 9) by 6 units in x-direction and 3 units in
y-direction. [4]
5. (a) Explain the ways of projecting 3D objects onto 2D screen in
detail. [8]
(b) What is Spline ? Give definitions of spline curve and spline
surface. Explain with neat diagrams, which are the different
parametric continuity conditions ? [8]
Or
6. (a) What is meant by quadric surfaces ? Explain any two quadric
surfaces with figure, its equation and parametric form : [8]
(b) Write short notes on (Attempt any two) : [8]
(i) Polygon tables
(ii) Polygon surfaces
(iii) Curved lines and surfaces.
SECTION II
7. (a) What are the different ways in which motions of the objects
can be specified ? Explain each in brief. [8]
(b) What is Animation ? What are the basic rules required for
Animation ? [6]
(c) Explain CIE Chromaticity diagram. [4]
[3862]-223 4
Or
8. (a) Explain various controlling methods of Animation. [5]
(b) Explain difference between RGB and CMY(K) color
model. [4]
(i) Key Frame Systems
(ii) Animation Languages
(iii) Morphing [9]
9. (a) What is jittering ? State the advantages of distributed ray
tracing. [4]
(b) Explain the following illumination models : [12]
(i) Phong illumination
(ii) Diffuse reflection
(iii) Specular reflection
Or
(i) Z Buffer
(ii) RGB Color Model
(iii) Ray Tracing.
(b) What is shading ? What are the different steps required to
shade an object using Gaurads Shading Algorithm ? [7]
[3862]-223 5 P.T.O.
11. (a) Explain in brief Monte-Carlo method for rendering. [5]
(b) Explain Bezier Curve Generation using Midpoint
Subdivision. [6]
(c) Explain the algorithm to draw fractal lines. [5]
Or
12. (a) Explain features of 3D Studio/Maya Graphics tool. [7]
(i) Texture Mapping
(ii) Anti-aliasing
(iii) Post-filtering and GPU.
[3862]-224
S.E. (Infor. Tech.) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND INTERFACING
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. Draw the timing diagram of non-pipelined read cycle followed by
pipelined, write cycle and explain. [16]
Or
2. (a) Explain Control register set of 80386 with their formats. [10]
(b) Give difference between 8086 and 80386. [6]
3. (a) How to generate .asm, .obj, .lst and .exe ? Give its
significance. [10]
(b) Draw Interfacing diagram of 8086 with 8255 and explain. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-224 2
Or
4. (a) Draw block diagram of 8255 and explain. [10]
(b) Explain the directives EXTRN and PUBLIC. [6]
5. (a) How to convert Logical address to Physical address in Real
mode of 80386 ? Explain with example. [8]
(b) Draw the flow chart for switching from Real mode to Protected
mode and returning back to RM. (All hardware and software
activities should be considered). [10]
Or
6. Explain Logical to Physical address conversion when 80386
operating in Protected Mode. Draw necessary diagrams and
formats. [18]
SECTION II
7. (a) Compare RM, VM and PM modes of 80386. [10]
(b) Write a short note on TSS of 80386. [6]
Or
8. (a) What is Privileged Instructions ? Explain two examples of
Privileged Instructions. [8]
(b) Explain IDT of 80386 in detail with diagram and format. [8]
[3862]-224 3 P.T.O.
9. (a) Draw Internal memory organization of 8051. Explain. [8]
(b) Explain Interrupt structure of 8051 with their priority
structure. [10]
Or
10. (a) Draw Interfacing diagram of 8051 with 8K 8 RAM and 16
K 8 EPROM. [10]
(b) Draw 8051 functional architecture diagram. [8]
11. Explain various operating modes of Timer of 8051 microcontroller. [16]
Or
12. Explain various operating modes of serial communication of 8051
[3862]-225
S.E. (I.T.) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
DATA STRUCTURES AND FILES
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (1) Explain various file opening modes with respect to text and binary
files. [6]
(2) Explain the features of a sequential file. Write a C program
to copy contents of one file to another using command line
arguments. [6]
P.T.O.
[3862]-225 2
(3) What are the characteristics of a good hash function ? How
can collision be resolved in a hash table. [6]
Or
2. (1) Compare text and binary files. [6]
(2) Explain features of a random access file. Write a C program
to find sum of the nos. passed as command line arguments. [6]
(3) Assume a hash table of size 10 and hash function : [6]
H(X) = X mod 10.
Perform linear probing with and without replacement for the
given set of values :
0, 1, 4, 71, 64, 89, 11, 33, 58, 45.
3. (1) Write a note on applications of stacks. [4]
(2) Implement stack as an ADT using sequential organisation. [6]
(3) Clearly indicate the contents of stack for evaluating the given
postfix expression : [6]
623 + 382 / + * 2 $ 3 +
Or
4. (1) Write a note on implicit and explicit stacks. [4]
[3862]-225 3 P.T.O.
(2) Clearly indicate the contents of stack during conversion of given
infix expression to prefix : [8]
A ^ B * C D + E/F/(G + H).
(3) Implement push and pop operations for stack using linked
organisation. [4]
5. (1) Write a C program to implement priority queue. [8]
(2) Consider a circular queue of characters and is of size 6.
denotes an empty queue location. Show the queue contents as
the following opns. take place : [8]
(i) F is added to the queue.
(ii) Two letters are deleted.
(iii) K, L and M are added to the queue.
(iv) Two letters are deleted.
(v) R is added to the queue.
(vi) Two letters are deleted.
(vii) S is added to the queue.
(viii) Two letters are deleted.
Initial queue configuration is :
FRONT = 2, REAR = 4, Queue : , A, C, D, ,
[3862]-225 4
Or
6. (1) Implement circular queue as an ADT. [8]
(2) Consider the following circular double ended queue of chars and
is of size 6. LEFT = 2, RIGHT = 4, DEQUE : , A, C,
D, , [8]
Describe the deque contents as the following opns. take place :
(i) F is added to the right of the dequeue.
(ii) Two letters are deleted on the right.
(iii) K, L and M are added to the left of the dequeue.
(iv) One letter on the left is deleted.
(v) R is added to the left of the dequeue.
(vi) S is added to the right of the dequeue.
(vii) T is added to the right of the dequeue.
SECTION II
7. (1) Write C functions for all three binary tree traversals non-
recursively. [6]
[3862]-225 5 P.T.O.
(2) Convert the given forest into a binary tree. [6]
(3) With examples, define the following terms w.r.t. trees : [6]
(i) Stewed binary trees
(ii) Complete binary tree
(iii) Ancestor, descendant, leaf node.
Or
8. (1) List down the formulae to represent binary trees using array.
Represent the given tree using array. [6]
(2) Construct a binary tree from the given traversals : [6]
Pre-order : * + a b c / d e + f g h
In-order : a + b c * d e / f + g h
[3862]-225 6
(3) For the binary tree represented as an array, perform in-order
threading on the tree : [6]
A B C D E G H F J K
L
9. (1) Write an algorithm to perform BFS traversal for a graph. Perform
the same for the given graph. [8]
Fig. (a)
(2) For the graph in Fig. (a) draw adjacency list and adjacency
matrix. [4]
(3) For the graph given in Fig. (b) show stepwise representation
of MST using Prims algorithm. [4]
Fig. (b)
[3862]-225 7 P.T.O.
Or
10. (1) Write an algorithm to perform DFS traversal for a graph. Perform
the same for the graph in Fig. (a). [8]
(2) With example define the following terms w.r.t. graphs : [4]
(i) Degree of node
(ii) Isolated node
(iii) Path
(iv) Cycle.
(3) For the graph given in Fig. (b) show stepwise representation
of MST using Kruskals algorithm. [4]
11. (1) Suppose A to H are 8 data items with weights as follows : [8]
22, 5, 11, 19, 2, 11, 25, 5.
Build a Huffman tree and find code of each symbol.
(2) Construct an AVL search tree by inserting the following elements
in the order of their occurrence. Show the BF and type of rotation
at each stage : [8]
64, 1, 44, 26, 13, 110, 98, 85.
[3862]-225 8
Or
12. (1) Distinguish between Huffmans tree, OBST and AVL in terms
of their definitions and applications. [8]
(2) Sort the following nos. using heap sort : [8]
17, 25, 8, 0, 1, 250, 1008, 65, 48, 101.
[3862]-226
S.E (I.T.) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
DATA COMMUNICATION
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. Attempt any two questions from the following : [8 marks each]
(a) Explain the various transmission impairment in data
communication.
(b) State the Nyquist theorem and explain Shannon capacity and
solve the given example.
Example : Calculate the channel capacity for a noisy channel
having Bandwidth = 5 kHz and SNR = 0 using appropriate
formula.
(c) What is PCM ? Describe it in detail with the help of
diagram.
P.T.O.
[3862]-226 2
Or
(a) Explain the block coding with 8B/10B scheme as an
example.
(b) Compare the serial and parallel transmission modes for data
communication.
(c) Describe in brief the TCP/IP protocol stack along with the
layered representation.
3. (a) Draw and explain the Amplitude modulation generation.
Draw frequency domain representation of AM. State the
formula for Bandwidth calculation of AM and list out advantages
of AM. [10]
(b) Explain in detail TDM and Statistical TDM. Mention advantages
and disadvantages. [8]
Or
4. (a) What is constellation pattern ? Describe it in detail with
representation technique details. Draw constellation patterns
for the ASK, PSK, QPSK and 4-QAM. [10]
(b) State the principle of spread spectrum and explain FHSS in
detail. [8]
(a) Compare any two types of the guided transmission media.
(b) What is switching ? Explain in detail Packet switch technique
along with advantages and disadvantages of it.
(c) What is HDLC ? Explain with the help of its frame format.
Describe all fields in detail.
[3862]-226 3 P.T.O.
Or
(a) Explain fiber optic cable along with its constructional detail,
advantages and disadvantages.
(b) Describe in detail circuit switching techniques.
(c) Explain the terms ADSL, ADSL Lite, HDSL, SDSL.
SECTION II
(a) Discuss in detail CRC technique with one example. List out
advantages of CRC over other methods.
(b) Explain in detail Go-Back-N Automatic Repeat request
protocol.
(c) What is checksum ? Describe in detail internet checksum method
with suitable example.
Or
(a) Explain in detail the selective repeat automatic repeat request
protocol.
(b) Define error correction, error detection and Hamming Distance.
Calculate Hamming distance for followed examples :
(i) d(000,010)
(ii) d(011, 110)
(iii) d(101, 011)
(iv) d(000,101)
(c) Draw and explain PPP protocol stack.
[3862]-226 4
9. (a) Explain in detail CSMA/CD. State the advantages over
CSMA. [8]
(b) Describe different controlled access protocol mentioned below
in short : [10]
(i) Reservation
(ii) Polling
(iii) Token passing.
Or
10. (a) Draw and explain the MAC frame format of 802.3. Explain
each field in detail. [10]
(b) Compare and contrast FDMA and CDMA in detail. [8]
(a) Draw the simple network using SONET equipment and explain
STS Multiplexer/Demultiplexer, ADM, Section, Path, Regenerator
in detail.
(b) Draw and explain BUS Backbone Network.
(c) Write a short note on Bridges.
Or
(a) Enlist different connecting device in the network and explain
any two in detail.
(b) Draw and explain SONET layers in detail.
(c) Draw and explain Star Backbone Network in detail.
[3862]-231
S.E. (Bio-Tech.) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
APPLIED CHEMISTRY
(2008 COURSE)
answer-books.
(vii) All questions are compulsory.
SECTION I
1. (a) Which of the following compounds are aromatic ? Why ? [6]
(i) Pyridine
(ii) Cyclooctatetraene
(iii) Benzene.
(b) Give reason : [6]
(i) N, N dimethyl aniline is a weak base than its 2, 6 methyl
derivative.
P.T.O.
[3862]-231 2
(ii) X-clorobutyric acid is a stronger acid than H-chlorobutyric
acid.
(iii) Aniline is a weak base.
(c) Whatishyperconjugation?Explainrelativestabilityofprimary,
secondary and tertiary carbonium ion. [4]
Or
2. (a) Draw resonance structure of the following compounds : [6]
(i) Phenoxide ion
(ii) P-nitrophenol
(iii) Nitrobenzene.
(b) Whatiscarboniumion?Discusstherelativestabilityofprimary,
secondary and tertiary carbonium ion. [6]
(c) What is inductive effect ? Explain +I and I effect with suitable
examples. [4]
3. (a) Explain mechanism, stereochemistry, effect of substrate, solvent
for S
N
2
reaction. [6]
(b) Give the reagents used in synthesis of the following compounds
starting from benzene : [6]
(i) Acetophenone
(ii) Nitrobenzene
(iii) Bromobenzene.
(c) Give the mechanism of conversion of 2-methyl, 1-propene by
an acid into isopropyl alcohol. [4]
[3862]-231 3 P.T.O.
Or
4. (a) Predict the product : [6]
(i)
CH CH + CH MgI
3 3
?
||
O
(ii)
CH COC H
3 2 5
NaOC H
2 5
?
||
O
(iii)
?
Br in FeBr
2 3
CH
3
(iv) CH
3
CH
2
CH=CHCH
3
+ HCl ?
(v)
||
Ph CH
3
C
N
OH
?
H
+
(vi)
H COH + H
3 2 4
SO C
CH
3
CH
3
?
(b) Give the mechanism of E
1
and E
2
elimination. [6]
(c) Write a note on Aldol condensation. [4]
[3862]-231 4
5. (a) Discuss the conformation of propane. [6]
(b) Explain chair and boat conformation of cyclohexane. [6]
(c) Give one method of preparation : [6]
(i) Pyrrole
(ii) Thiophene.
Or
6. (a) Explain the optical activity of the compound containing two
similar asymmetric carbon atoms. [6]
(b) Predict the product : [6]
(i)
+ CHCl
3
NaOH
?
N
H
..
(ii)
O
H
2
/Ni
?
(iii)
?
N
..
H O + H SO
3 2 4
N
(iv)
?
N
C H Li
6 5
[3862]-231 5 P.T.O.
(v)
?
N
Br in FeBr
2 3
(vi) O .
.
? .
.
+
C
O
C
O
O
(c) Assign R and S configuration : [6]
(i)
Br
H Cl
COOH
(ii)
H CH CH
2 3
H
3
CCCH
3
CH
3
CH
3
[3862]-231 6
(iii) HO CH OH
2
CHO
H
(iv) H COCH
3
COOH
OH
SECTION II
7. (i) Define surface tension. Describe the capillary rise method for
determination of surface tension. [6]
(ii) In the determination of surface tension of a liquid by drop
number method, it gives 55 drops, with water gave 25 drops
for the same volume. Given
e
= 0.996 and
w
= 0.800 g/cm
3
.
Find of liq. if
w
= 72 dynes/cm. [4]
(iii) Describe the working of isoteniscopic apparatus. [6]
Or
8. (i) Derive the Poisuelle equation. [6]
(ii) Benzene takes 46 secs to flow through an Ostwald viscometer
whilewatertakes68secsatthesametemperature.Theirrespective
densities are 0.8 g/cm
3
and 0.998 g/cm
3
. of water at the
prevailing temperature is 1.008 centipoise. Calculate of
benzene. [4]
[3862]-231 7 P.T.O.
(iii) Derive the Braggs equation. Describe any one method for
experimental determination of glancing angle by use of
X-ray spectrometer. [6]
9. (i) Define the terms collision diameter and collision frequency.
Derive the expression for the no. of collisions/unit time/unit
volume. [6]
(ii) The viscosity of methane at 20C and 1 atm P is 1.09 P.
Calculate : [4]
(a) Collision diameter and
(b) Mean free path of the gas.
(iii) What are the different kinds of velocities ? How are they
related to each other ? [6]
Or
10. (i) Describe the experimental method for determination of critical
constant. [4]
(ii) van der Waals constant for HCl gas are a = 3.67 atm/L
2
and
b = 40.8 ml/mol. Find T
C
and P
C
of the gas. [4]
(iii) What is the physical significance of a and b in the van der
Waals equation ? [2]
(iv) Derive kinetic gas equation. [6]
11. (i) What is Raoults law ? Describe the deviations from Raoults
law. [6]
[3862]-231 8
(ii) The vapour pressure of C
2
H
5
OH and CH
3
OH are 44.5 mm
of Hg and 88.7 mm of Hg respectively. An ideal solution is
formed at the same temperature by mixing 60 g of C
2
H
5
OH
and 40 g of CH
3
OH, calculate total V.P. of the solution and
the mole fraction of methanol in the vapour. [6]
(iii) Describe the Berkeley and Hartleys method for measurement
of osmotic pressure. [6]
Or
12. (i) Whatarecolligativeproperties?Givethermodynamicderivation
for elevation in B.P. [8]
(ii) B.P. of acetone is 56.36C. A solution of 0.564 g of a compound
in8.6gofacetoneboiledat56.75C.Themolalelevationconstant
for acetone is 16.7. Calculate molecular weight of the
solute. [4]
(iii) What is the effect of molecular association and molecular
dissociation on molar mass of the solute ? [6]
[3862]-232
S.E. (Biotechnology) (First Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
FLUID FLOW AND UNIT OPERATIONS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
SECTION I
1. (a) Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity of fluids. [5]
(b) The space between two square flat parallel plates is filled with
oil. Each side of the plate is 60 cm. The thickness of the oil
P.T.O.
[3862]-232 2
film is 12.5 mm. The upper plate, which moves at 2.5 m/s requires
a force of 98.1 N to maintain the speed. Determine : [6]
(i) The dynamic viscosity of oil in poise.
(ii) The kinematic viscosity of oil in stokes if the specific gravity
of the oil is 0.95.
(c) Find the size (diameter) of a pipe which has to discharge oil
at a rate of 2 m
3
/s and of specific gravity 0.8 with a velocity
of 3 m/s. [5]
Or
2. (a) With respect to pressure measurement define : [4]
(i) Gauge pressure
(ii) Absolute pressure
(iii) Vacuum pressure.
(b) An oil of specific gravity 0.8 is flowing through a venturimeter
having inlet diameter 20 cm and throat diameter 10 cm. The
oil mercury differential manometer shows a reading of 25 cm.
Calculate the discharge of oil through the horizontal venturimeter.
Take C
D
= 0.98. [6]
(c) The right limb of a simple U tube manometer containing mercury
is open to the atmosphere while the left limb is connected to
[3862]-232 3 P.T.O.
a pipe in which a fluid of specific gravity 0.9 is flowing. The
centre of the pipe is 12 cm below the level of mercury in the
right limb. Find the pressure of fluid in the pipe if the difference
of mercury level in the two limbs is 20 cm. [6]
3. (a) Why does energy loss take place due to sudden expansion and
contraction in the flow path ? Give the expressions for head
loss in the above cases. [6]
(b) A crude oil of viscosity 0.97 poise and relative density 0.9 is
flowing through a horizontal pipe of diameer 100 mm and of
length 10 m. Calculate the difference of pressure at the two
ends of the pipe if 100 kg of oil is collected in a tank in 30
seconds. [6]
(c) Water is flowing through a pipe of diameter 200 mm with a
velocity of 3 m/s. Find the head lost due to friction for a length
of 5 m if the coefficient of friction is given by :
f = 0.002 + 0.09/Re
0.3
,
where Re is the Reynolds no. The kinematic viscosity of water
is 0.01 stokes. [6]
Or
4. (a) Define roughness. Classify the different types of surfaces based
on roughness. [6]
[3862]-232 4
(b) Find the loss of head when a pipe of diameter 200 mm is suddenly
enlarged to a diameter of 400 mm. The rate of flow of water
through the pipe is 250 lit/sec. [6]
(c) Laminar flow is taking place in a pipe of diameter 200 mm.
The maximum velocity is 1.5 m/s. Find the mean velocity. Also
calculate the velocity at a distance of 4 cm from the wall of
the pipe. [6]
5. (a) What are the standard design considerations for an agitated vessel
system ? [4]
(b) A disc turbine with six flat blades is installed centrally in a
vertical baffled tank 2 m in diameter. The turbine is 0.5 m in
diameter and is positioned 0.5 m above the bottom of the tank.
The liquid being agitated has a viscosity and density of 12 cp
and 1500 kg/m
3
respectively. The speed of the turbine is 100
r.p.m. What power will be required ? [6]
(N
p
= 5.8 for disc turbine)
(c) With the help of a neat sketch, explain the construction and
working of pug mill. [6]
Or
6. (a) What is the power curve ? How is it used for determination
of power consumption in an agitated vessel ? [6]
[3862]-232 5 P.T.O.
(b) Write a note on reciprocating pump. [5]
(c) Explain any one equipment used for kneading in detail. [5]
SECTION II
7. (a) For an object falling in a fluid of density r, the terminal settling
velocity is given as :
D
2 ( )
.
C A
p
p p
m g r - r
n =
r r
Derive the Stokes law for spherical particle of diameter D
p
,
starting from the above expression. [6]
(b) What is the Kynchs theory of sedimentation ? List the various
assumptions made for this theory. [6]
(c) Explain the principle, construction and working of a hydrocyclone. [6]
Or
8. (a) A steel ball of diameter 40 mm and of density 8500 kg/m
3
is
dropped in a large mass of water. The coefficient of drag of
the ball in water is given as 0.45. Find the terminal settling
velocity of the ball in water. [6]
(b) Describe any one equipment used for centrifugal sedimentation
in detail. [6]
[3862]-232 6
(c) What is drag force and drag coefficient ? What are the values
of Reynolds no. and drag coefficient in laminar and turbulent
regimes for an object falling in a fluid ? [6]
9. (a) What is fluidization and minimum fluidization velocity ? Explain
how the pressure drop across the bed varies during fluidiza-
tion. [6]
(b) What is meant by constant rate and constant pressure filtration ?
Give expressions for calculating pressure drop in both the cases. [6]
(c) What is a filter cake ? What are the two different types of
filter cakes ? [4]
Or
10. Write notes on the following : [16]
(a) Washing of filter cake
(b) Particulate fluidization
(c) Filter medium and filter aid
(d) Hydraulic transport using fluidization
11. (a) What is screen effectiveness ? Derive a formula for calculating
the same. [6]
[3862]-232 7 P.T.O.
(b) Calculate the operating speed of the ball mill from the following
data : [5]
Diameter of the ball mill : 500 mm
Diameter of the ball : 50 mm
Operating speed of ball mill is 35% of the critical speed.
(c) What is the work index in Bonds law ? State the Bonds law
in terms of the work index. [5]
Or
12. (a) Define the following terms : [5]
(i) Sphericity
(ii) Arithmetic mean diameter
(iii) Sauter diameter
(iv) Closed circuit grinding
(v) Ideal screen.
(b) Explain in brief the different factors affecting screen capacity
and effectiveness. [5]
[3862]-232 8
(c) A certain crusher accepts a feed of rock having volume surface
mean diameter of 0.75 inches and discharges a product of diameter
0.2 inches. The power required to crush 15 tons/hr is 12 hp.
What should be the power consumption if the capcity is reduced
to 10 tons/hr and the volume surface mean diameter of the product
to 0.15 inches ? Use Rittingers law. [6]
[3862]-236
S.E. (Biotechnology) (Second Semester) EXAMINATION, 2010
MATERIAL BALANCES AND STOICHIOMETRY
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
(iv) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.
SECTION I
1. (a) Sodium chloride weighing 600 kg is mixed with 200 kg potassium
chloride. Find the composition of the mixture in : [4]
(i) Mass %
(ii) Mole %
P.T.O.
[3862]-236 2
(b) Cracked gas from a petroleum refinery has the following com-
position by volume : [8]
Methane : 45%
Ethane : 10%
Ethylene : 25%
Propane : 7%
Propylene : 8%
n-Butane : 5%
Find :
(i) The average molar mass of the gas mixture
(ii) The composition by mass
(iii) Specific gravity of the gas mixture.
(c) 2000 ml solution of strength 0.5 N H
2
SO
4
is to be prepared
in laboratory by adding 98% H
2
SO
4
(sp. gr. 1.84) to water. Calculate
the ml of 98% H
2
SO
4
to be added to get solution of required
strength. [4]
Or
2. (a) An aqueous solution contains 19% NH
3
, 65.6% NH
4
NO
3
and 6%
urea by mass. Calculate the available nitrogen content of the
solution. [5]
[3862]-236 3 P.T.O.
(b) An aqueous solution K
2
CO
3
is prepared by dissolving 43 kg K
2
CO
3
in 100 kg water at 293 K. Find molarity, normality and molality
of the solution. Take density of solution as 1.3 kg/lit. [5]
(c) By electrolysing mixed brine, a gaseous mixture is obtained at
the cathode having the following composition by weight : [6]
Cl
2
: 67%, Br
2
: 28% and O
2
: 5%
Calculate :
(i) Composition of gas
(ii) Average molecular weight
(iii) Density of the gas mixture at 298 K and 101.325 kPa.
3. (a) Two process streams are mixed to form a single stream. A soluble
salt is added to one of the original streams at steady state.
Samples taken from this stream show it to be 4.76% salt by
weight. Another original stream does not contain any salt. Samples
from the mixed stream show 0.62% salt by weight. What is the
ratio of flows in the two streams ? [6]
(b) Dry neem leaves are subjected to extraction with supercritical
carbon dioxide at 200 bar and 333 K. Dry leaves are analysed
to contain 0.46% a-tocopherol and .01% b-carotene. Extract is
found to contain 15.5% a-tocopherol and 0.41% b-carotene. All
[3862]-236 4
percentages are by mass. If b-carotene content of the leached
residue is nil, calculate : [6]
(i) The mass of extract phase per kg of dry leaves
(ii) % recovery of a-tocopherol.
(c) After a crystallization operation, the solution of calcium chloride
in water contains 60 grams CaCl
2
per 100 gram of water. Calculate
the amount of this solution necessary to dissolve 200 kg of
CaCl
2
.6H
2
O crystals at a temperature of 298 K. The solubility
of CaCl
2
at 298 K is 819.2 gm of CaCl
2
per 1000 gm of
water. [6]
Or
4. (a) 1000 kg of a 30% (by mass) solution of acetone in water is contacted
with pure methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK) to extract acetone in
a mixer settler. From the settler, two phases separated are
withdrawn separately. What quantity of MIBK must be fed to
the process to reduce the acetone concentration in water rich
phase to 5% and also calculate the % of acetone in original feed
solution which remains unextracted. [9]
Composition of phases :
Raffinate phase : 5% acetone; 92.5% water and 2% MIBK
Extract phase : 10% acetone; 3% water and 87% MIBK
[3862]-236 5 P.T.O.
(b) In a textile industry, it is desired to make 24% solution by weight
of caustic soda for a mercerisation process. Due to very high
heat of dissolution of caustic soda in water, the above solution
is prepared by a two step process. First, in a dissolution tank,
caustic soda is dissolved in the correct quantity of water to
produce 50% by weight solution. After complete dissolution and
cooling, the solution is taken to dilution tank where some more
water is added to produce 24% solution. Assuming no evaporation
loss in dissolution tank, calculate the weight ratio of water fed
to dissolution tank to the bypassed water to dilution tank. [9]
5. (a) A combustion reactor is fed with 50 kmol/hr of butane and
2000 kmol/hr of air. Calculate the % excess air used and composition
of the gases leaving combustion reactor assuming complete
combustion of butane. [8]
(b) Monochloroacetic acid [CH
2
ClCOOH] is manufactured in a semi-
batch reactor by action of glacial acetic acid [CH
3
COOH]
with chlorine gas using suitable catalyst at 100C. The reaction
is : [8]
CH
3
COOH + Cl
2

CH
2
ClCOOH + HCl
The chlorine used is 15% (mole) excess of that theoretically
required. The reaction is 95% complete. During chlorination the
[3862]-236 6
liberated hydrochloric acid gas is scrubbed with water in order
to obtain 20% (by wt.) hydrochloric acid solution. Calculate :
(i) The raw materials required for 3000 kg of monochloroacetic
acid per batch.
(ii) The amount of 20% (by wt.) hydrochloric acid solution produced
per batch.
Or
6. Ethylene oxide is produced by oxidation of ethylene as per the following
reaction :
2C
2
H
4
+ O
2

C
2
H
4
O.
Fresh feed containing ethylene and air is mixed with recycle feed
and mixed feed enters the reactor. The proportion of C
2
H
4
: O
2
:
N
2
in mixed feed is 1 : 0.56 : 5.65 (on mole basis). 50% per pass
conversion is achieved in the reactor. The product gases leaving the
reactor are fed to the absorber where only all C
2
H
4
O formed is removed.
The gases from the absorber containing C
2
H
4
, O
2
and N
2
are recycled
back. To avoid built up N
2
in the system, small portion of recycle
stream is continuously purged. Based on 100 mol/sec ethylene in mixed
feed, calculate the fresh feed to the process, purge stream, recycle
ratio, combined feed ratio and overall conversion of ethylene. [16]
[3862]-236 7 P.T.O.
SECTION II
7. (a) A stream flowing at a rate of 15000 mol/hr containing 25 mole%
N
2
and 75 mole% H
2
is to be heated from 298 K to 473 K.
Calculate heat that must be transferrd using C
p
o
data given
below : [9]
C
p
o
= a + bT + cT
2
+ dT
3
Gas : a b 10
3
c 10
6
d 10
9
N
2
: 29.59 5.41 13.18 4.968
H
2
: 28.61 1.01 0.147 0.769
(b) When liquid benzene is completely burned to carbon dioxide and
liquid water, the standard heat of combustion is 3267.6 kJ/mol.
The standard heat of combustion of hydrogen to liquid water
is 285.83 kJ/mol and that of carbon to carbon dioxide gas is
393.51 kJ/mol. Calculate the standard heat of formation of liquid
benzene. [9]
Or
8. (a) Toluene is heated from 290 K to 350 K at a rate of 0.25 kg/s.
Calculate the heat required to be added to toluene using heat
capacity data given below : [6]
C
p
o
= a + bT + cT
2
+ dT
3
a b 10
3
c 10
6
d 10
9
Toluene : 1.81 812.22 1512.67 1630
[3862]-236 8
(b) 100 kg/h of methanol liquid at a temperature of 303 K is to
be obtained by removing heat from saturated methanol vapour.
Find the amount of heat to be removed in the above
case : [6]
Boiling point of methanol = 337.8 K
Latent heat of condensation of methanol = 1101.7 kJ/kg
Specific heat of methanol = 2.7235 kJ/kgK
(c) Calculate the heat of reaction at 298.15 K of the following
reaction : [6]
3CaSO
4
(s) + SiO
2
(s)

3CaO.SiO
2
(s) + 3SO
2
(g) + 3/2O
2
(g)
Data :
Component DH
f
o
at 298.15 K, kJ/mol
CaSO
4
(s) 1432.7
SiO
2
(s) 903.5
3CaO.SiO
2
(s) 2879
SO
2
(g) 296.81
O
2
(g) 0.0
[3862]-236 9 P.T.O.
9. (a) A 1000 kg mixture of NaCl and NH
4
Cl is to be separated by
fractional crystallization. It contains 40% NaCl by mass. It is
dissolved in pure water at 323 K : [8]
(i) If stoichiometric quantity of water is used for dissolution,
calculate the quantity of the component remaining undissolved
and also the quantity of the saturated solution.
(ii) If the saturated solution at 323 K mentioned in (i) is cooled
to 283 K, calculate the additional quantity of the original
mixture which can be dissolved and also the total quantity
of the component remaining out of the solution.
(b) On a particular day in Mumbai, a newspaper reported the weather
conditions of the previous day as 308 K DB, 80% RH and barometric
pressure of 100 kPa. Calculate : [8]
(i) The absolute humidity
(ii) The dew point
(iii) The percentage saturation
(iv) The humid heat
Or
10. A gas stream containing 25 mole% CO
2
and 75% CH
4
is treated in
a gas conditioning plant. The stream is fed to an absorption tower
at the rate of 100 kmol/h and is contacted in the tower with liquid
solvent containing 0.5 mole% dissolved CO
2
and the balance methanol.
The gas leaving the absorber contains 1 mole% CO
2
and essentially
all the methane fed to the unit. The CO
2
rich solvent leaving the
absorber goes to the stripping column; in which a stream of nitrogen
[3862]-236 10
gas contacts the solvent, removing 90% of the dissolved CO
2
. The
regenerated solvent is then recycled to the absorption tower :
(a) Calculate the fractional CO
2
removal (moles absorbed per moles
fed), and the molal flow rate and the composition of the liquid
feed to the stripping column.
(b) Calculate the molal feed rate to the absorber required to produce
an absorber product gas flow rate of 1000 kg/h. [16]
11. (a) A sample of fuel oil has C/H ratio 9.33 (by weight) and contains
1.3% sulphur also on weight basis. The net calorific value of
the fuel oil is 39685 kJ/kg at 298 K. Calculate its gross calorific
value using latent heat of water at 298 K = 2442.5 kJ/kg. [8]
(b) The ultimate analysis of a residual fuel oil sample is given as
below : [8]
Carbon : 88.4%; Hydrogen : 9.4% and Sulphur : 2.2% (by weight)
It is used as a fuel in a power generating boiler with 25% excess
air.
Calculate :
(i) Theoretical dry air requirement
(ii) The actual dry air supplied
(iii) The Orsat composition of flue gases.
[3862]-236 11 P.T.O.
Or
12. (a) Calculate the gross and net calorific values of the natural gas
at 298 K having the following molar composition : [8]
CH
4
: 89.4%; C
2
H
6
: 5%; C
3
H
8
: 1.9%; n-C
4
H
10
: 1%;
CO
2
: 0.7% and N
2
: 2%
Data :
Component GCV, kJ/mol NCV, kJ/mol
CH
4
890.65 802.62
C
2
H
6
1560.69 1428.64
C
3
H
8
2219.17 2043.11
C
4
H
10
2877.4 2657.32
Specific volume at 298 K and 101.3 kPa = 24.465 m
3
/kmol
(b) The ultimate analysis of coal sample is given below : [8]
Carbon : 61.5%; Hydrogen : 3.5%; Sulphur : 0.4%; Ash : 14.2%;
Nitrogen : 1.8% and rest oxygen. Calculate :
(i) Theoretical oxygen requirement per unit weight of coal.
(ii) The Orsat analysis of flue gases when coal is burned with
90% excess air.
P.T.O.
[3862]-238
THERMODYNAMICS
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
pocket calculator is allowed.
(vi) Figures to the right indicate full marks.
SECTION I
1. (a) State and explain the first law of thermodynamics and its
limitations. [12]
(b) Suppose a piston-cylinder assembly contains one mole of CO
2
at 0.101325 MPa and 300 K. The cylinder is placed on a hot
plate allowing the gas to expand at constant pressure till the
temperature rises to 400 K. Calculate the change in entropy
of CO
2
.
For CO
2
; C
P
o
= 45.369 + 8.688 10
3
T 9.619 10
5
T
2
. [6]
[3862]-238 2
Or
2. (a) State and explain the various statements of second law of
thermodynamics. [6]
(b) Calculate DU and DH in kJ for 1 kmol water, as it is vaporized
at the constant temperature of 373 K and constant pressure
of 101.3 kPa. The specific volumes of liquid and vapor at these
conditions are 1.04 10
3
and 1.675 m
3
/kmol respectively;
1030 kJ of heat is added to water for this change. [6]
(c) An inventor claims to have designed a heat engine which absorbs
1000 kJ/s energy as heat from a source at 500C and delivers
650 kW power. He further states that the ambient atmosphere
at 25C is used as a sink for the engine. As a patent officer
would you consider his claim to be theoretically feasible and
issue a patent ? Support your judgement using thermodynamic
concepts. [6]
3. (a) What is the Hesss law of constant heat summation ? Explain. [6]
(b) Define :
(i) Standard heat of combustion
(ii) Standard heat of formation. [4]
(c) Pure CO is mixed with 100% excess air and completely burned
at constant pressure. The reactants are originally at 400 K.
Determine the heat added or removed if the products leave
[3862]-238 3 P.T.O.
at 600 K. The standard heat of reaction at 298 K is
283.028 kJ per mol CO burned. The mean specific heats
applicable in the temperature range of this problem are 29.10,
29.70, 29.10, and 41.45 J/mol K respectively for CO, O
2
, N
2
and CO
2
respectively. [6]
Or
4. (a) What is the effect of temperature on heat of reaction ? Derive
the equation for the same. [12]
(b) Heat of combustion of solid carbon and gaseous CO are respectively,
3913.78 kJ/mol and 283.18 kJ/mol. Determine the heat of
formation of CO. [4]
5. (a) Will it be possible to prepare 0.1 m
3
of alcohol-water
solution by mixing 0.03 m
3
alcohol with 0.07 m
3
pure
water ? If not possible, what volume should have been mixed
in order to prepare a mixture of the same strength and of
the required volume ? Density of ethanol and water are 789
and 997 kg/m
3
, respectively. The partial molar volumes of
ethanol and water at the desired compositions are :
Ethanol = 53.6 10
6
m
3
/mol; Water = 18 10
6
m
3
/mol. [6]
(b) Explain the effect of temperature and pressure on chemical
potential. [10]
[3862]-238 4
Or
6. (a) Explain the effect of temperature and pressure on activity
coefficients. [10]
(b) Show that in a binary solution, if the molar volume of one
of the components increases with concentration, the molar volume
of the other must decrease. [6]
SECTION II
7. (a) Prove that Raoults law is valid for one constituent of a binary
solution over the whole concentration range, it must also apply
to the other constituent. [12]
(b) An equimolar solution of benzene and toluene is totally evaporated
at a constant temperature of 363 K. At this temperature, the
vapor pressure of benzene and toluene are 135.4 and 54 kPa,
respectively. What are the pressures at the beginning and at
the end of the vaporization process ? [6]
Or
8. (a) Explain the boiling point diagram. [10]
(i) Duhems theorem
(ii) Criterion of stability. [8]
9. (a) State and explain the criteria of chemical reaction
equilibrium. [8]
[3862]-238 5 P.T.O.
(b) Show that the equilibrium constant is determined by the
standard free energy change and the temperature. [8]
Or
10. (a) Derive the relationship between the mole fraction of the
components taking part in the reaction and the extent of
reaction. [8]
(b) Derive a series of hypothetical steps for carrying out the gas
phase reaction :
aA + bB cC + dD
when the reactants and the products are at their standard
state. Find out the free energy changes. [8]
11. (a) How does ATP provide energy to cells ? [10]
(b) Write a note on Applications of Gibbs free energy to biological
systems. [6]
Or
12. (a) What are the types of biochemical reactions ? Explain each
one of them in detail. [8]
(b) Explain the relationship between thermodynamics and biological
system. [8]
P.T.O.
[3862]-239
GENETICS AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
(2008 COURSE)
from Section II.
answer-books.
(iii) Neat diagrams should be drawn whenever necessary.
SECTION I
1. What are the steps involved in packaging of DNA ? Discuss
in detail and draw a neat labelled diagram. Explain the terms
Chromosome, Euchromatin and Heterochromatin. [18]
Or
2. Write notes on : [9 each]
(a) Hershey and Chases experiment
(b) Linkage, linkage map, co-dominance.
3. Describe in detail structure of DNA as per the Watson-Crick model.
What is Z DNA ? [16]
[3862]-239 2
Or
4. Explain the following : [8 each]
(a) DNA supercoiling
(b) Nucleic acids in Mitochondria.
5. Enumerate semiconservative DNA replication. Describe the experiment
leading to its discovery. [16]
Or
6. What is a mutation ? Describe various types of mutations and explain
how they affect expression of DNA. [16]
SECTION II
7. How many types of RNA are present ? Discuss structure and function
of each of them. [16]
Or
8. Describe in brief : [4 each]
(a) Translation initiation
(b) Introns and Exons
(c) Reverse Transcriptase
(d) Ribozyme.
9. What is Transcription ? Discuss in detail Transcription. [18]
[3862]-239 3 P.T.O.
Or
10. Explain the following : [9 each]
(a) Lac Operon
(b) Promoters and Enhancers.
11. How was genetic code decipherd ? What is Wobble hypothesis ?
Describe salient features of genetic code. [16]
Or
12. Discuss genetic disorders with respect to Thalassemia and
Diabetes. [16]

SE - 2010 Question Paper Set

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SE - 2010 Question Paper Set

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SE - 2010 Question Paper Set

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Total No. of Q uestions12] [Total No.

where S is the curved surface of the cylinder x

over the surface of the

where c is the curve of intersection of x

where s is surface of the region bounded by x = 0, y = 0,

using Simpsons (3/8)th rule taking 10 equal intervals. [10]

by using Simpsons (1/3)rd rule taking 8 intervals. [10]

using the Trapezoidal rule taking 12 intervals. [6]

, RL load of semi-converter. [6]

, RL load of semi-converter. [6]

transforms the circle

where x is in radian, by using Simpsons

with 7 ordinates by using Simpsons

where c is a constant, then prove that :

along the curve x

over the total surface of region bounded by x = 0, y = 0,

Express these in phasor form and determine the

(iii) |u(x, t)| < M. [7]

over the surface of cylinder x

over the surface of sphere x

with y(0) = 0, y(0) = 1. [6]

with y(0) = 1. [6]

where C is the contour |z + 1| = 2. [6]

where C is boundary of the rectangle 0 x p;

over the closed surface of the ellipsoid

You might also like